Subaru 2025 Forester Base User Manual

(3,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

sfw

FOREWORD

sfwaa

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Manual has all the

information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to

properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission

pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand

your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU

dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those

in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to

change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without

incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all

equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore

may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will

need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

FOREWORD

(4,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(5,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

S_002261-W

(2,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 12/ 16

(1,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Table of Contents
Keys and Doors .............................................................................. 115
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
1
Instruments and Controls ...............................................................163
Climate Control ...............................................................................275
Audio...............................................................................................293
Interior Equipment ..........................................................................297
Starting and Operating ...................................................................321
Driving Tips.....................................................................................425
In Case of Emergency.....................................................................455
Appearance Care ............................................................................479
Maintenance and Service................................................................487
Specifications .................................................................................531
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects....................543
Index ...............................................................................................561
Illustrated Index ................................................................................19
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags .......................................................35
Introduction........................................................................................ 5

(2,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(7,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

sint

Warranties ...........................................................................................6

Warranties for U.S.A........................................................................... 6

Warranties for Canada ....................................................................... 6

Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ........................................... 6

How to Use This Owner’s Manual .....................................................6

Using Your Owner’s Manual ...............................................................6

Safety Warnings................................................................................. 7

Safety Symbol.................................................................................... 7

Abbreviation List ............................................................................... 8

Vehicle Symbols .................................................................................9

Safety Precautions When Driving .....................................................9

Seatbelt and SRS Airbag .................................................................... 9

Child Safety ..................................................................................... 10

Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)........................................... 10

Drinking and Driving ........................................................................ 11

Drugs and Driving............................................................................ 11

Driving When Tired or Sleepy........................................................... 12

Modification of Your Vehicle............................................................. 12

Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving............................................ 12

Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation System........................... 12

Driving with Pets ............................................................................. 12

Tire Pressures ................................................................................. 13

On-Road and Off-Road Driving ......................................................... 13

Attaching Accessories ..................................................................... 13

Vehicle Operation............................................................................. 14

General Information..........................................................................15

California Perchlorate Advisory ........................................................ 15

Noise from under the Vehicle ........................................................... 15

Vehicle Data Recording .................................................................... 15

Event Data Recorder ........................................................................ 16

INTRODUCTION

(8,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARRANTIES

s00aa

WARRANTIES FOR U.S.A.

s00aa01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warran-

ties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including ap-

plicability, details of coverage and exclu-

sions, is in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. Read these warranties

carefully.

WARRANTIES FOR CANADA

s00aa05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including ap-

plicability, details of coverage and exclu-

sions, is in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. Read these warranties care-

fully.

WARRANTIES EXCEPT FOR

U.S.A. AND CANADA

s00aa06

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

HOW TO USE THIS OWN-

ER’S MANUAL

s00ab

USING YOUR OWNER’S MAN-

UAL

s00ab01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to

your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a

brief table of contents, so you can usually

tell at a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Introduction

This chapter informs you general infor-

mation before driving.

Illustrated Index

This chapter informs you about the

vehicle layout with illustrations.

Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS

Airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and Doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls

This chapter informs you about the

operation of instrument panel indicators

and how to use the instruments and other

switches.

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your

audio system.

INTRODUCTION

(9,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Chapter 6: Interior Equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and Operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving Tips

This chapter informs you how to drive

your SUBARU in various conditions and

explains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance Care

This chapter informs you how to keep

your SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the

dimensions and capacities of your

SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer Information

and Reporting Safety Defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s

in this manual. You can use it to quickly

find something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle

shown in the illustrations may differ from

your vehicle in terms of equipment.

SAFETY WARNINGS

s00ab02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to po-

tential hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as

well as all other portions of this manual

carefully in order to gain a better under-

standing of how to use your SUBARU

vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your vehi-

cle, or both, could result if the caution

is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or suggestions

how to make better use of your vehicle.

SAFETY SYMBOL

s00ab03

S_002288-W

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

– CONTINUED –

INTRODUCTION

(10,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ABBREVIATION LIST

s00ab04

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

ABS Anti-lock brake system

A/C Air conditioner

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD Blind Spot Detection

CVT

Continuously variable transmis-

sion

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distribution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LCA Lane Change Assist

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB

Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem

RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE

SUBARU Intelligent Drive

Abbreviation Meaning

SRH Steering Responsive Headlight

SRS Supplemental restraint system

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring system

INTRODUCTION

(11,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

VEHICLE SYMBOLS

s00ac

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P32.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions carefully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WHEN DRIVING

s00ad

SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAG

s00ad01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the driver

and all passengers must always

wear seatbelts when in the vehicle.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System) airbag does not replace

the safety benefits of wearing a

seatbelt. Used in combination with

the seatbelts, the SRS airbag

offers vehicle occupants the best

possible protection in the event of a

serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated in

the proper upright position when

the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs en-

ough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, care-

fully read the following sections.

– CONTINUED –

INTRODUCTION

(12,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. For the seatbelt system, refer to

“Seatbelts” �P54.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P82.

CHILD SAFETY

s00ad02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will be

caught between the passenger

and objects inside the vehicle.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children (in-

cluding those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child re-

straint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable speed and force and can

injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker

than adults, their risk of being

injured from deployment is greater.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P68.

. Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit in the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out. Refer

to “Child Safety Locks” �P145.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Refer

to “Windows” �P145.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through in-

advertent operation of the vehicle.

Also, on hot or sunny days, tem-

perature in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close all

windows and lock all doors.

For instructions and precautions, care-

fully read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to

“Seatbelts” �P54.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child Restraint Systems” �P68.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P82.

ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (Car-

bon Monoxide)

s00ad03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

INTRODUCTION

(13,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a long time while the engine

is running. If that is unavoidable,

then use the ventilation fan to force

fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves or

other obstructions to ensure that

the ventilation system always

works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possible.

If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all

windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas from

entering the vehicle.

DRINKING AND DRIVING

s00ad04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and im-

pairs your perception, judgment and

attentiveness. If you drive after drink-

ing – even if you drink just a little – it

will increase the risk of being involved

in a serious or fatal accident, injuring

or killing yourself, your passengers

and others. In addition, if you are

injured in the accident, alcohol may

increase the severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most

frequent causes of accidents. Since

alcohol affects all people differently, you

may have consumed too much alcohol to

drive safely even if the level of alcohol in

your blood is below the legal limit. The

safest thing you can do is never drink and

drive. However if you have no choice but

to drive, stop drinking and sober up

completely before getting behind the

wheel.

DRUGS AND DRIVING

s00ad05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and atten-

tiveness. If you drive after taking them,

it may increase your, your passengers’

and other persons’ risk of being

involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medica-

tion to determine if the drug you are taking

can impair your driving ability. Do not

drive after taking any medications that

can make you drowsy or otherwise affect

your ability to safely operate a motor

vehicle. If you have a medical condition

that requires you to take drugs, please

consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

– CONTINUED –

INTRODUCTION

(14,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR

SLEEPY

s00ad06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your pas-

sengers’ and other persons’ chances

of being involved in a serious accident

may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you are

tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should

make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your jour-

ney. When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VE-

HICLE

s00ad07

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system. Doing

so could cause the following functions

to be inoperable.

. Combination meter display (color

LCD)

. Rear view image and help lines

. Vehicle settings

. Climate control

. Front seat heater and ventilation (if

equipped)

. Clock

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types of

modifications could affect its perfor-

mance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regula-

tions. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from mod-

ification may not be covered under

warranties.

USE OF CELL PHONES/TEXT-

ING AND DRIVING

s00ad16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text while

driving; it may distract your attention

from driving and lead to an accident. If

you use a cell phone to talk or text, first

pull off the road and park in a safe

place. In some States/Provinces, it

may be lawful to talk on a phone while

driving, but only if the phone is hands-

free.

DRIVING VEHICLES EQUIPPED

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

s00ad09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the navi-

gation system while driving. The loss

of attention to driving could lead to an

accident. If you wish to operate the

controls of the navigation system, first

take the vehicle off the road and stop it

in a safe location.

DRIVING WITH PETS

s00ad10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also

for their own safety that pets should be

INTRODUCTION

(15,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protection society or pet

shop.

TIRE PRESSURES

s00ad11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month and

before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. For detailed

information, refer to “Tires and Wheels”

�P506.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly become

hot. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread se-

paration, and destruction of the

tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an

accident.

ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

s00ad13

This vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles have a signifi-

cantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a

higher ground clearance and higher

center of gravity, making it more likely to

roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It

also handles and maneuvers differently

from other passenger cars. For this

reason, please read carefully the follow-

ing section and follow the instructions and

precautions in order to prevent serious

injury or death due to loss of control,

rollover and other accidents. Refer to

“On-Road and Off-Road Driving” �P431.

ATTACHING ACCESSORIES

s00ad15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than prop-

erly placed inspection stickers) to

the windshield. Such items may

obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

. Do not connect any unauthorized

accessories or devices to the data

link connector (OBDII port). This

connector should be used only with

compatible diagnostic devices for

inspection and maintenance by an

authorized service technician

using authorized service tools.

Connecting unauthorized devices,

such as a driver-behavior tracking

device, may adversely affect vehi-

cle systems, including safety sys-

tems, or allow others to access

information stored in your vehicle.

The use of unauthorized devices

may also cause unexpected mal-

functions, such as a drained bat-

tery, or may damage vehicle sys-

tems. The manufacturer’s warranty

will not cover any part that mal-

functions, fails, or is damaged due

to the use of an unauthorized

device with the data link connector.

– CONTINUED –

INTRODUCTION

(16,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

VEHICLE OPERATION

s00ad18

Before leaving vehicle unat-

tended

s00ad1801

CAUTION

Always lock your vehicle and carry

your access key fob with you.

There is a risk for vehicle theft or

unauthorized persons tampering with

the vehicle or installing malicious

electronic devices.

Key number plate storage

s00ad1802

NOTE

. The key number is required when

repairing the vehicle or making a

spare access key fob. If you lose the

plate with these numbers stamped on

it, you will not be able to make a spare

access key fob. To prevent it from

being stolen, do not leave it in the

vehicle and store it in a safe place.

Refer to “Keyless Access with Push-

Button Start System” �P117.

. If you lose your key, we recommend

that you delete the lost access key fob

registration to prevent theft. Only a

SUBARU dealer can delete key fob

registration. We recommend that you

consult your SUBARU dealer. Refer to

“Key Replacement” �P132.

Vehicle modifications

s00ad1803

WARNING

. Do not install parts, make custom

adjustments or perform wiring or

other operations that are not sui-

table for the vehicle.

. Do not connect accessories to the

vehicle wiring or connectors unless

they are genuine SUBARU pro-

ducts. SUBARU’s vehicle warranty

does not cover any malfunctions

resulting from connecting the ve-

hicle to products other than those

specified.

. It may be illegal to modify the

vehicle by installing parts other

than genuine SUBARU parts.

Consult your SUBARU dealer

about the kinds of parts (tires,

wheels, mufflers, etc.) you can

legally install on your vehicle.

Device installation

s00ad1804

WARNING

Connecting devices that are not in-

tended to be used in the vehicle or in a

particular connector can adversely

affect the vehicle system or cause the

auxiliary battery to discharge. It may

also cause personal information leaks

or unauthorized remote operation of

vehicle features, resulting in unfore-

seen complications. Any complication

caused by connecting a device other

than one intended to be used in the

vehicle is not covered by the manu-

facturer’s warranty. SUBARU also

bears no responsibility for any such

complication.

. The vehicle trouble diagnosis con-

nector should only be used to

connect the vehicle data link con-

nector (OBDII) for inspection and

maintenance purposes.

. Use the USB port only for data

communication with your vehicle

and for device charging.

INTRODUCTION

(17,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Suspicious device handling

s00ad1805

WARNING

If you find an unrecognized device on

your vehicle, consult your SUBARU

dealer immediately.

Any problem or safety risk due to the

connection of an unauthorized device

is not covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty. SUBARU also bears no

responsibility for any such cause.

Deleting personal information

from vehicle

s00ad1806

CAUTION

When transferring ownership of your

vehicle, delete the personal informa-

tion registered in the vehicle by per-

forming a Factory Data Reset. For

details about the Factory Data Reset,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the audio and navigation

system.

Note that certain personal information

inputted in the Head Unit and the

phone number of any paired device

will remain in vehicle data logs even

after the Factory Data Reset. These

data logs are strictly for quality assur-

ance purposes and not viewable by

any subsequent purchaser. To have

those logs deleted permanently from

the vehicle, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

GENERAL INFORMATION

s00ak

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

s00ak03

Certain vehicle components, such as

airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners

and keyless entry transmitter batteries,

may contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.

gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

NOISE FROM UNDER THE VE-

HICLE

s00ak01

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after

the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This

noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-

tem and the operation is normal. The

noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

VEHICLE DATA RECORDING

s00ak08

The vehicle is equipped with sophisti-

cated computers that will record certain

data, such as:

. Vehicle speed

. Engine speed

. Engine control information

. Shift state information

. Driving information, etc.

Data usage

s00ak0801

SUBARU may use the data recorded in

this computer to diagnose malfunctions,

conduct research and development, and

improve quality.

SUBARU will not disclose the recorded

data to a third party except:

– CONTINUED –

INTRODUCTION

(18,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. With the consent of the vehicle owner

or with the consent of the lessee if the

vehicle is leased

. In response to an official request by

the police, a court of law or a govern-

ment agency

. For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit

. For research purposes where the data

is not tied to a specific vehicle or

vehicle owner

EVENT DATA RECORDER

s00ak04

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main purpose

of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obsta-

cle, data that will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed. The

EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for

a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/

fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no perso-

nal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However,

other parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the infor-

mation if they have access to the vehicle

or the EDR.

INTRODUCTION

(19,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(20,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(21,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

sill

Exterior ..............................................................................................20

Interior ...............................................................................................22

Cargo Area ........................................................................................25

Instrument Panel...............................................................................26

Steering Wheel..................................................................................27

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches ........................28

Combination Meter ...........................................................................29

U.S.-Spec. Models ............................................................................ 29

Canada-Spec. Models....................................................................... 30

Warning and Indicator Lights ..........................................................32

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(22,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

EXTERIOR

s00ay

S_002322-W

Engine hood (page 493)

Headlights (page 238, 523)

Turn signal lights (page 248, 523)

Windshield wipers (page 251, 516)

Moonroof (page 159)

Roof rails (page 441)

Outside mirrors (page 269)

Door locks (page 137)

Tire pressure (page 509)

Flat tires (page 459)

Tire chains (page 437)

Fog lights (page 248, 523)

Tie-down hooks (page 466)

Front camera (page 376)

Towing hook (page 466)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(23,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_002323-W

Rear view camera (page 383)

Rear wiper (page 252)

Rear window defogger (page 254)

Lights (page 238, 523)

Turn signal lights (page 248, 523)

Fuel filler lid and cap (page 325)

Child safety locks (page 145)

Tie-down holes (page 466)

Rear gate (page 148, 150)

Towing hook (page 466)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(24,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

INTERIOR

s00az

S_002324-W

Lock release knobs (page 47)

Head Restraint Adjustment for rear

seat (page 49)

Seatbelts (page 54)

Dome light (page 298)

Head Restraint Adjustment for front

seat (page 44)

Front seats (page 37)

Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 78)

Rear seats (page 46)

Reclining the seatback (page 49)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(25,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_002325-W

Wireless charger (page 308)

USB power supply (page 306)/AUX*

Select lever (page 343)

Glove box (page 302)

Bottle holder (page 305)

Center console (page 303)

Electronic parking brake switch (page

363)

Cup holder (page 304)

Accessory power outlet (page 305)

View monitor switch (page 377)

Console USB power supply (page 307)

Rear seat heater switches (page 53)

*: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system (if equipped), refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(26,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_002326-W

Assist grip (page 314)

Sun visors (page 300)

Inside mirror (page 255)

Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

Overhead console (page 302)

Door interlock switch (page 298)

Map light (page 298)

Moonroof switch (page 160)

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for SUBARU STARLINK.

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(27,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CARGO AREA

s00bf

S_002327-W

Cargo area cover (page 317)

Rear gate light (page 299)

Temporary spare tire (page 456)

Maintenance tools (page 458)

Under-floor storage compartment

(page 319)

Tether anchorages (page 81)

Cargo upper hooks (page 316)

Cargo area light (page 299)

Rear center seatbelt (page 58)

Power rear gate lock button (page 152)

Power rear gate button (page 152)

Cargo tie-down hooks (page 319)

Shopping bag hooks (page 316)

Release lever for rear seatback (page

47)

Accessory power outlets (page 305)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(28,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

INSTRUMENT PANEL

s00ba

S_002328-W

Power window switches (page 145)

Remote control mirror switch (page

269)

Driver’s seat memory (page 40)

Ventilators (page 276)

Combination meter (page 171)

Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 271)

Hazard warning flasher switch (page

170)

Camera for Driver Monitoring System

(page 409)

Ignition switch*

Hood release knob (page 493)

Fuse box (page 521)

Center information display (11.6-inch

display models) (page 219)/Climate

control (page 280)/Audio*

/Navigation

system*

Center information display (dual 7.0-

inch display models) (page 207)/Cli-

mate control (page 278)/Audio*

Power rear gate button (page 151)

Illumination brightness control dial

(page 174)

Hands-Free Power Rear Gate off

switch (page 154)

*1: Models with push-button ignition switch

(page 332)

Models without push-button ignition switch

(page 330)

*2: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system (if equipped), refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(29,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

STEERING WHEEL

s00bb

S_002329-W

Audio control switch*

Talk switch for voice command sys-

tem*

Cruise control switches*

Shift paddles (page 347)

SI-DRIVE switch (page 351)

Heated Steering Wheel switch (page

272)

SRS airbag (page 82)

Horn (page 273)

Hands-free phone switch*

Control switches for combination meter

display (color LCD) (page 198)

*1: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

*2: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for

the EyeSight system.

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(30,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

LIGHT CONTROL AND WIPER CONTROL LEVERS/

SWITCHES

s00bc

S_002330-W

Windshield wiper (page 249)

Mist (page 251)

Windshield washer (page 252)

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 252)

Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 251)/Sensor sensitivity control

(page 251)

Wiper control lever (page 251)

Light control switch (page 238)

Fog light switch (page 248)

Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 239)

Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 241)

Turn signal lever (page 248)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(31,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

COMBINATION METER

s00bd

U.S.-SPEC. MODELS

s00bd01

S_002331-W

Tachometer (page 171)

Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 193)

Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 197)

Trip meter and odometer (page 171)

Speedometer (page 171)

Fuel gauge (page 172)

Digital speed screen (page 204)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

(page 173)

– CONTINUED –

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(32,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CANADA-SPEC. MODELS

s00bd03

S_002332-W

Tachometer (page 171)

Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 193)

Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 197)

Trip meter and odometer (page 171)

Speedometer (page 171)

Fuel gauge (page 172)

Digital speed screen (page 204)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

(page 173)

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(33,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ILLUSTRATED INDEX

(34,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
s00be
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 176
Front passenger’s seatbelt
warning light
176
Rear seatbelt warning light 177
SRS airbag system warn-
ing light
178
Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator light
179
Front passenger’s frontal
airbag OFF indicator light
179
CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator
light
179
Charge warning light 180
Oil pressure warning light 180
Engine low oil level warn-
ing light
180
AT OIL TEMP warning light 181
/ ABS warning light 182
/
Brake system warning
light
183
/
Electronic parking brake
indicator light
184
Door open indicator light 186
Engine hood open warning
light
186
Low fuel warning light 186
Mark Name Page
All-Wheel Drive warning
light
186
Power steering warning
light
187
Auto Vehicle Hold indica-
tor light
186
Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light/Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation
indicator light
187
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light
188
Access key warning indi-
cator (if equipped)
189
Security indicator light 192
Turn signal indicator lights 193
High beam indicator light 193
High beam assist indicator 193
Automatic headlight beam
leveler warning light
193
LED headlight warning
light
193
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
193
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
194
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
194
Headlight indicator light 194
Low tire pressure warning
light (U.S.-spec. models)
181
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
32

(35,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Mark Name Page
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
186
Auto Start Stop OFF indi-
cator light
194
Auto Start Stop indicator
light (green)
194
Auto Start Stop warning
light (yellow)
194
Auto Start Stop No Activity
Detected indicator light
194
BSD/RCTA warning indi-
cator (if equipped)
195
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
(if equipped)
195
SI-DRIVE indicator 192
X-MODE indicator (if
equipped)
195
Hill descent control indica-
tor light (if equipped)
195
Icy road surface warning
indicator
195
RAB warning indicator (if
equipped)
196
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
196
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF
indicator (if equipped)
196
Mark Name Page
Driver Monitoring System
operation indicator light
(green) (if equipped)
196
Driver Monitoring System
warning light (yellow) (if
equipped)
196
Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator light (if
equipped)
196
Driver Monitoring System
temporary stop indicator
light (if equipped)
196
ILLUSTRATED INDEX
33
1

(36,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(37,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s01
1-1. Front Seats ....................................................................................37
Manual Seat (If Equipped) ............................................................. 39
Power Seat (If Equipped)............................................................... 40
Driver’s Seat Memory Function (If Equipped)................................. 40
Head Restraint Adjustment............................................................ 44
1-2. Rear Seats .....................................................................................46
Folding Down the Rear Seatback................................................... 47
Reclining the Seatback (If Equipped) ............................................. 49
Head Restraint Adjustment............................................................ 49
Armrest (If Equipped).................................................................... 51
1-3. Seat Heater and Front Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) ................52
Front Seat Heater.......................................................................... 52
Front Seat Ventilation.................................................................... 53
Rear Seat Heater ........................................................................... 53
1-4. Seatbelts........................................................................................54
Seatbelt Safety Tips ...................................................................... 54
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).............................................. 55
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor
(ALR/ELR)................................................................................... 55
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ................................................ 55
Fastening the Seatbelt .................................................................. 55
Seatbelt Maintenance .................................................................... 61
1-5. Seatbelt Extender..........................................................................62
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners .................................................................64
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner....................................... 65
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt Pretensioners ................ 66
System Monitors........................................................................... 66
System Servicing .......................................................................... 66
Precautions against Vehicle Modification....................................... 67
1-7. Rear Seat Reminder......................................................................67
1-8. Child Restraint Systems...............................................................68
Safety Precautions........................................................................ 68
Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems ......................... 69
Choosing a Child Restraint System ............................................... 71
When Installing the Forward Facing Child Restraint System
on the Front Passenger’s Seat .................................................... 71
Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt ............. 73
Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion ................................ 76
Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and
Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ........................................................ 78
1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag) ...............82
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System ...................... 82
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System for
Accessories and Any Objects ..................................................... 84
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag System and
Children...................................................................................... 86
Components ................................................................................. 89
SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System.................................... 91
SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS
1

(38,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag.................................... 102

SRS Airbag System Monitors ...................................................... 109

SRS Airbag System Servicing ..................................................... 110

Precautions against Vehicle Modification......................................111

How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer Concerning

Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect

the Advanced Airbag System .................................................... 112

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(39,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1-1. FRONT SEATS

s01aa

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driving,

as personal injury or loss of vehicle

control may occur.

. Before adjusting the seat, ensure

nothing is blocking the adjusting

mechanism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to ensure the seat is

securely locked. If it is not, it may

move suddenly or the seatbelt may

not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with front

seat locking mechanism and cause

an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits back

and upright in the seat. To reduce

the risk of sliding under the seatbelt

in a collision, the front seatbacks

should always be used in the

upright position while the vehicle is

running. If the front seatbacks are

not in the upright position and a

collision occurs, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated in

the proper upright position when

the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs en-

ough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control,

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

S_103040-MW

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children (in-

cluding those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child re-

straint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable speed and force and can

injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker

than adults, their risk of being

injured from deployment is greater.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P68.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(40,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103041-MW

To prevent the passenger from sliding

under the seatbelt in the event of a

collision, always put the seatback in

the upright position while the vehicle is

in motion. Also, do not place objects

such as cushions between the pas-

senger and the seatback. If you do so,

the risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

S_103042-MW

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may interfere

with the proper operation of the

following systems and could result in

serious injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. SRS seat cushion airbag

. Front seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

WARNING

S_103043-MW

Do not press your feet onto the

instrument panel. Doing so may pre-

vent the occupant detection function

of the SRS airbag system and SRS

airbag from functioning correctly. This

may result in serious injury or death in

the event of an accident.

WARNING

S_103044-MW

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint

when the occupant sits well back and

upright in the seat. Do not put cush-

ions or any other materials between

occupants and seatbacks or seat

cushions. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen will

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(41,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

S_103045-MW

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

MANUAL SEAT (If Equipped)

s01aa01

Forward and backward adjust-

ment

s01aa0101

1. Sit in the seat.

2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to

the desired position, and then release

the lever.

S_103059-W

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

Reclining the seatback

s01aa0102

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the

seatback to the desired position, and

then release the lever.

S_103060-W

2. Make sure the seatback is securely

locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined posi-

tion can spring back upward with force

when pulling up the lever. While operating

the lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

Seat height adjustment (dri-

ver’s seat)

s01aa0103

S_103061-W

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(42,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

POWER SEAT (If Equipped)

s01aa02

S_103208-W

Seat position forward/backward control

switch

Seat cushion angle control switch

Seat height control switch

Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

Lumbar support control switch (driver’s

seat)

To adjust the seat forward or back-

ward:

Move the seat position forward/backward

control switch forward or backward.

To adjust the seat cushion angle:

Pull up or push down the front end of the

seat cushion angle control switch.

To adjust the seat height:

Pull up or push down the rear end of the

seat height control switch.

To adjust the angle of the seatback:

Move the seatback angle (reclining) con-

trol switch.

To increase/decrease lower back sup-

port (driver’s seat):

Push the front side/rear side of the lumbar

support control switch.

NOTE

During forward/backward adjustment of

the seat, you cannot adjust the seat

cushion angle or seat cushion height.

DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY

FUNCTION (If Equipped)

s01aa03

WARNING

. To avoid loss of vehicle control or

personal injury, never perform the

following operations while driving.

– Adjusting the seat

– Retrieving the seat position

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure that cargo or the hands and

feet of rear seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechanism.

. Perform the seat position retrieval

before driving. Be sure to confirm

that the select lever is in the “P”

position, and the parking brake is

applied, when adjusting the seat

position. Do not drive until the

retrieval of the seat position is

complete.

. When retrieving a registered seat

position, make sure the hands, feet

and possessions of rear seat

passengers are clear of the seat

adjusting mechanism.

. When any unusual conditions or

malfunctions occur during the re-

trieval of the seat position, stop the

retrieval of the seat position by

performing any of the following.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(43,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– Operate any of the power seat

switches.

– Press the “SET” button.

– Press button “1” or “2”.

– Operate the outside mirror

control switch.

Some seat positions can be registered.

or “2” or each of the key fobs and retrieve

the seat position.

The following seat positions can be

registered.

. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of the seatback

. Angle of the seat cushion

. Height of the seat

. Angle of the outside mirrors

. Angle of the outside mirrors while the

vehicle is in reverse

NOTE

The seat position can also be retrieved

with the Driver Monitoring System user

information. To do so, perform user

registration in the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem settings. Refer to “Using the Driver

Monitoring System” �P417.

Registration of memory posi-

tion with button “1” or “2”

s01aa0301

1. Adjust the seat position under the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The select lever is in the “P”

position.

2. Register the adjusted positions by

either of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then press

either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds

within 5 seconds.

. While pressing and holding the

“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”

until a chirp sounds within 5 sec-

onds.

S_103155-W

A chirp will sound once to signal that the

following items were registered.

. Driver’s seat position

. Both outside mirrors’ angles

. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (pas-

senger’s side only)

NOTE

If a new position is registered for the same

button, the previously registered memory

position is deleted.

Registration of the reverse tilt-

down mirror angle with button

“1” or “2”

s01aa0302

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when regis-

tering the reverse tilt-down mirror

angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will move to the reverse tilt-down

position.

2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For

details about the settings, refer to

“Remote control mirror switch”

�P269.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(44,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3. Move the select lever to the “P”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will return to its original position.

4. Register the adjusted positions by

either of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then press

either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds

within 5 seconds.

. While pressing and holding the

“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”

until a chirp sounds within 5 sec-

onds.

A chirp will sound once to signal that the

following items were registered.

. Driver’s seat position

. Both outside mirrors’ angles

. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (pas-

senger’s side only)

NOTE

The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as the front passen-

ger’s side mirror. The setting of the right

and left side mirror/front passenger’s side

mirror operation can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details.

Registration of memory posi-

tion with a key fob

s01aa0303

1. Adjust the seat position under the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “OFF”

position.

. The select lever is in the “P”

position.

2. Hold the access key fob and press and

hold the “SET” button, then press the

“

” button of the access key fob.

S_103156-W

A chirp will sound once to signal that the

following items were registered.

. Driver’s seat position

. Both outside mirrors’ angles

. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles (pas-

senger’s side only)

NOTE

When registering the seat position, carry

the access key that you want to register

with you. If you are carrying 2 or more

access keys, registration may not be

possible.

Registration of the reverse tilt-

down mirror angle with the key

fob

s01aa0304

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when regis-

tering the reverse tilt-down mirror

angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will move to the reverse tilt-down

position.

2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For

details about the settings, refer to

“Remote control mirror switch”

�P269.

3. Move the select lever to the “P”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will return to its original position.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(45,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

5. Hold the access key fob and press and

hold the “SET” button, then press the

“

” button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once to signal that the

following items were registered.

. Driver’s seat position

. Both outside mirrors’ angles

. Reverse tilt-down mirror angles

(passenger’s side only)

NOTE

. The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as the front pas-

senger’s side mirror. The setting of the

right and left side mirror/front passen-

ger’s side mirror operation can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for details.

. The system stores the adjusted mirror

angle for approximately 45 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position. Register the mirror

angle while the memory function is

available.

Retrieval of memory position

registered with button “1” or

“2”

s01aa0305

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to

retrieve your registered seat position.

If the seat position is not optimum for

you, it may adversely affect your

driving and may reduce the effective-

ness of the seatbelt. That could result

in an accident involving serious injury

or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Put the select lever is in the “P”

position and apply the parking brake,

then press button “1” or “2”.

S_103157-W

A chirp will sound and the seat and

outside mirror move to the registered

position.

When the select lever is moved to the “R”

position, the outside mirror will move to

the registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

. If the vehicle battery is removed, the

registered memory position data will

not be deleted.

. When the button “1” or “2” is pressed

within 45 seconds after the driver’s

door is opened, the registered mem-

ory position can be retrieved even if

the ignition switch is in the “OFF”

position.

. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed at

the same time, execution of seat

position retrieval may not be possible.

. When the retrieved position is the

same as the current seat position, a

chirp will sound twice.

Retrieval of the memory posi-

tion registered with access key

fob

s01aa0306

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(46,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing

the “

” button or touching the sensor

behind the door handle.

S_103158-W

3. Open the driver’s door.

A chirp will sound and the seat and angle

of the outside mirrors moves to the

registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the “R”

position, the outside mirror will move to

the registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

. A retrieved seat position might deviate

as the function is used continuously

over time.

. A retrieved seat position might deviate

if you attempt to continue operating

the registered seat in the same direc-

tion when the registered seat is

already at the farthest possible point of

adjustment in any direction.

. If the registered memory position

cannot be retrieved after performing

the previous procedures, try the fol-

lowing procedures.

(1) Press the “SET” button on the

driver’s door.

(2) Press the “

” button on the

access key fob or the door lock

button to lock the doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures

again.

. If the keyless access function is

disabled, the memory position cannot

be retrieved by touching the sensor

behind the driver’s door handle.

However, the memory position can still

be retrieved by pressing the “

” button

on the access key fob. For information

about how to enable/disable the key-

less access function, refer to “Dis-

abling Keyless Access Function”

�P127.

. If a new position is registered for the

same access key fob, the previously

registered memory position data will

be deleted.

. If you are carrying 2 or more access

keys, seat position retrieval may not

be possible.

. If, while carrying an access key, 45

seconds passed after you enter the

operating range of the keyless access

function, it may not be possible to

retrieve the registered memory posi-

tion even if the door is open. For the

operating range of the keyless access

function, refer to “Locking and Un-

locking with “Keyless Access” Entry

Function” �P120.

Clearing the registered seat

position with access key fob

s01aa0307

1. Close the driver’s door.

2. Hold the access key fob and press and

hold the “SET” button, then press the

“

” button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat

position and outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side will be cleared.

NOTE

After deleting the seat position, wait for a

few moments before registering a new

seat position.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST-

MENT

s01aa04

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(47,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck from

the rear. Also, never install the

head restraints backwards. Doing

so will prevent the head restraints

from functioning as intended.

Therefore, when the head re-

straints are removed, all head

restraints must be reinstalled

properly to protect vehicle occu-

pants.

. All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit

in a vehicle’s seat until the head

restraints are placed in their proper

positions in order to minimize the

risk of neck injury in the event of a

crash.

. The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat head

restraints are designed to be in-

stalled into the rear seats only. Do

not attempt to install the front seat

head restraints into the rear seats,

or the rear seat head restraints into

the front seats.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjus-

table in the following ways.

Head restraint height adjust-

ment

s01aa0401

S_103209-W

Head restraint

Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button.

To remove:

Pull out the head restraint while pressing

the release button.

To install:

Press and hold the release button while

pushing the head restraint in until it locks

in place.

S_103048-MW

Each head restraint should be adjusted

so that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(48,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be pulled

out or installed due to insufficient clear-

ance between the head restraint and the

roof, tilt the seat and then perform the

installation and removal tasks.

1-2. REAR SEATS

s01ac

WARNING

S_103049-MW

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint

when the occupant sits back and

upright in the seat. Do not place

cushions or any other materials be-

tween occupants and seatbacks or

seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

S_103045-MW

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback as

it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(49,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

FOLDING DOWN THE REAR

SEATBACK

s01ac02

WARNING

. When you fold down the seatback,

check that there are no passengers

or objects on the rear seat. Not

doing so creates a risk of injury or

property damage if the seatback

suddenly folds down.

. Never allow passengers to ride on

the folded rear seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result in

serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to its

original position, shake the seat-

back slightly to confirm that it is

securely fixed in place. If the seat-

back is not securely fixed in place,

the seatback may suddenly fold

down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the cargo area, which could

cause serious injury or death.

WARNING

S_103062-W

S_103210-W

Striker

When the seatback is returned to its

original position, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lead

to serious injury or an accident be-

cause the operation efficiency of the

seatbelt is inhibited.

. The seatbelt should not be caught

in the seatback and it should be

fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not pass

behind the striker for the seatback.

CAUTION

Do not hang luggage etc. on the

striker. The possibility exists that the

seatback may not be able to be fixed

firmly in place. This could lead to

unexpected accidents

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(50,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Folding down the rear seatback

s01ac0202

1. Lower the head restraint of the rear

center seating position.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the

lock release knob or release lever (if

equipped) and then fold the seatback

down.

S_103211-W

Lock release knob

Release lever (if equipped)

Return the rear seatback

s01ac0204

WARNING

S_103064-W

. When returning the seatback to its

original position, observe the fol-

lowing precaution.

Failure to observe the precaution

may damage the seatbelt, impair-

ing its effectiveness, and possibly

result in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback to its

original position, pull the seatbelt

out towards the vehicle exterior so

that it will not be caught between

the seatback and the trim.

S_103212-W

Unlocked

Locked

Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the

unlocking marker on the lock release

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(51,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

knob is no longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its

original position, check that the un-

locking marker on the lock release

knob is not visible. Also, shake the

seatback slightly to confirm that it is

securely fixed in place. If the seatback

is not securely fixed in place, the

seatback may suddenly fold down in

the event of sudden braking, or ob-

jects may move out from the cargo

area, which could cause serious injury

or death.

RECLINING THE SEATBACK (If

Equipped)

s01ac06

WARNING

S_103041-MW

To prevent the passenger from sliding

under the seatbelt in the event of a

collision, observe the following pre-

cautions:

. Keep the seatback in the upright

position while the vehicle is in

motion.

. Do not place objects such as

cushions between the passenger

and the seatback.

Otherwise, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up

over the abdomen will increase, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with a cargo

area cover, observe the following

precautions.

. Be careful not to pinch your hand

between the head restraint and the

cargo area cover when you recline

the rear seat.

. Move the front cover of the cargo

area cover backward so that the

cover is not damaged by the

reclined seatback. Refer to “Cargo

Area Cover” �P317.

S_103151-W

Pull the strap and adjust the seatback to

the desired position.

Then release the strap and move the

seatback back and forth to confirm that it

is securely fixed in place.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST-

MENT

s01ac03

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(52,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck from

the rear. Therefore, when the head

restraints are removed, all head

restraints must be reinstalled

properly to protect vehicle occu-

pants.

. All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit

in a vehicle’s seat until the head

restraints are placed in their proper

positions in order to minimize the

risk of neck injury in the event of a

crash.

. The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat head

restraints are designed to be in-

stalled into the rear seats only. Do

not attempt to install the front seat

head restraints into the rear seats,

or the rear seat head restraints into

the front seats.

Rear windows side seating po-

sition

s01ac0301

S_103213-W

Head restraint

Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull

out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes

that are located on the top of the seatback

until the head restraint locks. Press and

hold the release button to lower the head

restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be pulled

out or installed due to insufficient clear-

ance between the head restraint and the

roof, tilt the seat and then perform the

installation and removal tasks.

Rear center seating position

s01ac0302

CAUTION

S_103214-MW

Incorrect (retracted position)

Correct (extended position)

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(53,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_103215-W

Head restraint

Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull

out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes

that are located on the top of the seatback

until the head restraint locks. Press and

hold the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visi-

bility.

ARMREST (If Equipped)

s01ac01

S_103065-W

To lower the armrest, pull the armrest’s

top edge.

WARNING

. Make sure to have the rear pas-

sengers wear the seatbelts before

lowering the armrest. If the rear

passengers wear the seatbelts

after lowering the armrest, seat-

belts cannot provide maximum

restraint, causing serious injuries.

. To avoid serious injury, never allow

passengers to sit on the center

armrest while the vehicle is in

motion.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(54,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1-3. SEAT HEATER AND

FRONT SEAT VENTILATION

(If Equipped)

s01ab

The seat heater and front seat ventilation

operate when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

. Do not put hard or heavy objects or

ones with protrusions on the seat,

and do not stab the seat with sharp

objects, such as pins or needles.

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat, such

as a blanket, cushion, or similar

items. This may cause the seat

heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough

or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period of

time while the engine is not running can

cause battery discharge.

FRONT SEAT HEATER

s01ab05

Adjust the front seat heater function on

the center information display.

S_103216-W

Seat heater indicator

Front passenger’s seat heater icon

Driver’s seat heater icon

Touch the driver’s/passenger’s seat hea-

ter icon on the climate control screen.

Each time you touch the icon, the mode

will change as follows.

ZOM0967-W

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

Holding and releasing the seat heater

icon turns the seat heater off in any mode.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot be

used simultaneously with the seat venti-

lation (if equipped).

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(55,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

FRONT SEAT VENTILATION

s01ab09

S_103217-W

Seat ventilation indicator

Front passenger’s seat ventilation icon

Driver’s seat ventilation icon

Touch the driver’s/passenger’s seat ven-

tilation icon on the climate control screen.

Each time you touch the icon, the mode

will change as follows.

ZOM0967-W

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Holding and releasing the seat ventilation

icon turns the seat ventilation off in any

mode.

REAR SEAT HEATER

s01ab06

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center

console lid while operating the rear

seat heater switch. There is the risk of

fingers being caught in the lid.

S_103218-W

Left side

Right side

Indicator lights

Press the rear seat heater switch. Each

time you press the switch, the mode will

change as follows.

ZOM0978-W

HIGH:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the

seat to heat up quicker.

NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches retain

the previous switch position even if the

vehicle has restarted. The rear seat

switch will reset.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(56,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1-4. SEATBELTS

s01ae

SEATBELT SAFETY TIPS

s01ae01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

. All belts should fit snugly in order to

provide full restraint. Loose fitting

belts are not as effective in pre-

venting or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more persons

– even children. Otherwise, in an

accident, serious injury or death

could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attaching

hardware worn by occupants of a

vehicle that has been in a serious

accident. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children (in-

cluding those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child re-

straint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. The

SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable speed and force and can

injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker

than adults, their risk of being

injured from deployment is greater.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P68.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which

will record whether the seatbelt is in use

by the front passenger when an SRS

frontal, side or curtain airbag deploys.

Infants or small children

s01ae0101

Use a child restraint system that is

suitable for this vehicle. Refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P68.

Children

s01ae0102

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and be restrained using the seat-

belts. According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating positions than

in the front seating positions. Never allow

a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(57,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Expectant mothers

s01ae0103

S_103055-MW

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doc-

tor for specific recommendations. The lap

belt should be worn securely and as low

as possible over the hips, not over the

waist.

EMERGENCY LOCKING RE-

TRACTOR (ELR)

s01ae02

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

AUTOMATIC LOCKING RE-

TRACTOR/EMERGENCY

LOCKING RETRACTOR (ALR/

ELR)

s01ae03

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency

Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency

Locking Retractor normally functions as

an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).

The ALR/ELR has an additional locking

mode, “Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) mode”, intended to secure a child

restraint system.

The ALR mode functions as follows.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out

completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled

and the ELR mode is restored.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the

seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode. For instructions on how to install

the child restraint system using a seat-

belt, refer to “Installing Child Restraint

Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt” �P73.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is

restored to the Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

SEATBELT WARNING

LIGHT AND CHIME

s01ae04

Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and

Chime” �P176.

FASTENING THE SEATBELT

s01ae06

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a collision,

this spreads the force of the lap belt

over stronger hip bones instead of

across the weaker abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. To

reduce the risk of sliding under the

seatbelt in a collision, the front

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(58,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

seatbacks should be always used

in the upright position while the

vehicle is running. If the front

seatbacks are not used in the

upright position in a collision, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both

can result in serious internal injury

or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants and

seatbacks or seat cushions. If you

do so, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up

over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious

internal injury or death.

WARNING

S_103056-MW

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase the

risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather; they

could burn an occupant. Do not touch

such hot parts until they cool.

Front seatbelts

s01ae0601

1. Adjust the seat position.

Driver’s seat:

Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-

tion. Move the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat:

Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-

tion. Move the seat as far back as

possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after

giving it a strong pull, then pull it out

slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

S_103057-MW

5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(59,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_103058-MW

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on the hips, not on the waist.

Adjusting the front seat

shoulder belt anchor height

s01ae0611

S_103066-W

Adjust the shoulder belt anchor height to

the position best suited for the driver/front

passenger. Always adjust the anchor

height so that the shoulder belt passes

over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the web-

bing does not pass over your neck. If it

does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a

lower position. Placing the shoulder

belt over the neck may result in neck

injury during sudden braking or in a

collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae0612

1. Push the button on the buckle.

S_103219-MW

Button

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

Rear seatbelts (except rear

center seatbelt)

s01ae0602

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after

giving a strong pull on it, then pull it

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(60,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

S_103057-MW

4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

S_103058-MW

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on the hips, not on the waist.

Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae0613

1. Push the button on the buckle.

S_103219-MW

Button

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

Rear center seatbelt

s01ae0603

S_103220-W

Center seatbelt tongue plate

Anchor tongue plate

Anchor buckle

Center seatbelt buckle

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(61,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103069-W

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident. When

fastening the belt after it is pulled out

from the retractor, especially when

inserting the anchor tongue plate into

the mating buckle (on right-hand side),

always check that the webbing is not

twisted.

WARNING

S_103070-W

. Be sure to fasten both tongue

plates to the respective buckles. If

the seatbelt is used only as a

shoulder belt (with the anchor

tongue plate not fastened to the

anchor buckle on the right-hand

side), it cannot properly restrain the

wearer in position in an accident,

possibly resulting in serious injury

or death.

. Before fastening the seatbelt, con-

firm that the seatbelt is routed

through the belt guide. A seatbelt

not routed through the belt guide

can cause neck injuries during

sudden braking or in a collision,

since it may slip up on the neck.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess of the ceiling.

1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from

the slot in the recess by pulling the

anchor tongue plate, then pull out the

seatbelt slowly.

S_103071-W

2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt

guide.

S_103072-W

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(62,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3. Make sure that the “ ” mark on the

anchor tongue plate and the “

” mark

on the anchor buckle face outwards.

S_103202-W

4. After confirming that the webbing is

not twisted, insert the anchor tongue

plate attached at the webbing end into

the buckle on the right-hand side until

a click sounds.

S_103074-W

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

give it a strong pull and let it retract

slightly, then pull it out slowly again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

S_103075-W

6. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

S_103076-W

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on the hips, not on the waist.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(63,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae0614

1. Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side)

to unfasten the seatbelt.

S_103221-W

Button

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down, it is

necessary to disconnect the connector.

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

pointed object into the slot in the

anchor buckle on the right-hand side

and push it in. The anchor tongue

plate will then disconnect from the

buckle.

S_103200-W

3. With the belt held by hand, allow the

retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You

should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it

is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue

plate in the recess on the ceiling and

then insert the anchor tongue plate

into the slot located at the front of the

recess.

S_103079-W

CAUTION

S_103080-W

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit

against the trim, causing damage to

the trim.

. Do not allow the retractor to roll up

the seatbelt too quickly.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so

that the tongue plates are neatly

stored.

SEATBELT MAINTENANCE

s01ae07

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously

affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,

tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(64,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Replace the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes, oils,

chemicals and particularly battery

acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-5. SEATBELT EXTENDER

s01ai

If the front seatbelts are not long enough

to permit the tongue plate to engage with

the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt

extender is available from your SUBARU

dealer. When ordering an extender, only

order one particularly designed for your

vehicle. See your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

S_103081-W

The extender adds approximately 8

inches (200 mm) of length and it can be

used for either the driver or front pas-

senger seating position.

For the safety of others, the extender

should be removed after each use,

especially if the next person using the

seatbelt does not need one.

WARNING

Be sure to observe the following when

using the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions and

warnings could reduce the effective-

ness of the seatbelt and result in more

serious injury or death in the event of a

collision.

. Never use the seatbelt extender

with a child restraint system, as it

may not securely hold the restraint

system in place during an accident,

significantly increasing the risk of

death or serious injury.

. Never use the extender when the

belt itself is long enough to permit it

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(65,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

to be buckled properly. If removal

of heavy clothing is all that is

needed to permit the seatbelt to be

buckled properly, remove the hea-

vy clothing and do not use the

extender.

. Never leave the seatbelt exten-

der’s tongue plate engaged with

the seatbelt buckle when not in

use. Doing so may prevent the

airbag system from functioning

properly.

. Never connect the seatbelt exten-

der to the passenger seatbelt

buckle when the passenger seat is

empty; doing so may prevents the

airbag system from functioning

properly.

. Do not use the extender if the

buckle of the extender rests over

the abdomen.

. Do not let someone else use the

extender. Use of an extender when

it is not needed could reduce the

effectiveness of the seatbelt and

result in more serious injury or

death in the event of a collision.

. Use the extender only for the front

seatbelts and only for the model for

which it was originally provided.

Never use the extender for the rear

seatbelts or for a different model.

. Before you fasten a seatbelt ex-

tender, make sure that the seatbelt

extender is not twisted. A twisted

seatbelt extender can increase the

risk of a severe injury in an

accident.

. Do not use more than one seatbelt

extender at a time. Doing so could

decrease the effectiveness of the

seatbelt and increase the risk of

injury or death in an accident.

. Do not use a seatbelt extender that

has been used in an accident or

damaged.

WARNING

S_103082-W

. Make sure that the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

light is on when you use a seatbelt

extender in the front passenger’s

seat. The front passenger’s frontal

airbag OFF indicator light must

also be off. If it is on, the front

passenger’s SRS airbag will not

deploy in a collision, which could

result in death or serious injury.

Refer to “Front Passenger’s Fron-

tal Airbag ON and OFF INDICA-

TOR LIGHTS” �P179.

. The following conditions may

cause the SRS frontal airbag

system to detect that the driver and

front passenger are wearing seat-

belts, which prevents the SRS

frontal airbag system from operat-

ing correctly.

– The tongue plates of the driver

and front passenger seatbelt

extenders are inserted into the

seatbelt buckles, but the re-

spective extenders and seat-

belts are not connected.

– Leaving the tongue plate of the

extender inserted into the

seatbelt buckle when not in

use.

These conditions may prevent the

seatbelt warning light and warning

alarm from operating correctly.

They may also prevent the SRS

frontal airbags from operating cor-

rectly in a collision, which can

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(66,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

result in injury or death. When you

use a seatbelt extender, always

attach it to the seatbelt buckle and

seatbelt tongue plate correctly.

S_103083-W

To connect the extender to the seatbelt,

insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt

buckle so that the “PRESS” marks on the

buckle-release buttons of the extender

and the seatbelt are both facing the same

direction, as shown in the illustration. You

will hear a click when the tongue plate

locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the

buckle-release button on the extender,

not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and ex-

tender itself.

1-6. SEATBELT PRETEN-

SIONERS

s01af

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt

pretensioner.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

. Window-side rear passenger’s seat-

belts

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to be activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

and side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection, the

occupants should sit in an upright

position with their seatbelts prop-

erly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts”

�P54.

. Do not modify, remove or strike the

seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activation

of the seatbelt pretensioners or

could make the system inopera-

tive, possibly resulting in serious

injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have

no user-serviceable parts. For re-

quired servicing of seatbelt retrac-

tors equipped with seatbelt pre-

tensioners, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retractor

assemblies equipped with seatbelt

pretensioners or scrapping the

entire vehicle due to collision da-

mage or for other reasons, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts. The pretensioner can

also be activated by the following

sensors.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(67,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– Front impact sensors

– Side impact sensors

– Rollover sensor

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt pretensioners

should be replaced only by an

authorized SUBARU dealer. When

replacing seatbelt retractor assem-

blies, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt

pretensioner does not retract or can-

not be pulled out due to a malfunction

or activation of the pretensioner, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,

contact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the

contents in this section.

SEATBELT WITH SHOULDER

BELT PRETENSIONER

s01af01

NOTE

This section is applicable to the following

components.

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-

side)

S_103084-W

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner

is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The window-side rear passenger’s seat-

belt pretensioner includes a tension

reducing device that limits the peak

forces exerted by the seatbelt on the

occupant in the event of a collision.

The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-

sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by

the seatbelt on the occupant in the event

of a collision.

. Adaptive force limiter

The front passenger’s side adaptive force

limiter will select a reducing load to the

suit body size of the occupant as detected

by the occupant detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is acti-

vated, an operating noise will be heard

and a small amount of smoke will be

released. These occurrences are normal

and not harmful. This smoke does not

indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can-

not be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(68,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SEATBELT WITH SHOULDER

BELT AND LAP BELT PRETEN-

SIONERS

s01af02

NOTE

This section is applicable to the driver’s

seatbelt.

S_103222-W

Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner)

Lap belt pretensioner

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner

is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The shoulder belt pretensioner is sup-

plemented by a lap belt pretensioner,

which is located at the base of the center

pillar. The lap belt pretensioner instanta-

neously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack

if a certain level of frontal collision force is

detected. As a result, the seatbelt re-

strains the front seat occupant more

effectively.

The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner in-

cludes a tension reducing device which

limits the peak forces exerted by the

seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a

collision.

. Adaptive force limiter

The driver’s side adaptive force limiter will

select a reducing load to the suit body

size of the occupant as detected by the

occupant detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is acti-

vated, an operating noise will be heard

and a small amount of smoke will be

released. These occurrences are normal

and not harmful. This smoke does not

indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

SYSTEM MONITORS

s01af03

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

with the ignition switch in the “ON”

position. The seatbelt pretensioners

share the control module with the SRS

airbag system. Therefore, if any mal-

function occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner,

the SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS

Airbag System Monitors” �P109.

SYSTEM SERVICING

s01af04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt retrac-

tor assembly or scrapping the

entire vehicle damaged by a colli-

sion, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result in

accidental activation of the seatbelt

pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury. Do not use electrical test

equipment on any circuit related to

the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS

airbag systems. For required ser-

vicing of the seatbelt pretensioner,

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(69,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

consult your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Compo-

nents” �P89.

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt re-

tractors, have the work performed by

your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent that

the seatbelt pretensioner does not oper-

ate, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST VE-

HICLE MODIFICATION

s01af05

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications can

interfere with proper operation of the

seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genuine

SUBARU accessory parts to the

front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different size

and construction from the tires

specified on the vehicle placard

attached to the driver’s door pillar

or specified for individual vehicle

models in this Owner’s Manual.

1-7. REAR SEAT REMINDER

s01at

This function prompts the driver to con-

firm the presence of passengers and

cargo in the rear.

This function will be activated when the

rear doors are opened and closed.

It alerts the driver by warning messages

on the combination meter display (color

LCD) and beeps when the ignition switch

is turned from the “ON” position to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

S_103086-W

NOTE

. This function does not directly detect

passengers and cargo in the rear seat.

. This function detects the opening and

closing of the rear doors. In this

situation, there is the possibility that

the following phenomenon may occur.

– It may alert the driver even if there

are no passengers or cargo in the

rear seat.

– It may not alert the driver even if

there are passengers and cargo in

the rear seat.

. This function can be set to on or off by

the “Car settings”. For details, refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231 (11.6-inch display models)

. The ON/OFF setting will not be chan-

ged even if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(70,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The ON/OFF setting will be returned to

the default setting if the battery is

removed.

1-8. CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

s01ag

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s01ag19

S_103087-MW

Infants and children should be placed in

an infant or child restraint system on the

rear seat while riding in the vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower

and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)”

�P78).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraint systems

are not properly secured in the vehicle.

When installing the child restraint system,

carefully follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(71,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Lock release knob

S_103212-W

Unlocked

Locked

Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

. Do not leave children in the car

unattended. High interior tempera-

tures may cause heat stroke and

dehydration that result in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

S_103088-MW

Never let a passenger hold a child on

their lap or in their arms while the

vehicle is moving. The passenger

cannot protect the child (or infant) from

injury in a collision, because the child

will be caught between the passenger

and objects inside the vehicle. Addi-

tionally, if a passenger holds a child on

their lap or in their arms in the front

seat, they expose the child to another

serious danger. Since the SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

WARNING

S_103089-MW

Children should be properly restrained

at all times when in the vehicle. Never

allow a child to stand or kneel on any

seat. An unrestrained child will be

thrown forward during a sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously. Additionally, a child who

stands or kneels on or in front of the

front seat is exposed to another

serious danger. Since the SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

SAFETY TIPS FOR INSTALLING

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

s01ag16

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(72,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a

seatbelt extender is used when

installing a child restraint system,

the seatbelt will not securely hold

the child restraint system. Use of a

seatbelt extender could cause

death or serious injury to children

or other passengers in sudden

braking, swerving, or accidents.

. Attach the child restraint system to

the anchors properly. When using

the LATCH anchors, be sure that

there are no foreign objects around

the anchors. Make sure the child

restraint system is securely at-

tached. Otherwise, it may cause

death or serious injury to children

or other passengers in sudden

braking, swerving, or accidents.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint systems

can be thrown around inside of the

vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or

accident; they can strike and injure

vehicle occupants as well as result

in serious injuries or death to the

child.

. Several types of child restraint

systems may conceal the buckle of

the neighboring seat. If the occu-

pant of the neighboring seat cannot

correctly fasten the seatbelt, that

person must move to a different

seat. If the seatbelt cannot be

correctly fastened, there is the risk

of serious injury or death in the

event of sudden braking or a

collision.

. If the child restraint system cannot

be correctly installed because it

contacts the driver’s seat, move

the child restraint system to a

different seat. If it cannot be

installed in a different seat (other

than the driver’s seat), adjust the

front seat so that contact does not

occur.

. Even with advanced airbags, in-

fants and children can be seriously

injured by the airbag. Seat children

in the rear seat properly restrained.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are not restrained

or improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker

than adults, their risk of being

injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint sys-

tems on the REAR seats. You

should choose a restraint system

which is appropriate for the child’s

age, height and weight. According

to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in

the rear seating positions than in

the front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages for a

seat in the center seating position

unless a child restraint system

manufacturer’s instructions permit

and specify using anchors spaced

as far apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean their

heads or any other parts of their

bodies against the door or the area

of the seat, front and rear pillars or

roof side rails. The SRS side air-

bags and SRS curtain airbags

deploy even if children are seated

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(73,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

in the child restraint system, and

the impact could cause death or

serious injury to the child.

. To secure the child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to comply with all

installation instructions provided

by the child restraint system man-

ufacturer. Not doing so could result

in death or serious injury to children

in a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions supplied with it. After in-

stalling the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held securely

in position. If it is not held tight and

secure, the danger of your child

suffering personal injury in the event of

an accident may be increased.

CHOOSING A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM

s01ag02

S_103090-MW

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applic-

able requirements of Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards for the United

States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards for Canada. It can be identified

by looking for the label on the child

restraint system or the manufacturer’s

statement of compliance in the document

attached to the system. Also it is impor-

tant for you to make sure that the child

restraint system is compatible with the

vehicle in which it will be used.

NOTE

Some sizes of child restraint systems

may not fit the vehicle seat. Before

purchasing a child restraint system,

check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.

WHEN INSTALLING THE FOR-

WARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM ON THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT

s01ag15

WARNING

S_103091-MW

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. The front passenger’s seat is not

equipped with tether anchorages.

Therefore, when installing a child

restraint system that uses tether

straps, do not install it on the front

passenger’s seat.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(74,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Only forward facing child restraint sys-

tems (including booster seats) can be

installed on this seat and should only be

installed when it is unavoidable. When

you install a forward facing child restraint

system to the front passenger’s seat,

perform the following procedure.

1. Adjust the front passenger’s seat as

illustrated.

S_103224-W

Seat position: Rearmost as possible

Seat cushion height (if equipped):

Uppermost

Seatback: Upright

2. Install the child restraint system to the

front passenger’s seat. Refer to “In-

stalling a forward facing child restraint

system” �P74.

3. Place and secure the child in the child

restraint system.

4. Check that the front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON/OFF indicator light

status meets the requirements of your

child restraint system.

S_103093-W

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

When front passenger’s frontal air-

bag OFF indicator light is illumi-

nated:

Only forward facing child restraint

systems can be installed.

When front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator light is illumi-

nated:

When the indicator is illuminated, child

restraint systems cannot be installed

on the front passenger’s seat. Install

the child restraint system on the rear

seats. For more details, refer to

“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag

System” �P91.

5. Check that the child restraint system

does not contact the head restraint. If

the child restraint system does make

contact with the head restraint, raise

the head restraint to the extended

position. If the child restraint system

still makes contact, remove the head

restraint. For details, refer to “Head

Restraint Adjustment” �P44.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(75,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

INSTALLING CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEMS WITH ALR/

ELR SEATBELT

s01ag04

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be

increased.

. When installing a child restraint

system in the rear center seating

position, set both seatbacks to the

original position. Otherwise, the

child restraint system cannot be

securely restrained, which may

result in death or serious injuries in

the event of sudden stop, sudden

steering maneuver or an accident.

Installing a rearward facing

child restraint system

s01ag0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against the

contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in the window-side seating

position to be safe.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

S_103094-MW

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

S_103095-MW

5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode

is recommended by the manufac-

turer’s instructions supplied with the

child restraint system, perform the

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(76,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor

over from the Emergency Locking

Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the

retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate

the retractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt. It should not be possible to

move the child restraint system more

than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction

along the seatbelt path.

S_103096-MW

7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR

mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder

portion of the belt to confirm that it

cannot be pulled out (ALR properly

functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

S_103097-MW

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That func-

tion is restored by allowing the seatbelt to

retract fully.

Installing a forward facing child

restraint system

s01ag0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM ON THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT IF

THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

FRONTAL AIRBAG ON INDICA-

TOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

appropriate position.

2. For models with rear seat reclining

mechanism, if there is a gap between

the child restraint system and the

seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(77,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint when

the child restraint system is to be

installed, perform the following pro-

cedure.

. Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

. Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the child restraint system still

makes contact, install the child

restraint system in a seating posi-

tion other than the rear center seat.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P49.

S_103201-W

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against the

contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in the window-side seating

position to be safe.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compartment

in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, pass the rear center

seatbelt through the belt guide

properly. For details, refer to “Rear

center seatbelt” �P58.

S_103099-MW

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

S_103100-MW

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over

from the Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow

the belt to rewind into the retractor. As

the belt is rewinding, clicks will be

heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(78,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt. It should not be possible to

move the child restraint system more

than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction

along the seatbelt path.

S_103101-MW

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out

(ALR properly functioning).

10.Attach the tether hook onto the tether

anchorage and tighten the tether strap

firmly. For additional instructions, refer

to “Tether Anchorages” �P81.

S_103102-W

11. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

S_103103-MW

Remember that the head restraint is not

intended to be used at the lowest position

(retracted position). Therefore, when the

rear center seat is occupied (including

when a child restraint system is installed)

next time, be sure to raise the head

restraint to the extended position.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That func-

tion is restored by allowing the seatbelt to

retract fully.

INSTALLING A BOOSTER SEAT

OR BOOSTER CUSHION

s01ag05

S_103226-W

Booster seat

Booster cushion

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A BOOSTER SEAT/

CUSHION ON THE FRONT PAS-

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(79,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SENGER’S SEAT IF THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG

ON INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMI-

NATES. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

1. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

For booster seat:

S_103201-W

If the booster seat makes contact with

the head restraint when the booster

seat is to be installed, perform the

following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the booster seat still makes con-

tact, install the booster seat in a

seating position other than the rear

center seat. For details, refer to

“Head Restraint Adjustment”

�P49.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compartment

in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

For booster cushion:

Raise the head restraint to the ex-

tended position (center seat). Do not

remove the head restraint.

2. Place the booster seat/cushion and sit

the child on it. The child should sit well

back on the booster seat/cushion.

S_103107-W

3. For models with rear seat reclining

mechanism, if there is a gap between

the booster seat/cushion and the

seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat/cushion

and the child following the instructions

provided by its manufacturer. For

booster seat/cushion with a belt guide,

use the seatbelt through the belt

guide.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of child’s

shoulder and that the lap belt is

positioned as low as possible on the

child’s hips.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(80,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6. To remove the booster seat/cushion,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to

retract.

S_103108-W

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind the

child’s back. If an accident occurs,

this can increase the risk or

severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or reducing

injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A high-

positioned lap belt will increase the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

INSTALLATION OF CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEMS BY USE OF

LOWER AND TETHER AN-

CHORAGES (LATCH)

s01ag07

S_103109-W

WARNING

. Attach the child restraint system to

the anchors properly. When using

the LATCH anchors, be sure that

there are no foreign objects around

the anchors. Make sure the child

restraint system is securely at-

tached. Otherwise it may cause

death or serious injury to children

or other passengers in sudden

braking, swerving, or accidents.

. When installing a child restraint

system using LATCH anchors with

the rear seatbelt fastened, ensure

that the rear seatbelt does not

become caught in the child re-

straint system or the lower LATCH

anchorages.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(81,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

The seatbelt warning system of the rear

seats detects if any of the seats are

occupied by a passenger. Installing a

child restraint system in the rear seating

area, using the LATCH anchors, may

result in the activation of the passenger

seatbelt warning light and chime. Fas-

tening the rear seatbelt prior to installing

the child restraint system will avoid

activating the passenger seatbelt warning

light and chime. For details, refer to “Rear

passenger’s seats” �P177.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your

vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such

child restraint systems are secured to the

dedicated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

S_103110-MW

Your vehicle is equipped with 5 lower

anchorages and 3 tether anchorages for

accommodating such child restraint sys-

tems.

Lower anchorages

s01ag0702

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

S_103111-W

There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at

the rear seat. The second lower ancho-

rage from the right side is used for both

the right seat and center seat. Each lower

anchorage is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.

Using lower and tether an-

chorages

s01ag0704

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to confirm that the seat-

back is securely locked into place.

Otherwise, in an accident, serious

injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into

place. For details, refer to “Folding

Down the Rear Seatback” �P47.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(82,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottoms

of the rear seatback. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower

anchorages.

The lower anchorages are located

between the seatback and seat cush-

ion.

S_103113-W

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions supplied with it. After in-

stalling the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held securely

in position. If it is not held tight and

secure, the danger of your child

suffering personal injury in the event of

an accident may be increased.

3. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint of the

rear seating position where the child

restraint system is to be installed,

perform the following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the child restraint system still

makes contact, remove the head

restraint. For details, refer to “Head

Restraint Adjustment” �P49.

S_103201-W

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compartment

in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system

manufacturer, connect the lower

hooks onto the lower anchorages

located at “

” marks on the bottom of

the rear seatback. When the hooks

are connected, make sure the adja-

cent seatbelts are not caught.

S_103115-MW

5. For models with rear seat reclining

mechanism, if there is a gap between

the child restraint system and the

seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(83,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6. If your child restraint system is a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts), push the child restraint

system into the seat cushion and pull

both left and right lower tether belts up

to secure the child restraint system by

taking up the slack in the belt.

S_103116-MW

7. Attach the tether hook onto the tether

anchorage and tighten the tether strap

firmly. For additional instructions, refer

to “Tether Anchorages” �P81.

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion. It should not be possible

to move the child restraint system

more than 1 in (2.5 cm).

S_103117-MW

9. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of in-

stallation.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the

closest inspection location in the U.S.,

refer to the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) website.

In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

Tether Anchorages

s01ag0701

Your vehicle is equipped with three tether

anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a tether can be installed in

the rear seat. When installing a child

restraint system using tether, proceed as

follows, while observing the instructions

by the child restraint system manufac-

turer.

Since a tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

Tether anchorage location:

S_103227-W

Left seat anchorage

Center seat anchorage

Right seat anchorage

Three tether anchorages are installed on

the back side of the rear seatback.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(84,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

To hook the tether:

CAUTION

. Remove the head restraint when

mounting a child restraint system.

Otherwise, it might be possible that

the tether anchorage cannot be

fastened tightly.

. Store the head restraint that has

been removed in the cargo area.

Do not place the head restraint in

the passenger compartment to

prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compart-

ment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

1. Attach the tether strap to the appro-

priate tether anchorage.

S_103102-W

2. Tighten the tether strap securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the

closest inspection location in the U.S.,

refer to the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) website.

In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

1-9. SRS AIRBAG (Supple-

mental Restraint System

Airbag)

s01ah

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

name is used because the airbag system

supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating

position and each rear window-side

seating positions.

The system also controls seatbelt pre-

tensioners. For operation instructions and

precautions concerning the seatbelt pre-

tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P64.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS RE-

GARDING SRS AIRBAG SYS-

TEM

s01ah10

WARNING

To obtain maximum protection in the

event of an accident, the driver and all

passengers must always wear seat-

belts when in the vehicle. The SRS

airbags are designed only to be a

supplement to the primary protection

provided by the seatbelt. They do not

eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts.

Used in combination with the seat-

belts, the SRS airbag offers vehicle

occupants the best possible protection

in the event of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the

chance of severe injury or death in a

crash even when the vehicle has the

SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seatbelt system, refer to

“Seatbelts” �P54.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(85,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103119-MW

The SRS airbags deploy with consid-

erable speed and force. Occupants

who are not seated in the proper

upright position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deployment,

the driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control,

and the front passenger should move

the seat as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

S_103120-MW

. Do not sit or lean close to either

front door. The SRS side airbags

are stored in both front seat seat-

backs next to the door, and they

provide protection by deploying

rapidly in the event of a side impact

collision. However, the force of

SRS side airbag deployment can

injure an occupant if they are too

close to an SRS airbag.

. Since this vehicle is equipped with

SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or

lean close to the front or rear door

on either side. Do not put body

parts out of the window. The SRS

curtain airbags on both sides of the

cabin are stored in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point

behind the rear quarter glass), and

they provide protection by deploy-

ing rapidly in the event of a side

impact, rollover or an offset frontal

collision. However, the force of its

deployment can injure an occupant

if they are too close to an SRS

airbag.

. Do not sit or lean close to the SRS

airbag. Because the SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force to protect in high speed

collisions, the force of an airbag

can injure an occupant whose body

is too close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear a

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant who is not

seated in the proper upright posi-

tion.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that an

occupant may suffer minor injuries,

such as abrasions and bruises to

the face or arms, because of the

SRS airbag deployment force.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(86,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103138-MW

. Keep arms away from either door

or its internal trim. Vehicle occu-

pants could be injured in the event

of SRS side airbag deployment.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag. If

the SRS airbag deploys, these

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle, caus-

ing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released. This

smoke could cause breathing pro-

blems for people with a history of

asthma or other breathing trouble.

If you or your passengers have

breathing problems after SRS air-

bag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,

notify the buyer of the applicable

section in this Owner’s Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply

will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire

caused by leaking fuel. For details

about restarting of the engine, refer to

“If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an

Accident” �P477.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS RE-

GARDING SRS AIRBAG SYS-

TEM FOR ACCESSORIES AND

ANY OBJECTS

s01ah13

WARNING

S_103121-W

S_103122-MW

. Do not put any objects (including

straps or cords) over the steering

wheel pad, column cover, or dash-

board.

– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering

wheel, preventing the SRS

frontal airbag, etc. from oper-

ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-

ploys, these objects could be

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(87,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could inter-

fere with its proper operation and

could be propelled inside the ve-

hicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard accessories,

or another key. If the SRS knee

airbag deploys, those objects

could interfere with its proper

operation and could be propelled

inside the vehicle and cause injury.

WARNING

S_103123-W

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror

over the inside rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

WARNING

S_103124-MW

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to a

front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location could

be propelled through the cabin with

great force by the curtain airbag, or

it could prevent correct deployment

of the curtain airbag. In either case,

the result could be serious injuries.

. Never hang or place coat hangers

or other hard or pointed objects

near the side windows. If such

items are present when the SRS

curtain airbags deploy, they could

be thrown through the passenger

compartment and cause serious

injuries. They could also prevent

proper operation of the SRS cur-

tain airbags.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(88,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103126-MW

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over the driver’s seat

and front passenger’s seatback

and do not attach labels or stickers

to the driver’s seat and front

passenger’s seat surface on or

near the SRS side airbag or the

SRS seat cushion airbag. They

could prevent proper deployment

of the SRS side airbag or the SRS

seat cushion airbag, reducing pro-

tection available to the occupant of

the driver’s seat or the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not install a seat cover unless it

is a genuine SUBARU seat cover

exclusively designed for use with

the SRS airbag. Even when using a

genuine SUBARU seat cover, the

SRS side airbag or the SRS seat

cushion airbag may not function

normally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS RE-

GARDING SRS AIRBAG SYS-

TEM AND CHILDREN

s01ah14

WARNING

S_103040-MW

SUBARU strongly recommends that

ALL infants and children (including

those in child restraint systems) sit in

the REAR seat properly restrained in a

child restraint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the child’s

age, height and weight. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are lighter

and weaker than adults, their risk of

being injured from deployment is

greater. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating positions

than in the front seating positions. For

instructions and precautions concern-

ing child restraint systems, refer to

“Child Restraint Systems” �P68.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(89,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

S_103091-MW

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SEAT, AND NEVER INSTALL A

FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S FRONTAL

AIRBAG ON INDICATOR LIGHT IL-

LUMINATES. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

S_103089-MW

Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with consid-

erable force and can injure or even kill

the child.

WARNING

S_103088-MW

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can injure

or even kill the child.

WARNING

S_103127-W

S_103128-W

. Never allow a child to do the

following.

– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window.

– Wrap his/her arms around the

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(90,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

front seat seatback.

– Put his/her head, arms or other

parts of the body out of the

window.

In the event of an accident, the

force of SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously

because his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also equipped

with a front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, children and infants

should be placed on the rear seat

anyway and should be properly

restrained at all times.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(91,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

COMPONENTS

s01ah11

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

S_103228-W

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the

center portion of the steering wheel

Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag: near the top of the dashboard

SRS side airbag: in the door side of

each front seat seatback

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point

over the rear seat)

SRS knee airbag: under the steering

column

SRS seat cushion airbag: in the front

passenger’s seat cushion

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(92,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_103229-W

Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensors and rollover sensor)

Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger’s side)

Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

Front impact sensor (right-hand side)

Side airbag module (driver’s side)

Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

Side impact sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

Side impact sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

Airbag wiring

Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive

force limiter (front passenger’s side)

Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

Front passenger’s occupant detection

sensors

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights

SRS airbag system warning light

Side impact sensor (under the rear

center seat)

Side impact sensor (front door left-

hand side)

Side impact sensor (front door right-

hand side)

Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)

Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front pas-

senger’s side)

Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s

side)

Seat cushion airbag module (front

passenger’s side)

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(93,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SUBARU ADVANCED FRON-

TAL AIRBAG SYSTEM

s01ah02

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that

complies with the new advanced frontal

airbag requirements in the amended

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(FMVSS) No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well

as whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the

SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-

ment.

S_103129-W

This vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag

attached to the glove box lid beginning

with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer

to “Components” �P89.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. SRS seat cushion airbag for front

passenger

. SRS curtain airbag*

. SRS side airbag*

. SRS knee airbag for driver

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is

severe enough to deploy the front airbag

occurs.

These components supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

NOTE

Only driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are con-

trolled by the SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

s01ah0201

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates

in different ways depending on the se-

verity of impact.

Front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag

s01ah0202

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(94,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_103230-MW

Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are

installed between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system de-

termines whether the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or

not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P64.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly or

cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat such as

by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger’s seat. If liquid is spilled,

wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the

front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such

as an audio amplifier) other than a

genuine SUBARU accessory un-

der the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,

etc.) around the front passenger’s

seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehi-

cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat upholstery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Manual Seat” �P39

(models equipped with manual

seats only).

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(95,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SRS airbag system warning light

S_103131-W

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. If the SRS

airbag system warning light illuminates,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and consult a SUBARU dealer.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem. Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front

passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle

to your SUBARU dealer.

Passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights

s01ah0203

S_103093-W

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Air-

bag ON and OFF INDICATOR LIGHTS”

�P179.

Occupant detection system

s01ah0209

S_103230-MW

Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are

installed between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system de-

termines whether the following airbags

should be deployed or not.

. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS seat cushion

airbag

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat or

subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,

the SRS airbag system warning light

may illuminate to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the front passenger occupant

detection system. In this case, imme-

diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer.

If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights do not work

properly, do not allow anyone to sit on the

front passenger’s seat and have the

occupant detection system checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

Also, if luggage is placed on the front

passenger’s seat, this may adversely

affect the ability of the system to deter-

mine deployment. This may prevent the

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(96,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator lights from working prop-

erly. Check that the indicator lights work

properly.

When the OFF indicator light turns off and

the ON indicator light illuminates, the front

passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy

during a collision. Remove luggage from

the front passenger’s seat.

Conditions in which front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag is

not activated

s01ah0204

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an

infant or a child is restrained in it. (See

WARNING that follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant de-

tection system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG

IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it

correctly in the REAR seat. Also, it is

strongly recommended that any child

seat or booster seat be installed in the

REAR seat, and that even children

who have outgrown a child restraint

system be also seated in the REAR

seat. This is because children sitting in

the front passenger’s seat may be

killed or severely injured should the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

deploy. REAR seats are the safest

place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, observe

the following precautions. Failure to

do so may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant detection

system, activating the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag even though

that seat is occupied by the infant in

the child restraint system.

. Do not place any article on the seat

other than the infant in the child

restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant

in the child restraint system.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to place his/her hands or legs on

the front passenger’s seatback, or

allow him/her to pull the seatback.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(97,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator light illu-

minates and the OFF indicator

light turns off even when an

infant or a small child is in a

child restraint system (includ-

ing booster seat)

s01ah0213

S_103164-W

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Remove the child restraint system

from the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as

well as the child restraint system

installation procedures in “Child Re-

straint Systems” �P68, correctly in-

stall the child restraint system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indica-

tor light turns off and the OFF indicator

light illuminates.

If still the ON indicator light remains

illuminated while the OFF indicator light

turns off, take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint

system and the child occupant.

. For models with manual seat, ensure

that the backward-forward position

and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator light still remains

illuminated while the OFF indicator light

turns off after taking the relevant correc-

tive actions described above, relocate the

child restraint system to the rear seat and

immediately contact your SUBARU deal-

er for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is seated

in the front passenger’s seat, the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system

may or may not activate the front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag depending

on the occupant’s seating posture. Chil-

dren should always wear a seatbelt when

sitting in the seat irrespective of whether

the airbag is deactivated or activated. If

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated (the ON indicator light re-

mains illuminated while the OFF indicator

light turns off), take the following action.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator light still remains

illuminated while the OFF indicator light

turns off despite the fact that the actions

noted above have been taken, seat the

child in the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is re-

commended that on subsequent trips the

child always take the rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the air-

bag is deactivated or activated.

Conditions in which front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag is

activated

s01ah0205

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(98,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front pas-

senger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. Failure to do so may

lessen the load on the front passenger’s

seat, deactivating the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag despite the fact that

the seat is occupied by an adult. This may

result in personal injury.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any

article from behind and under the seat.

This may lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between

the front passenger’s seat and side

trim/pillar, door or center console box.

This may lift the seat cushion.

If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light illuminates

and the ON indicator light turns

off even when the front pas-

senger’s seat is occupied by an

adult

s01ah0214

S_103165-W

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

This can be caused by the adult incor-

rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat

cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt,

position his/her legs out forward, and

adjust the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator light remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator light remains

off, take the following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, extra seat

cushion, seat cover, seat heater or

massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove

any unnecessary items before sitting

in the front passenger’s seat, or

should sit in a rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow

the system to complete self-checking.

Following the system check, both

indicator lights turn off for 2 seconds.

Now, the ON indicator light should

illuminate while the OFF indicator light

remains off.

If the OFF indicator light still remains

illuminated while the ON indicator light

remains off, ask the occupant to move to

the rear seat and immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(99,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Operation

s01ah0207

Driver’s side:

S_103246-W

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

Knee airbag

Passenger’s side:

S_103247-W

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately.

Seat cushion airbag

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the characteristic of item(s)

or person on the front passenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s oc-

cupant detection sensors. For this rea-

son, only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag

may deploy in the event of a collision, but

this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a prede-

termined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends sig-

nals to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front pas-

senger’s modules) instructing the module

(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(100,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The front impact sensors

. The impact sensors in the airbag

control module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag

also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

After deployment

s01ah0210

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed and the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

not impaired.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indi-

cate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the components

can be very hot as a result of deploy-

ment.

Example of the type of accident

s01ah0211

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed as follows.

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not

designed as follows.

. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-

pacts*

. To deploy in most side or rear impacts

or in most rollover accidents*

*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in those

situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

Example of accident in which

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will most likely deploy

s01ah0215

S_103133-MW

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be

activated when the vehicle is exposed to

a frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collision described

above.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(101,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

s01ah0216

S_103134-MW

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the

undercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

(102,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the

driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is

unlikely to occur

s01ah0217

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of

driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents

like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

S_103233-MW

The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

The vehicle slides under the load bed of

a truck.

The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

100

(103,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s) are not

designed to deploy in most

cases

s01ah0218

S_103136-MW

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in most of the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision

S_103234-MW

First impact

Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/

are activated on the first impact, it/they

will not be activated on the second

impact.

SRS seat cushion airbag op-

eration

s01ah0212

S_103235-W

Passenger’s side

WARNING

The SRS seat cushion airbag is

designed not to deploy when the

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

101

(104,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

seatbelt for the corresponding seat is

not worn. For safety reasons, all

persons in the vehicle should wear

their seatbelts.

The SRS seat cushion airbags are

designed to deploy simultaneously when

the SRS frontal airbags deploy. For de-

tails about the operating conditions, refer

to “SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag

System” �P91.

The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion

airbag is designed not to deploy in either

of the following conditions.

. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not

fastened (even when the front pas-

senger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

light illuminates while the OFF indica-

tor light remains off).

. The front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light is off while the OFF

indicator light illuminates.

NOTE

When the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag is deactivated by the occupant

detection system, the front passenger’s

SRS seat cushion airbag is also deacti-

vated.

SRS SIDE AIRBAG AND SRS

CURTAIN AIRBAG

s01ah03

S_103140-MW

SRS side airbag

s01ah0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by redu-

cing the impact on the occupant’s chest

and waist. The SRS side airbag operates

only for front seat occupants.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS side

airbags on both sides of the vehicle

deploy between the occupant and the

door panel and supplements the seatbelt

by reducing the impact on the occupant’s

chest and waist.

SRS curtain airbag

s01ah0303

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of

the cabin is stored in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is

located at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side

window and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and

supplement the seatbelt by reducing the

impact to the occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain

airbags on both sides of the vehicle

deploy between the occupant and the

side window and supplement the seatbelt

by reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head and chest.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

102

(105,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Operation

s01ah0301

The following SRS airbags is active only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. Driver’s SRS side airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag

. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)

. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

When the following sensors detect a

certain amount of impact to the side of the

vehicle or detect that the vehicle is

leaning, airbag control units send signals

to the airbag control modules to deploy

the airbags.

. The side impact sensors

. The impact sensor in the airbag

control module

. The rollover sensor in the airbag

control module

Some of the airbags will deploy in a frontal

collision. For details, refer to “SUBARU

Advanced Frontal Airbag System” �P91.

SRS airbags are controlled by their airbag

control units and deploy as necessary to

effectively protect passengers depending

on the accident type. Therefore, these

airbags may deploy simultaneously.

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Components”

�P89.

After deployment

s01ah0304

After the deployment, the SRS side

airbag immediately starts to deflate.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occu-

pies the seat on the side on which an

impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly

loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indi-

cate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the front

seat seatback with bare hands right

after deployment. Doing so can cause

burns because the components can

be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag system

(from the front pillar to the part of the

roof side over the rear seat). Doing so

can cause burns because the com-

ponents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

Example of the type of accident

s01ah0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed as follows:

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe side

impact collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases:

. In most lesser side impacts

. In most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag deployment would

not protect the occupant in those

situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy

in most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

103

(106,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle

itself.

Example of the type of accident

in which the SRS side airbag

will most likely deploy

s01ah0308

S_103236-W

A severe side impact near the front

seat.

An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

104

(107,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag

will most likely deploy

s01ah0309

S_103237-W

The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear

seat.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or the

roof.

An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

105

(108,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the

SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy

s01ah0310

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs

to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

S_103238-W

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

or the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a

curbstone laterally.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

106

(109,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is

unlikely to deploy

s01ah0311

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag

deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not

deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

S_103239-MW

The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or the

roof.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

107

(110,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag

is unlikely to deploy

s01ah0312

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain

airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

S_103240-MW

The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

108

(111,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

s01ah0313

S_103241-W

The vehicle is struck from behind.

The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

S_103242-MW

First impact

Second impact

SRS curtain airbag

SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deploy only once.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM MONI-

TORS

s01ah04

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including seatbelt pretensioners) with

the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

SRS airbag system warning light

S_103131-W

The SRS airbag system warning light will

show normal system operation by illumi-

nating for approximately 6 seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

The diagnostic system monitors the

components to ensure normal operation.

For information on the components the

system monitors, refer to “Components”

�P89. Note that the diagnostic system

does not monitor the SRS airbag system

warning light itself.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the

following conditions, immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe place, and consult

a SUBARU dealer. Unless a techni-

cian checks and repairs the system as

needed, the seatbelt pretensioners

and/or the SRS airbag will not operate

properly in the event of a collision,

which may result in injury.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

109

(112,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning light

when the ignition switch is first

turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM SERVI-

CING

s01ah05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag module

or scrapping the entire vehicle

damaged by a collision, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ing with or disconnecting the sys-

tem’s wiring could result in acci-

dental inflation of the SRS airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have the

work performed by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag

control module, impact sensors and

airbag modules are stored in these

areas.

. Under the center of the instrument

panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column and

nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion and

rear wheel house on each side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an

authorized SUBARU dealer. When the

components of the SRS airbag system

are replaced, use only genuine

SUBARU parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear wheel

house or rear sub frame, or an area

near these parts, was involved in an

accident in which the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

110

(113,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which no

SRS airbag was deployed.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST VE-

HICLE MODIFICATION

s01ah06

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any compo-

nents or wiring of the SRS airbag

system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

– Installation of custom steering

wheels

– Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

– Installation of custom seats

– Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

– Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

– Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

– Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way radio

on or near the SRS airbag

system components and/or

wiring is not advisable. This

could interfere with proper op-

eration of the SRS airbag

system.

– Modifications on or inside the

front door panels for the pur-

pose of a speaker replacement

or sound insulation

. The impact sensors, which detect

the pressure of an impact, are

located in the doors. Do not modify

any components of the doors or

door trims, such as the addition of

door speakers for example. Any

modifications to the doors will

create a risk of the airbag system

becoming inoperative or unin-

tended airbag deployment.

. Installation of a tire of different size

and construction from the tires

specified on the vehicle placard

attached to the driver’s door pillar

or specified for individual vehicle

models in this Owner’s Manual.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genuine

SUBARU accessory parts to the

front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Attachment of any equipment (side

steps or side sill protectors, etc.)

other than genuine SUBARU ac-

cessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

111

(114,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

HOW TO CONTACT THE VEHI-

CLE MANUFACTURER CON-

CERNING MODIFICATIONS

FOR PERSONS WITH DISABIL-

ITIES THAT MAY AFFECT THE

ADVANCED AIRBAG SYSTEM

s01ah15

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instru-

ment panel, combination meter, steering

wheel, steering column, tire, suspension

or floor panel can affect the operation of

the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If

you have any questions, you may contact

the following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Advocacy Department

One Subaru Drive

P.O. Box 9103

Camden, NJ 08101-9877

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850-A Pukoloa St.,

Honolulu, HI 96819

877-215-0338

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Auto-

mobiles

491 East Marine Corps Drive,

Dededo, Guam 96929

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,

Puerto Rico

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distri-

butors in any other U.S. territories. If you

are in such an area, please contact the

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

SEAT, SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAGS

112

(115,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(116,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(117,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s02
2-1. Keys (If Equipped) ...................................................................... 117
Key Number Plate ....................................................................... 117
2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
(If Equipped)................................................................................117
Safety Precautions...................................................................... 118
Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access” Entry Function .... 120
Unlock Using PIN Code Access................................................... 123
Power Saving Function ............................................................... 126
Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ................................. 126
Disabling Keyless Access Function............................................. 127
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ............................................. 129
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ............................... 129
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator....................................... 129
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 129
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob.......................................... 129
Replacing Access Key Fob.......................................................... 129
Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System ..................................................................................... 129
2-3. Immobilizer ..................................................................................131
Security Indicator Light............................................................... 131
Key Replacement ........................................................................ 132
Certification for Immobilizer System ............................................ 132
2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System ..................................................133
Locking the Doors ...................................................................... 134
Unlocking the Doors ................................................................... 134
Opening the Rear Gate................................................................ 134
Setting Audible Signal Operation................................................. 134
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ............................... 135
Vehicle Finder Function .............................................................. 135
Sounding a Panic Alarm.............................................................. 135
Replacing the Battery.................................................................. 135
Replacing Lost Transmitters........................................................ 135
Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System............................ 136
2-5. Door Locks ..................................................................................137
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside..................................... 137
Locking and Unlocking from the Inside ....................................... 139
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking ............................................. 139
Key Lock-In Prevention Function................................................. 140
Battery Drainage Reduction Function .......................................... 141
2-6. Alarm System ..............................................................................142
Alarm System Operation ............................................................. 142
Arming the System ..................................................................... 142
Disarming the System ................................................................. 143
Alarm System Setting ................................................................. 144
If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm System .................. 144
Valet Mode.................................................................................. 144
2-7. Child Safety Locks......................................................................145
KEYS AND DOORS
2

(118,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
2-8. Windows ......................................................................................145
Power Window Switches ............................................................. 146
Operating the Window................................................................. 146
Locking the Passengers’ Windows .............................................. 147
Initialization of Power Window (Windows with One-Touch
Auto Up and Down Function) .................................................... 147
2-9. Rear Gate.....................................................................................148
2-10. Power Rear Gate (If Equipped) ..................................................150
Operating by the Power Rear Gate Button ................................... 151
Operating by the Buttons on the Rear Gate ................................. 152
Manual Operation........................................................................ 153
Hands-Free Power Rear Gate ...................................................... 153
Memory Function ........................................................................ 156
Reverse Function........................................................................ 157
Rear Gate Drop Prevention Function ........................................... 158
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ............................................. 158
Initialization of Power Rear Gate ................................................. 158
2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) ..............................................................159
Moonroof Switch......................................................................... 160
Sliding Moonroof ........................................................................ 160
Sunshade ................................................................................... 161
KEYS AND DOORS

(119,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2-1. KEYS (If Equipped)

s02aa

S_204468-W

Master keys

Key number plate

The master key fit all locks on your

vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

NOTE

. Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be

controlled with the buttons on the key.

For detailed information, refer to “Re-

mote Keyless Entry System” �P133.

. For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to

“Keyless Access with Push-Button

Start System” �P117.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

s02aa01

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle.

This number is needed to make a

replacement key if you lose your key or

lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to “Key

Replacement” �P132.

2-2. KEYLESS ACCESS

WITH PUSH-BUTTON START

SYSTEM (If Equipped)

s02ap

S_204469-W

Access key fobs

Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button

start system allows you to perform the

following functions when you are carrying

the access key fob.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel

filler lid)

. Starting and stopping the engine. For

detailed information, refer to “Starting

and Stopping Engine (Models with

Push-Button Start System)” �P332.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm System” �P142.

NOTE

. Locking and unlocking by the remote

keyless entry system can also be

controlled with the buttons on the

access key fob. For detailed informa-

tion, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry

System” �P133.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key fob. It is

necessary for vehicle repair and ad-

ditional registration of access key

fobs. For details, refer to “Key Repla-

cement” �P132.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

117

(120,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

An emergency key is attached to each

access key fob.

S_204470-MW

Release button

Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

The emergency key is used for the

following operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s

door

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s02ap11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on the

vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmitting

antennas on the vehicle could ad-

versely affect the operation of im-

planted pacemakers and implanted

defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access with

push-button start system, refer to

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start system”

mentioned later, and contact the

electronic medical equipment manu-

facturer for more information. The

radio waves from the transmitting

antennas on the vehicle could ad-

versely affect the operation of the

electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start system”

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following frequency*

in addition to the radio waves used

for the remote keyless entry sys-

tem. The radio waves are periodi-

cally output from the antennas

installed on the vehicle as shown in

the following illustrations.

*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

S_204471-W

Antennas

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key fob inside the vehicle or within

6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g.,

in the garage). The access key fob

KEYS AND DOORS

118

(121,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

may be locked inside the vehicle,

or the battery may discharge

rapidly. Note that the push-button

ignition switch may not turn on in

some cases depending on the

location of the access key fob.

. The access key fob contains elec-

tronic components. Observe the

following precautions to prevent

malfunctions.

– It is recommended to have the

access key fob battery re-

placed at an authorized

SUBARU dealer to avoid the

risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fob

wet. If the access key fob gets

wet, wipe it off immediately and

let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts to

the access key fob.

– Never leave the access key fob

in direct sunlight or anywhere

that may become hot, such as

on the dashboard. It may da-

mage the battery or cause

circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key fob

in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key fob

in humid or dusty locations.

Doing so may cause malfunc-

tions.

– Keep the access key fob away

from magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access key fob

near a personal computer or

home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access key fob

near a battery charger or any

electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic window

tint or attach metallic objects to

the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-

sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,

the integrated emergency key in-

side may become loose. Be careful

not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do

not press the button of the access

key fob. If any button of the access

key fob is pressed, radio waves are

emitted and may affect the opera-

tion of the airplane. In a bag, take

measures to prevent the buttons

from being pressed accidentally.

NOTE

. The operational/non-operational

setting for the keyless access function

can be changed. For the setting

procedure, refer to “Disabling Keyless

Access Function” �P127.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-button

ignition switch while the keyless ac-

cess function is switched to the non-

operational mode, refer to “If Access

Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly”

�P471.

. The keyless access with push-button

start system uses weak radio waves.

The status of the access key fob and

environmental conditions may inter-

fere with the communication between

the access key fob and the vehicle

under the following conditions, and it

may not be possible to lock or unlock

the doors or start the engine.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are

transmitted, such as a broadcast

station and power transmission

lines.

– When products that transmit radio

waves are used, such as an access

key fob or a remote transmitter key

of another vehicle.

– When carrying the access key fob

of your vehicle together with the

access key fob or the remote

transmitter of another vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

119

(122,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– When the access key fob is placed

near wireless communication

equipment such as a cell phone.

– When the access key fob is placed

near a metallic object.

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key fob.

– When carrying the access key fob

with an electronic appliance such

as a laptop computer.

– When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged.

. The access key fob is always com-

municating with the vehicle and is

continuously using the battery.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating condi-

tions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If

the battery becomes fully discharged,

replace it with a new one.

. If an access key fob is lost, it is

recommended that all of the remaining

access key fobs be reregistered. For

reregistration of an access key fob,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key fob, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access key fobs can be

registered for one vehicle.

. Do not leave the access key fob in the

storage spaces inside the vehicle,

such as the door pocket, dashboard or

inside the cargo area. Vibrations may

damage the key fob or turn on the

switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.

. After the vehicle battery is discharged

or replaced, initialization of the steer-

ing lock system may be required to

start the engine. In this case, perform

the following procedure to initialize the

steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. For

details, refer to “Switching Power

Status” �P169.

(2) Open and close the driver’s door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

When the steering is locked, the

initialization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in the

following places.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations may

occur.

– The access key fob is mistakenly

locked inside the vehicle.

– A false warning issues although no

malfunction actually occurs.

– No warning issues even when a

malfunction occurs.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

WITH “KEYLESS ACCESS”

ENTRY FUNCTION

s02ap01

When the access key fob is carried within

the operating range, all the doors (in-

cluding the rear gate and the fuel filler lid)

can be locked/unlocked just by touching

the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked

with the remote keyless entry system. For

details, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry

System” �P133.

Operating ranges

s02ap0101

S_204472-W

Antennas

Operating range

KEYS AND DOORS

120

(123,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_204473-W

LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either

of the operating ranges, the LED indicator

on the access key fob flashes. When the

keyless access functions are disabled,

the LED indicator does not flash unless a

button on the access key fob is pressed.

NOTE

. If the access key fob is placed too

close to the vehicle body, the keyless

access functions may not operate

properly. If it does not operate prop-

erly, repeat the operation from farther

away.

. If the access key fob is placed near the

ground or in an elevated location from

the ground, even if it is in the indicated

operating range, the keyless access

function may not operate properly.

. When the access key fob is within the

operating range, it is possible for

anyone, even someone who is not

carrying the access key fob, to operate

the keyless access function. Note that

the keyless access function can be

operated only by the door handle, door

lock sensor or rear gate opener button

in the operating range in which the

access key fob is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors, the

rear gate and the fuel filler lid using the

keyless access function when the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

However, depending on the status of

the access key fob and the environ-

mental conditions, the access key fob

may be locked inside the vehicle.

Before locking the vehicle, make sure

that you have the access key fob.

. When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged, or when operating it

in a location with strong radio waves or

noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power

plant, broadcast station or an area

where wireless equipment is used), or

while talking on a cell phone, the

operating ranges may be reduced, or

the keyless access function may not

operate.

In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and Unlocking”

�P471.

. The doors may lock or unlock when

the car is being washed or exposed to

a significant amount of water that

touches the door handle while the key

fob is still in the operating range.

How to lock and unlock

s02ap0108

It is possible to perform the following

operations when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel

filler lid.

. Lock and unlock the rear gate.

NOTE

. It is not possible to lock the doors, the

rear gate and the fuel filler lid using the

keyless access function when the

push-button ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to

“Switching Power Status” �P169.

. If the door handle is gripped with a

gloved hand, the door lock may not be

released.

. If the door lock sensor is touched four

times or more repeatedly, the system

will ignore the sensor operation.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not

complete. After performing the locking

procedure, it is recommended to pull

the rear door handle to confirm that

the doors have been locked.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

121

(124,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. If any of the doors (including the rear

gate) is not fully closed, the following

will occur to alert you.

– An electronic chirp sounds five

times.

– The hazard warning flashers flash

five times.

. If any of the doors or the rear gate is

open, the doors, the rear gate and the

fuel filler lid cannot be locked.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors and the rear gate using the

keyless access function, it is not

possible to unlock the doors and/or the

rear gate using the keyless access

function.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key fob to prevent locking the

access key fob in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Settings icon

(Car settings)” �P231. Also, the

setting of the hazard warning flasher

operation can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

Locking the vehicle

s02ap0109

S_204474-W

Door lock sensor

Rear lock button

To lock all the doors, carry the access key

fob with you and perform one of the

following operations:

. Touch the door lock sensor.

. Press the rear lock button.

An electronic chirp will sound once and

the hazard warning flashers will flash

once.

NOTE

After touching the door lock sensor to lock

all of the doors (including the rear gate), if

you touch the door lock sensor once more

to attempt the lock operation without first

unlocking the doors, nothing will happen,

even if the door lock sensor is touched. In

this case, perform the unlocking opera-

tion once first. You can then touch the

door lock sensor to lock the doors.

Unlocking the vehicle

s02ap0110

S_204475-W

Front door handle sensor

Rear gate opener button

To unlock the door, carry the access key

fob with you and perform one of the

following operations:

. Grip the door handle.

. Press the rear gate opener button.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

Door unlock selection function

s02ap0105

When you use the keyless access func-

tion to unlock the vehicle, gripping the

driver’s door handle or the front passen-

ger’s handle will cause trigger different

unlock operations as described below.

KEYS AND DOORS

122

(125,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When the driver’s door handle is

gripped:

The driver’s door and the fuel filler lid will

unlock.

When the front passenger’s door

handle is gripped:

All the doors (including the rear gate) and

the fuel filler lid will unlock.

The settings can be changed with the

following methods.

. The setting can be changed by oper-

ating the center information display.

For details, refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

. The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

UNLOCK USING PIN CODE AC-

CESS

s02ap21

S_204476-W

Rear lock button

While all the doors (including the rear

gate and the fuel filler lid) are locked, you

can unlock them without a key by press-

ing the rear lock button.

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key

is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is

recommended that a 5-digit security code

(PIN code) is registered.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

123

(126,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Registration for a PIN code

s02ap2102

Steps Operation

Time from the previous

step

1 Turn off the ignition switch. —

2 Close all the doors (including the rear gate). —

Press and hold the “

” button on the access key fob,

then press and hold the rear lock button until a chirp

sounds intermittently.

—

4 Press the “

” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds

Input the PIN code using the rear lock button within 30

seconds after the chirp sound of step 4.

For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code,

perform the following procedure.

Within 30 seconds

(1) Press the button three times.

(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.

(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.

(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.

Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds

after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.

—

All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code

will be registered.

—

NOTE

. Press the “

” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and

move on to the registration stage. Unless the “

” button is pressed within 30

seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

. Press the rear lock button ten times to enter “0”.

. Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft.

. If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not

been changed or deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a

new PIN code.

. If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the “

” or “ ” button

on the access key fob. Then start over from step 1.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register “00000” to “99999” or “12345”

as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as

“11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”, the registered PIN code will be deleted. You

cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access until a new code is registered.

. After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the

PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by

operating the access key fob.

KEYS AND DOORS

124

(127,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Reregister the PIN code in the following case.

– When you forget the PIN code

– When you want to change the PIN code

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

125

(128,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Unlocking

s02ap2103

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5

described in “Registration for a PIN

code”.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– When the access key fob is within

the operating ranges

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position

. If you make an operation error during

the unlocking procedure, start over

with the unlocking procedure after

waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN

codes are entered five times continu-

ously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock

the doors by PIN Code Access for 5

minutes.

POWER SAVING FUNCTION

s02ap23

To protect the access key fob battery and

the vehicle battery, the keyless access

function will be disabled as follows.

. When the keyless access function and

the remote keyless entry system have

not been used:

(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-

tion switch has been turned off,

communication between the an-

tennas and the access key fob will

be stopped.

(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors

(both lock sensor and unlock

sensor) on the front passenger’s

door will be disabled.

. When the access key fob has been left

in the operating range for 10 minutes

or longer while all doors are locked,

the keyless access function will be

disabled.

Recovery from power saving

mode

s02ap2301

When one of the following operations is

performed, the keyless access function

will be recovered.

. Unlock by gripping the door handle

(only when the sensors on the front

passenger’s door are not disabled) or

pressing rear gate opener button on

the rear gate.

. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless

entry system.

. Open a door and then close it.

. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

POWER SAVING FUNCTION OF

ACCESS KEY FOB

s02ap26

This function stops the access key fob

from receiving signals and helps minimize

the battery consumption of the access

key fob.

1. Press the “

” button twice while

holding the “

” button.

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

times to notify that the setting is

complete.

S_204473-W

LED indicator

When the access key fob is in the power

save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be

available. To cancel the power save

mode, press one of the buttons on the

KEYS AND DOORS

126

(129,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

access key fob.

DISABLING KEYLESS ACCESS

FUNCTION

s02ap07

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the

keyless access function can be disabled.

WARNING

If you have an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, perform

the procedure “By operating the dri-

ver’s door” �P128 to disable the

keyless access function. If you per-

form the procedure “By operating the

access key fob” �P127, the operation

of an implanted pacemaker or im-

planted defibrillator may be affected

by the radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas installed on the vehicle.

NOTE

. If the access key is kept in or comes

near the vehicle, the system becomes

active and both the vehicle and access

key batteries’ energy will be con-

sumed. If this occurs frequently or

continuously, both the vehicle and

access key batteries can become fully

drained.

. The locking and unlocking function by

the remote keyless entry system is not

disabled.

. To start the engine while the functions

are disabled, perform the procedure

described in “Starting Engine”

�P472.

By operating the access key fob

s02ap0703

To disable the keyless access function by

operating the access key fob, register a

PIN code for PIN Code Access. For

details about registering a PIN code, refer

to “Unlock Using PIN Code Access”

�P123.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

S_204379-MW

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and

“

” button on the access key fob

simultaneously for more than 5 sec-

onds.

S_204380-MW

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

127

(130,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

By operating the driver’s door

s02ap0704

S_204381-MW

To disable the keyless access function by operating the driver’s door, perform the

following procedures.

Steps Operation Time Status

1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close

2 Push “

” on the power door locking switch. — Close

3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice.

Within 5 sec. Open

5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.

Open?Close?Open?

Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch twice

while the door is open.

Within 10 sec. Open

7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open

8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.

Open?Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not pressed

firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

KEYS AND DOORS

128

(131,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Enabling functions

s02ap0702

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, a chirp sound

will be heard, and the functions are

enabled.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the pro-

cedure in the same manner you

disabled the function (for example,

when disabling by operating the dri-

ver’s door, the function will not be

enabled even if you operate the

access key fob).

. Press the push-button ignition switch if

you do not know the procedure in

which the keyless access function was

disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: A chirp will not be

heard.

– When disabling by operating the

access key fob: A chirp will be

heard.

SELECTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL

OPERATION

s02ap12

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

are locked or unlocked. If desired, you

can turn the audible signal off by operat-

ing the center information display. For

details, refer to “Settings icon (Car set-

tings)” �P231.

Furthermore, the volume setting of the

audible signal can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

SELECTING HAZARD WARN-

ING FLASHER OPERATION

s02ap18

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231. The

setting can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

WARNING CHIMES AND

WARNING INDICATOR

s02ap06

The keyless access with push-button

start system is equipped with a warning

chime and the access key warning

indicator in order to minimize improper

operations and help protect your vehicle

from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and

Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P189.

WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB

DOES NOT OPERATE PROP-

ERLY

s02ap08

Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not

Operate Properly” �P471.

REPLACING BATTERY OF AC-

CESS KEY FOB

s02ap09

Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob” �P526.

REPLACING ACCESS KEY FOB

s02ap13

Access key fobs can be replaced at

SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

CERTIFICATION FOR KEYLESS

ACCESS WITH PUSH-BUTTON

START SYSTEM

s02ap14

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AKB

FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-1

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

129

(132,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ZOM0993-W

. Canada-spec. models

– Type 1

ZOM0994-W

KEYS AND DOORS

130

(133,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– Type 2

ZOM0995-W

2-3. IMMOBILIZER

s02ab

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

can be used to operate your vehicle. If

engine start is attempted with an unre-

gistered access key fob or key, the engine

will not start. Even if the engine does start,

it will stop after a few seconds. This

system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft

guarantee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the

system. If modified or removed, the

proper operation of the system

cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the

following security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leaving your vehicle, close

all windows and the moonroof, and

lock all the doors (including the rear

gate and the fuel filler lid).

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT

s02ab02

Refer to “Security Indicator Light” �P192.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

131

(134,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

KEY REPLACEMENT

s02ab03

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

before it can be used. The maximum

number of keys that can be registered for

use with one vehicle is as follows.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Four

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Seven

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still

remains in the memory of the vehicle’s

immobilizer system. For security reasons,

the lost key’s ID code should be erased

from the memory. To erase the lost key’s

ID code, all keys that will be used are

required.

For details about new key registration and

erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

CERTIFICATION FOR IMMOBI-

LIZER SYSTEM

s02ab05

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Refer to “Certification for Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P129.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PSU22R-1

ZOM0993-W

– Canada-spec. models

ZOM0994-W

KEYS AND DOORS

132

(135,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2-4. REMOTE KEYLESS EN-

TRY SYSTEM

s02ae

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmitter

apart except when replacing the

battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a

cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitter on an airplane, do not press

the button of the remote transmitter

while in the airplane. When any

button of the remote transmitter is

pressed, radio waves are sent and

may affect the operation of the

airplane. When you carry the re-

mote transmitter in a bag on an

airplane, take measures to prevent

the buttons of the remote trans-

mitter from being pressed.

Access key fob

S_204477-MW

Lock/arm button

Unlock/disarm button

Rear gate unlock button

PANIC button

Transmitter

S_204478-MW

Lock/arm button

Unlock/disarm button

Rear gate unlock button

PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel

filler lid)

. Unlock the rear gate

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming. For details,

refer to “Alarm System” �P142.

The operable distance of the remote

keyless entry system is approximately 30

feet (10 meters). However, this distance

will vary depending on environmental

conditions. The system’s operable dis-

tance will be shorter in areas near a

facility or electronic equipment emitting

strong radio waves such as a power plant,

broadcast station, TV tower, or remote

controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, the remote

keyless entry system will not be

activated when the push-button igni-

tion switch is in any position other than

the “OFF” position.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, the

remote keyless entry system will not

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

133

(136,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

be activated when the key is inserted

in the ignition switch.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

once or twice when the access key

fob/transmitter button is pressed in the

following cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

– When unlocking the rear gate

If desired, you can turn the hazard

warning flashers off by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231 (11.6-inch display models)

LOCKING THE DOORS

s02ae01

Press the “ ” button to lock all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel filler

lid). An electronic chirp will sound once

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

once.

If any of the doors (including the fuel filler

lid) is not fully closed, the following will

occur to alert you that the doors are not

properly closed.

. An electronic chirp sounds five times.

. The hazard warning flashers flash five

times.

When you close the door, it will auto-

matically lock and then the following will

occur.

. An electronic chirp sounds once.

. The hazard warning flashers flash

once.

UNLOCKING THE DOORS

s02ae02

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s

door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp

will sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all the

doors and the rear gate, briefly press the

“

” button again within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button for

unlocking all the doors is extremely short,

the system may not respond.

OPENING THE REAR GATE

s02ae13

Press the “ ” button to unlock the rear

gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

This operation setting can be changed by

a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details.

SETTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL

OPERATION

s02ae07

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock.

If desired, you can turn the audible signal

off by operating the center information

display.

For details, refer to the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

Furthermore, the volume setting of the

audible signal can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. Take the same steps to

restore the function.

KEYS AND DOORS

134

(137,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_204381-MW

Steps Operation Time

1 Sit in the driver’s seat. —

2 Close all doors. —

(1)

Press and hold “

” on the

power locking switch.

Within 10

sec.

(2)

Insert the key into the igni-

tion switch and pull it out at

least 6 times.

Open and close the driver’s

door.

Within 10

sec.

The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times

to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the

above procedure for you.

SELECTING HAZARD WARN-

ING FLASHER OPERATION

s02ae26

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

The setting can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

VEHICLE FINDER FUNCTION

s02ae05

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30

feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing

the “

” button three times in a 5-second

period will cause your vehicle’s horn to

sound once and its hazard warning

flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button three

times, the system may not respond to the

signals from the remote transmitter.

SOUNDING A PANIC ALARM

s02ae06

To activate the alarm, press the PANIC

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the access key fob/transmitter.

If a button on the access key fob/

transmitter is not pressed, the alarm will

be deactivated after approximately 30

seconds.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

s02ae08

Refer to “Replacing Battery” �P526.

REPLACING LOST TRANSMIT-

TERS

s02ae09

If you lose a transmitter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all your transmitters for security

reasons. For details, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the transmit-

ters programmed into the remote keyless

entry system.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

135

(138,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CERTIFICATION FOR REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

s02ae18

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G496

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

ZOM0993-W

. Canada-spec. models

– Type 1

ZOM0994-W

KEYS AND DOORS

136

(139,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– Type 2

ZOM0995-W

2-5. DOOR LOCKS

s02ac

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

FROM THE OUTSIDE

s02ac01

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a key

(including an emergency key) and open

the door while the alarm system is armed,

the alarm system is triggered and the

vehicle’s horn sounds. In this case, per-

form any of the following operations:

Models with “keyless access with push-

button start system”:

. Press any button on the access key

fob (except when the access key fob

battery is discharged).

. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” position.

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures.

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear gate opener button.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the remote

transmitter (except when the trans-

mitter battery is discharged).

. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

For details about the alarm system, refer

to “Alarm System” �P142.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

137

(140,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

How to lock and unlock the

vehicle using the key

s02ac0101

S_204479-MW

Lock

Unlock

In this case, only the driver’s side door is

locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with “keyless access with push-

button start system”:

The emergency key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

How to lock the vehicle without

using the key

s02ac0102

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

Locking using lock lever

s02ac0103

S_204480-MW

Move the lock lever to the lock position.

Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was

operated will be locked.

Locking using power door

locking switch

s02ac0104

S_204481-MW

Press the side of the power door

locking switch.*

Close the door.

*: For details about the power door locking

switch, refer to “How to use the power door

locking switches” �P139.

In this case, all the closed doors, the fuel

filler lid and the rear gate are locked at the

same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

KEYS AND DOORS

138

(141,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

FROM THE INSIDE

s02ac02

To lock the door from inside the vehicle,

use the lock lever or power door locking

switch.

How to use the lock lever

s02ac0202

S_204482-MW

Unlock

Lock

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all the doors and

the rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

WARNING

. Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of

seatbelts and child restraint sys-

tems, locking the doors reduces

the chance of being thrown out of

the vehicle in an accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out by preventing a

door from being accidentally

opened, and intruders from unex-

pectedly opening doors and enter-

ing your vehicle.

. Do not pull the front door handle

from inside while driving. The door

could open even if it is locked.

CAUTION

Do not pull the front inside door handle

while operating the door lock. There is

a risk that it will not be possible to open

or lock the front doors.

How to use the power door

locking switches

s02ac0203

All the doors (including the rear gate and

the fuel filler lid) can be locked and

unlocked by pressing either side of the

power door locking switches located on

the driver’s side and the front passen-

ger’s side doors.

S_204483-MW

Lock

Unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING/

UNLOCKING

s02ac08

All the doors (including the fuel filler lid)

are automatically locked or unlocked

under the following conditions.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

139

(142,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

For automatic door locking:

– When the vehicle speed reaches 12

mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory

default setting).

– When the select lever is shifted into a

position other than the “P” position.

For automatic door unlocking:

– When the driver’s door is open (fac-

tory default setting).

– When the ignition switch is turned to

OFF.

– When the select lever is shifted into

the “P” position.

NOTE

. The automatic door lock and unlock

setting can be changed using the

center information display. Refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231 (11.6-inch display models)

. When locking the door by the power

door locking switches, automatic door

locking will not operate.

. When unlocking the door by the power

door locking switches, automatic door

unlocking will not operate.

. If the system detects a strong enough

impact to deploy the airbags, all doors

may be automatically unlocked. For

further details, refer to “Automatic

Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

When Involved in an Accident”

�P477.

. When getting out of the vehicle from a

rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of

the power door locking switch. If a rear

door is unlocked from the inside door

lever then the door is opened and

closed, the Key lock-in prevention

function will be triggered. All doors will

be unlocked, the Key lock-in preven-

tion warning indicator “

” will appear

and the warning chime will also sound.

KEY LOCK-IN PREVENTION

FUNCTION

s02ac06

Under the following conditions, all the

doors will not lock when the power door

locking switch is pushed with the driver’s

door open.

. The key is still in the ignition switch

(models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”).

NOTE

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

. When getting out of the vehicle from a

rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of

the power door locking switch.

. When getting out of the vehicle from a

rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of

the power door locking switch. If a rear

door is unlocked from the inside door

lever then the door is opened and

closed, the Key lock-in prevention

function will be triggered. All doors will

be unlocked, the Key lock-in preven-

tion warning indicator “

” will appear

and the warning chime will also sound.

. The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “operational”.

This function’s operational/non-op-

erational setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for details.

Non-operation of key lock-in

prevention function

s02ac0602

When the system is set so that it does not

operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation.

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s

door open and the driver’s door is then

KEYS AND DOORS

140

(143,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

closed with the lock lever in that

position, the driver’s door is locked.

. If the emergency key is used to lock

the driver’s door from the outside of

the vehicle, the door is locked.

BATTERY DRAINAGE REDUC-

TION FUNCTION

s02ac03

Under various conditions, lights inside the

vehicle will automatically turn off to

reduce the risk of discharging the battery.

Battery drainage reduction

function for various conditions

s02ac0302

This function will enter standby mode

under the following conditions:

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”).

. The key is removed from the ignition

key cylinder (models without “keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”).

If the following actions are not performed

within 10 minutes, while the function is in

standby mode, any room lights that are on

will automatically turn off.

Turning off

lights

– Map light

– Dome light

– Ignition switch light*

– Cargo area light

– Rear gate light

– Vanity mirror light

– Door step lights

Actions

– Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

– Open or close the doors, including

the rear gate.

– Push the unlock button on the

access key fob or transmitter.

– Hold the front door handle and

unlock it while holding the access

key fob.*

– Insert the key into the keyhole of the

ignition switch.*

– Come close to the vehicle that the

front door was locked while holding

the access key fob (if OFF delay

timer setting for period of time is not

off).*

– Push the panic button on the access

key fob or transmitter.

*1: Models with “keyless access with push-button

start system”

*2: Models without “keyless access with push-button

start system”

Perform the action in the above table to

illuminate the lights again when the

battery drainage reduction function is

active.

NOTE

. The battery drainage reduction func-

tion cannot be turned off.

. If the battery drainage reduction func-

tion is in operation when a door is

open, the target room light will not be

illuminated.

. To protect the battery from battery

drainage, make sure that all doors,

including the rear gate, are completely

closed when leaving the vehicle.

KEYS AND DOORS

141

(144,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2-6. ALARM SYSTEM

s02af

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The

horn sounds and the hazard warning

flashers flash if someone attempts to

break into your vehicle.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the keyless access function or

access key fob.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION

s02af01

When the alarm system is armed, it is

triggered by the opening any of the doors,

the rear gate or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the fol-

lowing alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine

hood remains open after the 30-second

period, the horn will continue to sound for

a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear

gate or engine hood is closed while the

horn is sounding, the horn will stop

sounding with a delay of up to 30

seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger the

illumination of the following interior lights.

. Map lights (illuminates only when the

door interlock switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

. Dome light (illuminates only when the

dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

The notifications regarding the map lights

and dome light are deactivated as the

factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can

activate the system. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

ARMING THE SYSTEM

s02af04

The alarm system becomes armed when

the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped) and turn the ignition switch

to the “OFF” position.

2. Carry the key and get out of the

vehicle.

3. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

4. Lock the doors using any of the

following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to

“Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P133.

. Locking using the keyless access

function (if equipped). For details,

refer to “Locking the vehicle”

�P122.

KEYS AND DOORS

142

(145,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Locking using the power door lock-

ing switch. For details, refer to

“Locking using power door locking

switch” �P138.

NOTE

S_204390-W

. All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler lid

will lock, an electronic chirp will sound

once, the hazard warning flashers will

flash once, and the security indicator

light will start flashing rapidly.

. If any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, an electronic chirp

sounds five times and the hazard

warning flashers flash five times to

alert you that the doors (or the rear

gate) are not properly closed. When

you close the door, doors will auto-

matically lock and the system will

automatically arm in 30 seconds.

5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the

system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,

the security indicator light will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has

been armed for surveillance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

windows and/or moonroof are open.

Always make sure that they are fully

closed before arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If any of the following actions is done

during the standby period, the system

will not switch to the surveillance state.

– Doors (including the rear gate) are

unlocked using the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

– Doors (including the rear gate) are

unlocked using the keyless access

function (models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start sys-

tem”).

– Any door (including the engine

hood) is opened.

– The ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position

(models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

DISARMING THE SYSTEM

s02af05

Perform either of the following proce-

dures.

. Briefly press unlock/disarm button (for

less than 2 seconds) on the access

key fob/remote transmitter.

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures

(models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear lock button.

– Unlock using the PIN Code Ac-

cess.

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice

approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-

ing that the alarm system has been

disarmed.

Emergency disarming

s02af0501

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the

transmitter is lost, broken or the trans-

mitter battery is too weak), you can

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

143

(146,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

disarm the system without using the

access key fob/remote transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn

the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position to the “ON” position with a

registered key/access key fob.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, if the access

key fob battery is discharged, perform the

procedure described in “Switching Power

Status” �P472. In such a case, replace

the battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-

cing Battery of Access Key Fob” �P526.

ALARM SYSTEM SETTING

s02af11

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the System” �P143.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors, the rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down “

” of the driver’s power

door locking switch, open the driver’s

door within the following 1 second,

and wait 10 seconds without releasing

the switch. The setting will then be

changed as follows.

Setting sta-

tus

Combination me-

ter display (color

LCD)

Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF

Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change

done by your SUBARU dealer.

IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY

TRIGGERED THE ALARM SYS-

TEM

s02af03

To stop the alarm

s02af0301

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the access key

fob/remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position (models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”).

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”).

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If

the immobilizer transponder is not regis-

tered, the alarm will not stop.

VALET MODE

s02af06

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to

deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm Sys-

tem Setting” �P144. The security indi-

cator light will continue to flash once

every 3 seconds, indicating that the

system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system to activation

mode. Refer to “Alarm System Setting”

�P144.

KEYS AND DOORS

144

(147,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2-7. CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

s02ag

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children sit

on the rear seat. Serious injury could

result if a child accidentally opens the

door and falls out.

S_204391-W

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

“LOCK” position, the door cannot be

opened from inside. The door can only be

opened from the outside.

2-8. WINDOWS

s02ah

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s body parts or any

other objects from being caught in

the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety reasons

and never allow an unattended

child to remain in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window.

NOTE

. If the power window system detects

resistance, an impact or abnormality,

the window operation may be auto-

matically stopped to prevent further

jamming, entrapment or malfunction.

– The closing window slides down

slightly and stops.

– The opening window stops sliding

down.

. The power window system may detect

resistance, an impact or an abnorm-

ality in the following cases.

– A substantial sized object is caught

between the window and the win-

dow frame.

– A foreign object is caught between

the window and the window frame.

– The vehicle drives over a deep

pothole.

. The window cannot be closed for a

few seconds after the window is

automatically stopped by the system.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

145

(148,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

s02ah09

You can raise and lower the vehicle

widows by operating the power window

switch.

The switch illuminates when activated.

Driver’s side power window switches:

S_204484-MW

For front left window*

For front right window*

For rear left window

For rear right window

Lock switch

*1: With one-touch auto up and down feature

*2: With one-touch auto up and down feature

— if equipped

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster on the driver

side door.

Passenger’s side power window

switch:

S_204393-W

Each passenger’s window can be con-

trolled by the power window switch

located on the door.

OPERATING THE WINDOW

s02ah10

With one-touch auto up and down

feature:

S_204485-MW

Automatically close*

Open

Automatically open*

*: To stop the window halfway, operate the

switch to the opposite side.

Without one-touch auto up and down

feature:

S_204486-MW

Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

. Continuously operating a switch in the

same direction after the window is fully

closed or fully opened.

KEYS AND DOORS

146

(149,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Continuously operating three or more

switches all at once in the same

direction after the windows are fully

closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described above

may cause the power window breaker to

operate making it impossible to open or

close the window. Be sure to initialize the

power windows. Refer to “Initialization of

Power Window (Windows with One-

Touch Auto Up and Down Function)”

�P147.

Anti-entrapment function (win-

dows with one-touch auto up

and down function)

s02ah1001

While closing the window automatically, if

the window senses a substantial enough

object trapped between the window and

the window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while window

is opening automatically, the window will

stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test the power

window operation using body

parts.

. If an object is caught just before the

window fully closes, the system

may not operate properly.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact similar

to that caused by trapping an object

(for example, when the vehicle en-

counters a deep pothole), the anti-

entrapment function may operate.

. You cannot close the window for a few

seconds after the anti-entrapment

function operates.

Off delay function (windows

with one-touch auto up and

down function)

s02ah1002

The windows can be operated for ap-

proximately 40 seconds even after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. If a front door is

opened within 40 seconds, the off delay

function is canceled.

LOCKING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

s02ah11

S_204487-MW

Lock

Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock

position, the rear passenger’s window

switches on the driver side door and the

passengers’ window switches cannot be

operated.

When the indicator on the window

switches does not illuminate, the window

switch cannot be operated.

INITIALIZATION OF POWER

WINDOW (Windows with One-

Touch Auto Up and Down

Function)

s02ah06

If the one-touch auto up and down

function or off delay function does not

operate properly, operate each window

according to the following procedure in

order to initialize the power window

system.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

147

(150,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window completely and then

press and hold down the power

window switch for approximately 1

second.

4. Close the window completely and then

pull and hold the power window switch

for approximately 1 second.

2-9. REAR GATE

s02aj

CAUTION

When loading and unloading cargo,

be careful not to come in contact with

the hot engine exhaust gas or the

exhaust pipe, because they could

burn you.

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using any of the following systems.

. Power door locking switch: Refer to

“Locking and Unlocking from the In-

side” �P139.

. Keyless access with the push-button

start system: Refer to “Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start System”

�P117.

. Remote keyless entry system: Refer

to “Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P133.

Opening the rear gate:

1. Open the rear gate using the appro-

priate method.

Models with the

access key

Models without

the access key

When the

rear gate is

locked

Press and hold

the rear gate

opener button

while carrying

the access key.

Unlock the rear

gate, and then

press and hold

the rear gate

opener button.

When the

rear gate is

unlocked

Press and hold the rear gate

opener button.

KEYS AND DOORS

148

(151,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_204488-W

Rear gate opener button

2. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTE

. If the rear gate cannot be opened due

to a discharged vehicle battery, a

malfunction in the door locking/un-

locking system or other causes, you

can unlock it by manually operating

the rear gate lock release lever. For

the procedure, refer to “If the Rear

GATE Cannot Be Opened” �P473.

. Avoid keeping the rear gate open for

more than a few hours. Doing so may

drain the vehicle battery.

Closing the rear gate:

S_204398-W

Lower the rear gate slowly and push

down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull down on the inside handle as shown

in the illustration.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle, always

keep the rear gate closed while the

engine is running.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate

while holding the recessed grip.

Also do not close the rear gate by

pulling the grip from inside the

cargo space. There is a danger of

your hand being caught and in-

jured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or place

cellophane tape on the rear gate

stays or scratch the stays while

loading or unloading cargo. That

could cause leakage of gas from

the stays, which may result in their

inability to hold the rear gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when opening

or closing the rear gate and when

loading or unloading cargo.

. Never attempt to close the rear

gate by grabbing or pressing on the

outer metal surface or damage

may result.

. Always use the inside handle to

avoid damaging the exterior sur-

face of the gate.

KEYS AND DOORS

149

(152,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2-10. POWER REAR GATE (If

Equipped)

s02au

WARNING

. When operating the power rear

gate, observe the following pre-

cautions. Ignoring the precautions

may result in an injury (e.g., any-

one’s body is hit against the rear

gate or is caught in the rear gate,

etc.)

– Make sure there are no people

around the rear gate.

– Never let anyone get close to

the rear gate.

. When closing the rear gate, be

extremely careful to prevent any-

one’s fingers, arms, neck, head or

other objects from being caught in

the rear gate. Otherwise, serious

personal injury may be caused by

entrapment.

. After opening the rear gate on a

slope by using the power rear gate

feature, the rear gate may close.

Make sure that the rear gate has

stopped completely after opening

it.

. When leaving the vehicle, always

carry the key for safety and never

allow an unattended child to re-

main in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could result in

injury to a child operating the power

rear gate.

. The driver should be aware of and

pay careful attention to his/her

responsibilities.

. Use the power rear gate only when

the area around the rear gate is

clearly visible and when you have

checked that there is no danger of

people being caught in the gate.

CAUTION

. When closing the rear gate after

opening it, make sure to use the

power rear gate. If you close the

rear gate manually with extra force,

the power rear gate may be

damaged.

. Do not install any accessories

other than genuine SUBARU parts

on the rear gate. If the weight of

rear gate increases excessively,

the rear gate stay cannot support

the rear gate sufficiently when

opening the rear gate. Also, the

power rear gate may not function

properly or may malfunction.

You can open and close the power rear

gate in the following ways.

. Power rear gate button

For details, refer to “Operating by the

Power Rear Gate Button” �P151.

. Rear gate opener button

For details, refer to “Operating by the

Buttons on the Rear Gate” �P152.

. Manual operation

For details, refer to “Manual Opera-

tion” �P153.

. Hands-Free Power Rear Gate func-

tion

For details, refer to “Hands-Free

Power Rear Gate” �P153.

The power rear gate operates only when

all of the following conditions are satis-

fied.

. The vehicle is stopped completely.

. The outside temperature is within a

range from −22°F to 140°F (from

−30°C to 60°C).

. The ignition switch is in the “OFF” or

“ACC” position. Or, the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position and the select

lever is in the “P” position.

We recommend using the power rear

gate function in most circumstances

instead of manual operation.

KEYS AND DOORS

150

(153,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. The rear gate may not move smoothly

when the battery power becomes low.

. Do not press the power rear gate

button repeatedly while the power rear

gate is operating. Otherwise, the

system may ignore the button opera-

tion in order to avoid being damaged.

. If the vehicle starts to move while the

power rear gate is operating, the

system sounds a buzzer and closes

the rear gate automatically. At this

time, if the system detects jamming, it

will deactivate the power rear gate and

the rear gate will not be closed. If this

occurs, close the rear gate manually.

For details, refer to “Rear Gate”

�P148.

. If you try to open the rear gate using

the power rear gate function immedi-

ately after closing the rear gate using

the power rear gate function, an

electronic chirp will sound and the rear

gate will not open. Wait for a while

before trying to open the rear gate via

the power rear gate function.

. If either of the operating conditions

has not been satisfied while operating

the power rear gate, an electronic

chirp will sound and the power rear

gate will be deactivated. In this case,

the rear gate may stop opening or

closing suddenly.

S_204414-W

. The rear gate cannot be paused when

it is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm)

range from the fully closed position.

The system will ignore any button

operation and the rear gate will con-

tinue to open.

. The rear gate will remain unlocked

even after closing it. Always lock the

rear gate when leaving the vehicle.

. If you cannot open/close the rear gate

by performing the operation described

here, a short electronic chirp will

sound three times (beep, beep, beep).

In this case, perform the initialization

of the power rear gate. Refer to

“Initialization of Power Rear Gate”

�P158.

OPERATING BY THE POWER

REAR GATE BUTTON

s02au02

S_204489-W

Power rear gate button on the instru-

ment panel

Power rear gate button on the access

key fob

Opening the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button

when the rear gate is closed.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

151

(154,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

An electronic chirp and the hazard warn-

ing flashers will operate as follows:

. When operating the power rear gate

button on the instrument panel:

sounds and flashes twice.

. When operating the power rear gate

button on the access key fob: sounds

and flashes four times.

The rear gate will open automatically.

NOTE

. If you cannot open the rear gate by

operating the power rear gate button

on the instrument panel, then it may

be locked by using the keyless access

function or the remote keyless entry

system. Unlock the doors using the

keyless access function or the remote

keyless entry system before pressing

the power rear gate button again.

. The factory setting (default setting) of

the operation for the “

” button on

the access key fob or the transmitter is

pressing and holding. This setting can

be changed to non-operation or

pressing twice at SUBARU dealers.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

Pausing the rear gate while it is open-

ing:

Briefly press the power rear gate button

while the rear gate is being opened.

An electronic chirp will sound twice.

NOTE

If you press the power rear gate button

again, the rear gate will close.

Closing the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate

button.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

NOTE

If you briefly press the power rear gate

button again, the rear gate will open.

OPERATING BY THE BUTTONS

ON THE REAR GATE

s02au03

S_204490-W

Rear gate opener button

S_204491-W

Power rear gate lock button

Power rear gate button

Opening the rear gate:

When the rear gate is

locked

Briefly press the rear gate

opener button while carry-

ing the access key.

When the rear gate is

unlocked

Briefly press the rear gate

opener button.

After you operate the rear gate, an

electronic chirp will sound twice and the

hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

The rear gate will open automatically.

KEYS AND DOORS

152

(155,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Pausing the rear gate while it is open-

ing:

Briefly press either of the following but-

tons while the rear gate is being opened.

. Rear gate opener button

. Power rear gate button

. Power rear gate lock button

NOTE

If you press the power rear gate button

again, the rear gate will close.

Closing the rear gate:

Briefly press either of the following but-

tons.

. Rear gate opener button

. Power rear gate button

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

NOTE

If you press the power rear gate button

again, the rear gate will open.

Locking the doors using the power

rear gate lock button:

1. Carry the access key fob.

2. Press the power rear gate lock button.

All doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler

lid are locked, and the rear gate will be

closed. Also, the hazard warning flashers

will flash once, and an electronic chirp will

sound once.

NOTE

. When you push the power rear gate

lock button for more than 2 seconds,

all the doors will lock, but the auto

closing function of the rear gate will be

canceled.

. If you push the power rear gate lock

button while the access key is inside

the vehicle, an electronic chirp sounds

and the rear gate does not operate.

. When the ignition switch is placed in

the ON or ACC position, the rear gate

does not operate when you push the

power rear gate lock button.

. If any of the doors is not fully closed,

the electronic chirp sounds five times

to alert you that the doors are not

properly closed.

MANUAL OPERATION

s02au04

Opening the rear gate:

Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate is

at the midway position. The rear gate will

open automatically.

Closing the rear gate:

Pull down the rear gate when the rear

gate is opened. The rear gate will close

automatically.

NOTE

. If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may

not operate automatically open or

close.

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

that all doors and the rear gate are

completely locked.

HANDS-FREE POWER REAR

GATE

s02au05

S_204420-W

You can operate the rear gate by making

a kicking motion below the center of the

rear bumper.

The Hands-Free Power Rear Gate can be

switched to active or inactive. For details,

refer to “Hands-Free Power Rear Gate off

switch” �P154.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

153

(156,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

. Do not kick the bumper. Doing so

may cause a malfunction.

. Be careful not to touch the exhaust

pipe when making a kicking mo-

tion. There is a risk of burns.

. When opening and closing the rear

gate, check that there is a safe

amount of space behind the vehi-

cle. There is a risk of injury such as

being caught between the rear

gate and the wall.

. Be careful when making a kicking

motion while standing on a surface

where you footing is not stable. You

could lose your balance and fall.

. Be careful of the Hands-Free

Power Rear Gate if an access key

fob is placed near the vehicle. If a

person or physical object comes in

close proximity to the rear bumper,

the Hands-Free Power Rear Gate

may open suddenly resulting in

damage to the rear gate or perso-

nal injury. This can occur even if the

person who approaches the rear

bumper is not carrying the access

key fob.

Operating range

s02au0502

S_204492-W

Approx. 4 in (10 cm)

Kicking motion detection area

Make sure that you perform the kicking

motion within the operation range shown

in the figure.

Hands-Free Power Rear Gate

off switch

s02au0501

If you do not want to use the function,

press the Hands-Free Power Rear Gate

off switch.

KEYS AND DOORS

154

(157,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_204493-W

Function is active

Function is inactive

When the Hands-Free Power Rear Gate

off switch is pressed in, the Hands-Free

Power Rear Gate function will be deacti-

vated.

How to use the function

s02au0503

1. Check if the Hands-Free Power Rear

Gate off switch is set to active.

2. Make sure there is enough space

behind the vehicle and carry the

access key fob with you.

3. Move your foot into and then out of the

kicking motion detection area within 1

second, and then take a step back to

avoid hitting the rear gate.

S_204422-W

The electronic chirp will sound, and the

rear gate will operate.

NOTE

. If you move your foot into the opera-

tion range while the rear gate is in

opening, the rear gate will stop.

. If you perform a kicking motion while

the rear gate is in closing, the rear gate

will start opening.

. When the rear gate is opening or

closing, you can use a kicking motion

to stop or reverse the operation of the

rear gate, even if you are not carrying

the access key fob.

. In some situations, the Hands-Free

Power Rear Gate function may acti-

vate accidentally. To prevent this from

happening, turn off the function in the

following cases.

– When the area around the rear

bumper is equipped with outdoor

equipment, etc.

– When washing the vehicle

– When removing snow

– When a small animal or an object,

such as a ball, crosses the kicking

motion detection area

. The Hands-Free Power Rear Gate

function may not operate properly in

the following conditions.

– When you hold your foot under the

bumper.

– When the standing position of a

kicking motion is too close to the

rear bumper.

– When your foot comes in direct

contact with the bumper while

executing a kicking motion.

– When executing a kicking motion

repeatedly.

– When you slide your foot sideways

after executing a kicking motion.

– In heavy rain

– The rear bumper is very dirty.

– The vehicle is covering by snow.

– The system of the vehicle cannot

detect the access key fob.

– When you are affected by the

environment around the vehicle.

– When operating the function in a

location with strong radio waves or

noise (e.g., near a radio tower,

power plant or broadcast station),

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

155

(158,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

or while talking on a cell phone

– When stickers, painting, etc. are

applied to the rear bumper.

In such cases, wait a few moments,

and then operate the Hands-Free

Power Rear Gate function again as

instructed in this Owner’s Manual.

Alternatively, push the rear gate

opener button or the power rear gate

button to operate the function.

. When you close the rear gate by using

a kicking motion, it will take a few

seconds until the rear gate starts

closing. Back away from the rear gate

to avoid getting struck by it as it closes.

To have the interval before the rear

gate starts closing adjusted, visit your

SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to

“Function Settings and Adjustments

Performed by a Dealer” �P541.

. If you visit your SUBARU dealer to

have the automatic lock function set to

ON, this setting change will allow you

to close the rear gate and lock the

vehicle by using a kicking motion. For

details, refer to “Function Settings and

Adjustments Performed by a Dealer”

�P541.

. When a trailer hitch is attached to the

vehicle, the Hands-Free Power Rear

Gate function is not available.

MEMORY FUNCTION

s02au06

The preferred rear gate height can be

registered.

Registration of the rear gate height:

1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the

preferable height.

S_204494-W

Power rear gate button

2. Press and hold the power rear gate

button to register the height.

An electronic chirp sounds for confirma-

tion.

The rear gate will stop at the registered

position when the memory function is on.

NOTE

. Register the rear gate height to turn on

the “Power Rear Gate Memory” auto-

matically. Refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

. To change the registered height, per-

form the registering procedure again.

. It is possible to register the height from

approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more from

the completely closed position.

Deactivation of the memory function:

Deactivate the memory function to open

the rear gate fully. Perform either of the

following operation to deactivate the

memory function.

– Deactivate the “Power Rear Gate

Memory” function on the center infor-

mation display (CID). Refer to “Set-

tings icon (Car settings)” �P231.

– Register the position of the rear gate

at the fully open position.

KEYS AND DOORS

156

(159,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Utilizing the memorized rear gate

height:

To open the rear gate and stop it at the

registered height, perform the following

procedure.

1. Check that “Power Rear Gate Mem-

ory” is on. Refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

2. Press and hold any of the power rear

gate button.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position that

is stored in the memory function even if

the rear gate is opened by the reverse

function.

REVERSE FUNCTION

s02au07

WARNING

. Do not let parts of your body get

caught when operating the reverse

function. If the reverse function

does not operate for some reason,

this may lead to serious injury or

accidents.

. The reverse function may not

operate if foreign objects are

caught in the rear gate just before it

closes completely. Be careful not to

catch your fingers and other body

parts.

. The reverse function may not

operate depending on the object

shape and the manner in which it

was caught. Be careful not to catch

your fingers and other body parts.

CAUTION

. If the reverse function is operated 3

times consecutively, automatic

opening and closing of the power

rear gate function will be canceled

and the rear gate will stop opening

or closing suddenly. However, the

rear gate may open or close

depending on the rear gate height

when automatic operation is

ceased. Be careful that the rear

gate does not hit anyone’s head or

face, etc. and that fingers and

baggage, etc. are not caught in it.

. Take care not to damage the touch

sensors. Otherwise, the reverse

function may cease to operate.

If, while opening or closing using power

rear gate, the rear gate catches persons

or baggage or hits an obstacle, an

electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the

rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate:

The rear gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate:

The rear gate will automatically open.

S_204495-W

Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left

and right edges of the rear gate. If the

touch sensors detect fingers, baggage,

etc. while closing by the power rear gate

function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3

times and the rear gate will open auto-

matically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using the

reverse function, it will be opened fully or

to the height registered in the memory

function.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

157

(160,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

REAR GATE DROP PREVEN-

TION FUNCTION

s02au08

If, while fully opened via the power rear

gate function, the rear gate is lowered by

the weight of snow and such, an electro-

nic chirp will sound and the rear gate drop

prevention function will apply braking to

the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid

closure of the rear gate.

NOTE

. If there is snow on the rear gate, only

use the power rear gate function after

removing the snow.

. If you close the rear gate manually just

after the rear gate is fully opened

using the power rear gate function, the

rear gate drop prevention function will

detect a rapid closure of the rear gate

and apply braking to the rear gate. In

this case, this is not a malfunction.

SELECTING AUDIBLE SIGNAL

OPERATION

s02au09

Using an electronic chirp, the power rear

gate will give you an audible signal before

starting its operation. If desired, the

audible signal can be turned off by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

You can also turn the audible signal off by

operating the center information display.

For details, refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal

also works as the audible signal settings

for the “remote keyless entry system” and

the “keyless access with push-button

start system”. However, for the electronic

chirp such as that caused by “Reverse

Function” �P157 or “Rear Gate Drop

Prevention Function” �P158, it cannot be

set as non-operational.

INITIALIZATION OF POWER

REAR GATE

s02au10

If the power rear gate detects some

abnormality while operating, an electronic

chirp will sound and the power rear gate

operation will be automatically stopped in

either opening or closing position. In this

case, the system needs to be initialized in

the following order to restart the function

properly.

If the power rear gate is closed

s02au1001

1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener

button until it is unlocked (for approxi-

mately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear

gate.

S_204490-W

Rear gate opener button

2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to

close automatically. The system will

be initialized once the gate is fully

closed.

3. Operate the power rear gate and

check that the function operates

properly.

If the power rear gate is opened

s02au1002

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to

close automatically. The system will

be initialized once the gate is fully

closed.

If the rear gate will not close comple-

tely, keep pressing the rear gate

opener button for approximately 5

seconds and pull down the rear gate.

KEYS AND DOORS

158

(161,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Operate the power rear gate and

check that the function operates

properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function does

not operate properly, have your vehi-

cle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

2-11. MOONROOF (If

Equipped)

s02ak

The moonroof has a sliding function.

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head

or any objects protrude from the

moonroof. A person could be seriously

injured if any of the following condi-

tions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside ob-

jects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof, make

sure that no one’s hands, arms,

head or other objects will be

accidentally caught in the moon-

roof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety reasons

and never allow an unattended

child to remain in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-entrap-

ment function by deliberately pla-

cing part of your body in the

moonroof.

– CONTINUED –

KEYS AND DOORS

159

(162,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to freeze

shut.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

MOONROOF SWITCH

s02ak02

S_204496-W

Moonroof switch

Open

The switch is operable when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

SLIDING MOONROOF

s02ak10

To open the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and

held backward, the moonroof will open,

then stop slightly before the fully open

position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully

open the moonroof.

To close the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and

held to the close side, the moonroof will

fully close.

To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the

moonroof switch either way.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof

prior to opening the moonroof to

prevent drops of water from falling into

the passenger compartment.

. Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to be

generated at high speeds. If this

occurs, use the moonroof at the initial

stop position of 6 in (15 cm) away from

the fully opened position.

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

Anti-entrapment function

s02ak1001

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully

open position and stops there. The anti-

entrapment function may also be acti-

vated by a strong shock on the moonroof

even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts of

your body.

KEYS AND DOORS

160

(163,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SUNSHADE

s02ak05

S_204400-W

The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade

also moves back.

KEYS AND DOORS

161

(164,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(165,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s03
3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start
System)........................................................................................166
Key Positions ............................................................................. 166
Key Reminder Chime .................................................................. 167
Ignition Switch Light ................................................................... 167
3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button
Start System)...............................................................................168
Safety Precautions...................................................................... 168
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System ........................... 168
Switching Power Status .............................................................. 169
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 170
3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher .............................................................170
3-4. Meters and Gauges.....................................................................171
Speedometer .............................................................................. 171
Tachometer ................................................................................. 171
Odometer.................................................................................... 171
Double Trip Meter ....................................................................... 171
Fuel Gauge ................................................................................. 172
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ............................................ 173
Combination Meter Settings ........................................................ 173
3-5. Illumination Brightness Control.................................................174
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function..................................................... 174
3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ....................................................175
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime .............................................. 176
SRS Airbag System Warning Light .............................................. 178
Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF INDICATOR
LIGHTS ..................................................................................... 179
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light .......... 179
Charge Warning Light ................................................................. 180
Oil Pressure Warning Light ......................................................... 180
Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light............................................ 180
AT OIL TEMP Warning Light ........................................................ 181
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec. Models).................. 181
ABS Warning Light ..................................................................... 182
Brake System Warning Light ....................................................... 183
Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light...................................... 184
Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light ................................................ 186
Low Fuel Warning Light .............................................................. 186
Door Open Indicator Light........................................................... 186
Engine Hood Open Warning Light ............................................... 186
Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ...................................... 186
All-Wheel Drive Warning Light..................................................... 186
Power Steering Warning Light ..................................................... 187
Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics
Control Operation Indicator Light .............................................. 187
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light............................. 188
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped) ............................. 189
Security Indicator Light............................................................... 192
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3

(166,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
SI-DRIVE Indicator ...................................................................... 192
Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator............................................ 193
Turn Signal Indicator Lights ........................................................ 193
High Beam Indicator Light........................................................... 193
High Beam Assist Indicator ......................................................... 193
Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning Light ....................... 193
LED Headlight Warning Light ...................................................... 193
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator Light ..................... 193
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light ............................. 194
Headlight Indicator Light ............................................................. 194
Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped) ............................... 194
Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)........................................ 194
Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light ............................................ 194
Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) ....................................... 194
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator Light.................... 194
X-MODE Indicator (If Equipped) ................................................... 195
Hill Descent Control Indicator Light (If Equipped) ........................ 195
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped) .................................. 195
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ........................................ 195
Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator ............................................ 195
RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped) ........................................... 196
RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ................................................. 196
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator (If Equipped)......................... 196
Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator Light (Green)
(If Equipped) ............................................................................. 196
Driver Monitoring System Warning Light (Yellow) (If Equipped).... 196
Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light (If Equipped)......... 196
Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop Indicator Light
(If Equipped) ............................................................................. 196
3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)...................................197
Basic Operation .......................................................................... 198
Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and Good-Bye Screen
(Ending Animation) ................................................................... 198
Warning Screen .......................................................................... 199
Meter Information Screen ............................................................ 199
Telltale Screen ............................................................................ 200
Basic Screens............................................................................. 201
Digital Speed Screen................................................................... 204
3-8. Center Information Display (CID) Features...............................205
Welcome Screen ......................................................................... 205
Good-Bye Screen........................................................................ 206
Interruption Screen ..................................................................... 206
Touch Screen Operations ............................................................ 206
3-9. Center Information Display (Dual 7.0-Inch Display) .................207
HOME Button.............................................................................. 208
Status Bar................................................................................... 208
Climate Control Screen ............................................................... 208
How to Change the Screen Settings ............................................ 209
Shortcut Icons ............................................................................ 209
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

(167,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
3-10. Center Information Display (11.6-Inch Display) ........................219
HOME Icon ................................................................................. 219
Status Bar................................................................................... 219
Information Bar........................................................................... 220
Climate Control Screen ............................................................... 222
How to Change the Screen Settings ............................................ 223
Shortcut Icons ............................................................................ 223
3-11. Clock ............................................................................................235
Setting the Clock Manually.......................................................... 235
Setting the Clock Automatically................................................... 236
Setting 12-Hour Display/24-Hour Display ..................................... 236
Time Zone (Models with Navigation System)................................ 237
Daylight Saving Time (Models with Navigation System) ............... 237
3-12. Valet Mode ...................................................................................237
Activation of Valet Mode ............................................................. 237
Deactivation of Valet Mode .......................................................... 238
3-13. Light Control Switch...................................................................238
Headlights .................................................................................. 239
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ............................................... 241
Headlight Flasher........................................................................ 242
High Beam Assist Function ......................................................... 242
Daytime Running Light System ................................................... 245
3-14. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ......................................246
3-15. Headlight Beam Leveler .............................................................247
3-16. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)........................................248
3-17. Turn Signal Lever........................................................................248
One-Touch Lane Changer............................................................ 248
3-18. Wiper and Washer.......................................................................249
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ...................................... 251
Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch ...................................... 252
3-19. Defogger and Deicer...................................................................254
3-20. Mirrors .........................................................................................255
Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function) (If Equipped) ....... 255
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass (If Equipped) ............................... 255
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink
®
(If Equipped) ...... 256
Smart Rearview Mirror (If Equipped)............................................ 264
Outside Mirrors........................................................................... 269
3-21. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel...................................................271
3-22. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped)...........................272
3-23. Horn .............................................................................................273
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3

(168,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-1. IGNITION SWITCH

(Models without Push-But-

ton Start System)

s03aa

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is being

driven or towed because that will

lock the steering wheel, preventing

steering control. And when the

engine is turned off, it takes a much

greater effort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to a

child or others. Children could

operate the power windows, the

moonroof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key

case to either key. If it banged against

your knees or hands while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition switch

from the “ON” position to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position, thereby stopping the

engine. Also, if the key is attached to a

key holder or to a large bunch of other

keys, centrifugal force may act on it as

the vehicle moves, resulting in un-

wanted turning of the ignition switch.

S_307525-MW

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK”

position when the engine is not run-

ning.

. Using electrical accessories for a long

time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move from

the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

KEY POSITIONS

s03aa11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or

removed in this position. The

ignition switch will lock the steer-

ing wheel when you remove the

key.

ACC

In this position the electrical

accessories (audio, accessory

power outlet, etc.) can be used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the engine.

START

The engine is started in this

position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine is

running.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

166

(169,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_307526-MW

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position:

– Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

– Push in and turn the key.

. If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the

security indicator light will blink), and

then insert the key again and turn it to

the “START” position again to restart

the engine.

. The engine may not start in the

following cases:

S_307527-MW

– The key grip is touching another

key or a metallic key holder.

S_307528-MW

– The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transpon-

der.

– The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

KEY REMINDER CHIME

s03aa05

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the following

conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The key is removed from the ignition

switch.

. The driver’s door is closed.

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

s03aa06

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for ap-

proximately 30 seconds and gradually

turns off under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

167

(170,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The light gradually turns off under the

following conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The doors are locked using the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. PUSH-BUTTON IGNI-

TION SWITCH (Models with

Push-Button Start System)

s03bg

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s03bg04

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P118.

OPERATING RANGE FOR

PUSH-BUTTON START SYS-

TEM

s03bg01

S_307894-W

Antennas

Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the

antennas inside the vehicle, the push-

button ignition switch and the engine

start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible

to switch the power or to start the

engine.

. Do not leave the access key fob in the

following places. It may become im-

possible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– At the corner of the cargo area

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

168

(171,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. When operating the push-button igni-

tion switch or starting the engine, if the

access key fob battery is discharged,

perform the procedure described in “If

Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly” �P471. In such a case,

replace the battery immediately. Refer

to “Replacing Battery of Access Key

Fob” �P526.

SWITCHING POWER STATUS

s03bg02

S_307895-W

Operation indicator

Push-button ignition switch

The power status is switched every time

the push-button ignition switch is

pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal.

Every time the button is pressed, the

power is switched in the sequence of

“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When

the engine is stopped and the push-

button ignition switch is in “ACC” or

“ON”, the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch illuminates

in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off Power is turned off.

ACC Orange

The following sys-

tems can be used:

audio and acces-

sory power outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. To prevent the vehicle battery from

discharging, do not leave the push-

button ignition switch in the “ON” or

“ACC” position for a long time.

. To avoid a malfunction, observe

the following precautions.

– Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button

ignition switch.

– Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand that

is soiled with oil or other

contaminants.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch does

not illuminate even when the in-

strument panel illumination is

turned on, have the vehicle in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot sun

for a long time, the surface of the

push-button ignition switch may

get hot. Be careful not to burn

yourself.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

169

(172,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. When operating the push-button igni-

tion switch, firmly press it all the way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-button

ignition switch flashes in green when

the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

Battery drainage reduction

function

s03bg0201

When the push-button ignition switch is

left in the “ACC” position for approxi-

mately 20 minutes or the “ON” position

(the engine is not running) for approxi-

mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition

switch will be automatically switched to

“OFF” to reduce the possibility of the

battery going dead. (This function is

activated when the select lever is in the

“P” position.)

WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB

DOES NOT OPERATE PROP-

ERLY

s03bg03

Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not

Operate Properly” �P471.

3-3. HAZARD WARNING

FLASHER

s03ab

S_307531-W

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency condi-

tions. The hazard warning flasher works

with the ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

press the hazard warning flasher switch

on the instrument panel. All the turn signal

lights and the turn signal indicator lights

will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the

switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

170

(173,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-4. METERS AND GAUGES

s03ad

NOTE

Liquid crystal displays are used in some

of the meters and gauges in the combi-

nation meter. You will find their indications

hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

SPEEDOMETER

s03ad03

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter nee-

dles and gauge needles that occurs when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

For details, refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

TACHOMETER

s03ad06

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module to

protect the engine from overrevving.

The engine will resume running nor-

mally after the engine speed is re-

duced below the red zone.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter nee-

dles and gauge needles that occurs when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

For details, refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

ODOMETER

s03ad04

S_307896-W

TRIP RESET switch

Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”

or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip

meter will light up. The indicators will turn

off when the TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 seconds.

DOUBLE TRIP METER

s03ad05

S_307897-W

TRIP RESET switch

Trip meter

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

171

(174,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

ZOM0972

To reset the trip meter, select either the A

trip or B trip meter, then press and hold

the TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

. If the connection between the combi-

nation meter and battery is broken for

any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or fuse replacement, the data

recorded on the trip meter will be lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. It is

possible to switch between the A trip

meter and B trip meter indications

while the odometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the

trip meter by pressing and holding the

TRIP RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when the

TRIP RESET switch is not operated

for approximately 10 seconds.

FUEL GAUGE

s03ad07

S_307534-W

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel

level movement in the tank (e.g., during

braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

lid is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

fuel gauge will light up and indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge will turn off when the TRIP

RESET switch is not operated for

approximately 10 seconds.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

172

(175,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-

TURE GAUGE

s03ad08

S_307535-W

Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moder-

ately until the pointer of the temperature

gauge reaches near the middle of the

range. Engine operation is optimum with

the engine coolant at this temperature

range and high revving operation when

the engine is not warmed up enough

should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the vehi-

cle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine Overheating”

�P465.

COMBINATION METER SET-

TINGS

s03ad16

Meter settings can be set on the center

information display. For details, refer to

the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

173

(176,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-5. ILLUMINATION BRIGHT-

NESS CONTROL

s03aj

S_307536-W

The illumination brightness of the combi-

nation meter and center information dis-

play dims under the following conditions.

. The light switch is in the “

” or “ ”

position when the ambient light is

dark.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not canceled

even when the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. The operation method of illumination

brightness will differ depending

whether or not “Brightness Dial” in the

center information display is on. Refer

to the operation method indicated the

following table.

“Brightness Dial” is on.

Operational

item

Combina-

tion meter

Center in-

formation

display

Control dial Available Available

“Bright-

ness”*

the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Not avail-

able

“Brightness Dial” is off.

Operational

item

Combina-

tion meter

Center in-

formation

display

Control dial Available

Not avail-

able

“Bright-

ness” on

the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Available

*1: When “Brightness Dial” is on, “Bright-

ness” on the center information dis-

play is not available.

For details about “Brightness Dial” on/off

settings, refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

AUTO DIMMER CANCEL

FUNCTION

s03aj01

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot

adjust the illumination brightness by

using the control dial. When the ambient

light is dark, you can dim the illumination

brightness as described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

174

(177,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details.

3-6. WARNING AND INDICA-

TOR LIGHTS

s03ae

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and turn off after several

seconds or after the engine has started:

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt

warning light turns off only when the

driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front

passenger’s seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: Rear seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

175

(178,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

: Power steering warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-

spec. models)

: Low fuel warning light

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

SEATBELT WARNING

LIGHT AND CHIME

s03ae01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and pas-

senger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

Driver’s and front passenger’s

seats

s03ae0114

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their

seatbelts by illuminating the warning

lights in the locations indicated in the

following illustration and sounding a

chime.

Driver’s warning light

S_307537-W

Front passenger’s warning light

S_307538-W

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front

passenger’s warning light will illuminate,

then it will blink for several seconds. If the

seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fas-

tened, the warning chime may make a

beep sound.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s

seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened while

driving, the seatbelt warning system

operates as follows according to the

vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when the vehicle speed is ap-

proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.

– The warning light will blink, and the

warning chime will make a beep

sound when the vehicle speed is

between approximately 4 mph (6

km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The

warning chime will stop when the

vehicle stops.

– The warning light will blink, and the

warning chime will sound loudly

when 15 seconds have elapsed

when the vehicle speed is between

approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and

13 mph (20 km/h).

– The warning light will blink, and the

warning chime will sound loudly

when the vehicle speed is ap-

proximately more than 13 mph (20

km/h).

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

176

(179,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

seatbelt is fastened.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

system for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

seatbelt warning system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on the

front passenger’s seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

device from functioning correctly or

cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to place his/her hands or legs on

the front passenger’s seatback, or

allow him/her to pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Front Seats” �P37.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant, although we

strongly recommend that all children

sit in the rear seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward

position and seatback of front pas-

senger’s seat are locked into place

securely by moving the seat back and

forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective

actions described above, immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

Rear passenger’s seats

s03ae0115

Rear seatbelt warning light

S_307899-W

Rear left seat

Rear center seat

Rear right seat

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light and

chime reminds the rear passenger to

fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the

warning lights in the locations indicated in

the above illustration and sounding a

chime.

WARNING

. The driver must check that all the

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts properly since the seat-

belt warning system may not detect

passengers under the following

circumstances.

– When cushions or child re-

straint systems, etc., are used.

– When a child or small adult is

sitting in the seat.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

177

(180,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Observe the following precautions

– Do not apply any strong impact

to the rear seat.

– Do not fold the seatback for-

ward when objects are on the

seat.

– Do not spill liquid on the rear

seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately.

– Do not remove or disassemble

the rear seat.

NOTE

. The seatbelt warning system of the

rear seat detects if the seat is occu-

pied by a passenger. Heavy cargo or

large pets on the rear seat may result

in the activation of the passenger

seatbelt warning light and chime.

Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to

loading cargo or large pets will avoid

activating the passenger seatbelt

warning light and chime.

. When folding the rear seat, ensure

that the seat is empty prior to folding.

Items caught between the seat bottom

and seatback, when folded, may

damage the seat surface or activate

the passenger seatbelt warning light

and chime.

If passengers in the rear seats do not

fasten their seatbelts when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or

blink to indicate that their seatbelts are

not fastened.

NOTE

. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/

is still not fastened while driving, the

seatbelt warning system operates as

follows according to the vehicle

speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when the vehicle speed is ap-

proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.

– When the vehicle speed is ap-

proximately between 4 mph (6

km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h), the

seatbelt warning lights will blink

and a warning chime will sound.

The chime will make a beep sound

for 15 seconds, and it then will

become louder and continue for 35

seconds. The warning light will

blink for 50 seconds, then it will

illuminate steadily and the chime

will stop.

– The warning light will blink, and the

beep will sound loudly for 35

seconds when the vehicle speed is

approximately more than 13 mph

(20 km/h). After 35 seconds, the

blinking warning light will illuminate

steadily and the chime will stop.

The warning lights will continue to

illuminate until their seatbelts are

fastened.

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the

following conditions, immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe place, and consult

a SUBARU dealer. Unless a techni-

cian checks and repairs the system as

needed, the seatbelt pretensioners

and/or the SRS airbag will not operate

properly in the event of a collision,

which may result in injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning light

when the ignition switch is first

turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

178

(181,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

Airbag System Monitors” �P109.

FRONT PASSENGER’S FRON-

TAL AIRBAG ON AND OFF IN-

DICATOR LIGHTS

s03ae03

S_307540-W

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

For details about the operating conditions

of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to

“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag

System” �P91.

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights show you the

status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag.

The indicator lights are located as shown

in the illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicator lights illuminate for 6 seconds

during which time the system is checked.

Following the system check, both indica-

tor lights turn off for 2 seconds. After that,

one of the indicator lights illuminates

depending on the status of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deter-

mined by the SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag is activated, the passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON indicator light will illuminate

while the OFF indicator light will remain

off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag is deactivated, the passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indicator light will

remain off while the OFF indicator light

will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicator

lights remain illuminated or off simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is malfunctioning.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately for an inspection.

CHECK ENGINE

WARNING LIGHT/MAL-

FUNCTION INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illuminates

while you are driving, have your

vehicle checked/repaired by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could cause serious damage, which

may not be covered by your vehicle’s

warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may

indicate that there is at least one problem

or potential problem somewhere in the

emission control system.

If the light illuminates con-

stantly

s03ae0401

If the light illuminates constantly while

driving or does not turn off after the

engine starts, an emission control system

malfunction has been detected.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

179

(182,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/malfunction indicator light com-

ing on could be a loose or missing fuel

filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it

until it clicks. Make sure nothing is

interfering with the sealing of the cap.

Tightening the cap will not make the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light turn off immediately. It

may take several driving trips. If the light

does not turn off, take your vehicle to your

authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

If the light is blinking

s03ae0402

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should conform

to the following instructions.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if pos-

sible.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may stop blinking

and illuminate steadily after several driv-

ing trips. You should have your vehicle

checked by an authorized SUBARU

dealer immediately.

CHARGE WARNING

LIGHT

s03ae05

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or

does not turn off after the engine starts,

stop the engine at the first safe opportu-

nity and check the drive belt. If the drive

belt is loose, broken or if the drive belt is in

good condition but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

OIL PRESSURE WARN-

ING LIGHT

s03ae06

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the oil

pressure warning light on. This may

cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or

does not turn off after the engine starts,

stop the engine at the first safe opportu-

nity and contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately.

ENGINE LOW OIL LEVEL

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae58

This light appears when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the warning light appears, check the

engine oil level on a level surface. When

the engine oil level is not within the normal

range, refill with engine oil. Refer to

“Engine Oil” �P496. After adding or

changing the engine oil, warm up the

engine and stop it on a level surface, then

start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute

or more. Confirm that the warning light

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

180

(183,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

has turned off after the engine has

started. If the warning light does not turn

off after refilling the engine oil, or the light

appears even though the engine oil level

is within the normal range, have the

vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The oil level will be detected by the

system just after turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. If the oil

level is below the lower limit when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the engine low oil level

warning light will turn on.

. When the vehicle is parked on a steep

slope, the engine low oil level warning

light may not illuminate even if the oil

level is below the lower limit to avoid

erroneous lighting.

AT OIL TEMP WARNING

LIGHT

s03ae07

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the trans-

mission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light turns off.

Transmission control system

warning

s03ae0701

If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may

indicate that the transmission control

system is not working properly. Contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer for service

immediately.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE

WARNING LIGHT (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s03ae08

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure

warning light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 2 seconds to check that the tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is

functioning properly. If there is no problem

and all tires are properly inflated, the light

will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly when

cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-

nates a low tire pressure telltale when one

or more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling

and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating prop-

erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure tell-

tale. When the system detects a mal-

function, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

181

(184,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate

tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Al-

ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly

after the ignition switch is turned on or

the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

3) Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the

COLD tire pressure shown on the

tire inflation pressure label on the

door pillar on the driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may have significant damage and a

fast leak that causes the tire to lose air

rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to

“Flat Tires” �P459.

When a replacement tire is mounted

or a wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the TPMS

is unable to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible for tire and sensor

replacement and/or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system is

NOT a substitute for manually check-

ing tire pressure. The tire pressure

should be checked periodically (at

least monthly) using a tire gauge. After

any change to tire pressure(s), the tire

pressure monitoring system will not re-

check tire inflation pressures until the

vehicle is first driven more than 25

mph (40 km/h). After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures are

now above the severe low pressure

threshold, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light should turn off a few minutes

later. Therefore, be sure to install the

specified size for the front and rear

tires.

ABS WARNING LIGHT

s03ae09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

182

(185,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, but

it does not turn off even after

starting the vehicle.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

brake system warning light is off),

the ABS function shuts down;

however, the conventional brake

system continues to operate nor-

mally.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-

gether with the brake system warning

light if the EBD system malfunctions. For

further details of the EBD system mal-

function warning, refer to “Brake System

Warning Light” �P183.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following conditions, the

ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illuminated

after the engine has been started, but

it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may

illuminate. This is due to the low battery

voltage and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. When the battery becomes fully

charged, the light will turn off.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae10

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous. This

indicates your brake system may

not be working properly. If the light

remains illuminated, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the brake system warning light

illuminates, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle

in a safe location, use tire stops

under the tires to prevent the

vehicle from moving and contact

your SUBARU dealer. For details,

refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”

�P363.

NOTE

. Even if the brake system warning light

illuminates, if the warning light beha-

vior is as described in the following

examples, the electronic parking

brake system is not malfunctioning.

– The warning light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is

applied or released.

– The warning light turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position again.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate immediately after the en-

gine is started. However, it is not

malfunctioning if the warning light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate after the electronic parking

brake is frequently applied and re-

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

183

(186,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

leased. However, the electronic park-

ing brake system is not malfunctioning

if the light turns off after a short period

of time.

. When the engine is started while the

electronic parking brake is applied/

released, the system may judge an

abnormal situation and the warning

light may illuminate. If the warning light

illuminates, turn the ignition switch

once to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

and then restart the engine. Then,

apply/release the electronic parking

brake. If the warning light turns off, the

system will be restored.

This light has the following functions.

Brake fluid level warning

s03ae1002

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the

ignition switch in the “ON” position and

with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

Electronic Brake Force Distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

s03ae1003

If the warning light remains on even

though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid level may be low or there could

be a problem with the EBD system. Park

the vehicle in a safe place immediately

and contact a SUBARU dealer.

Electronic brake booster warn-

ing

s03ae1009

The brake system warning light illumi-

nates when the electronic brake booster

is malfunctioning. In addition, the warning

messages “Brake System” and “Check

Owner’s Manual” are displayed alter-

nately on the combination meter display

(color LCD). If the warning light illumi-

nates, promptly park in a safe location as

soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Electronic parking brake sys-

tem warning

s03ae1004

The brake system warning light illumi-

nates when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the warning

light illuminates, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains

illuminated when the parking brake can-

not be released even if the electronic

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”

�P363.

Frequent operation warning:

The brake system warning light illumi-

nates and a chirp sound will be heard if

the electronic parking brake switch is

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the electronic parking brake

switch is restricted to protect the electro-

nic parking brake system.

ELECTRONIC PARK-

ING BRAKE INDICA-

TOR LIGHT

s03ae85

Parking brake indicator

s03ae8501

The light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off

when the parking brake is fully released.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

184

(187,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Electronic parking brake sys-

tem warning

s03ae8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the engine is

running, the electronic parking

brake indicator light will turn off.

However, if the light still illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle in a safe

location immediately and have the

system inspected by a SUBARU

dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the electro-

nic parking brake system may be

malfunctioning. Immediately stop

your vehicle in a safe location, use

tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving and con-

tact your SUBARU dealer. For

details, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake” �P363.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated for approximately

30 seconds and then turns off.

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pulled to apply the electronic

parking brake while the ignition switch

is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

illuminates, remains illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not malfunc-

tioning.

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is

released.

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light may flash immediately after the

engine is started. However, it is not

malfunctioning if the indicator light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light may flash after the electronic

parking brake is frequently applied

and released. However, the electronic

parking brake system is not malfunc-

tioning if the light turns off after a short

period of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator

light flashes when the electronic parking

brake system is malfunctioning. If the

indicator light flashes, promptly park in a

safe location as soon as possible and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator

light remains illuminated when the park-

ing brake cannot be released even if the

electronic parking brake switch is pushed.

For details, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake” �P363.

Parking brake apply inhibit warning:

The electronic parking brake indicator

light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp

sound will be heard if the electronic

parking brake switch is operated when

the parking brake cannot be applied.

Frequent operation warning:

The electronic parking brake indicator

light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp

sound will be heard if the electronic

parking brake switch is operated too

frequently. In this case, the operation of

the electronic parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

185

(188,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

AUTO VEHICLE HOLD

INDICATOR LIGHT

s03ae94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

does not illuminate even when “Auto

Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is touched to

activate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion, the electronic parking brake

system may be malfunctioning.

This indicator illuminates when the Auto

Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator

blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details,

refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold Function”

�P367.

LOW FUEL WARNING

LIGHT

s03ae11

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty approxi-

mately 2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal).

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever

the low fuel warning light illuminates.

Engine misfires as a result of an empty

tank could cause damage to the

engine.

DOOR OPEN INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae61

When any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, the door open indicator

light appears. This function is effective

even if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is

removed from the ignition switch (models

without “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

The open door is indicated by the

corresponding part of the door open

indicator light.

Always make sure this indicator does not

appear before you start to drive.

ENGINE HOOD OPEN

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae98

The warning light illuminates if the engine

hood is not fully closed. This function is

effective even if the ignition switch is in

the “OFF” or “ACC” position.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

WINDSHIELD WASHER

FLUID WARNING LIGHT

s03ae42

This light appears when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae13

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park in

a safe location and then check

whether all four tires are the same

diameter and whether any of the tires

has a puncture or has lost air pressure

for some other reason.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of the

temporary spare tire should therefore be

restricted to the minimum time necessary.

Replace the temporary spare tire with a

conventional tire as soon as possible.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

186

(189,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on

its wheels or with the air pressure

excessively low in any of its tires.

POWER STEERING

WARNING LIGHT

s03ae53

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power

steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light

is illuminated, there may be more

resistance when the steering wheel is

operated. Drive carefully to the near-

est SUBARU dealer and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering control

system may temporarily limit the power

assist in order to prevent the system

components, such as the control compu-

ter and drive motor, from overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the fully

turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resistance

when steering. However, this is not a

malfunction. Normal steering force will be

restored after the steering wheel is not

operated for a while and the power

steering control system has an opportu-

nity to cool down. However, if the power

steering is operated in a non-standard

way which causes power assist limitation

to occur too frequently, that may result in

a malfunction of the power steering

control system.

VEHICLE DYNAMICS

CONTROL WARNING

LIGHT/VEHICLE DY-

NAMICS CONTROL OP-

ERATION INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae14

Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light

s03ae1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

provides its ABS control through the

electrical circuit of the ABS. Accord-

ingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-

comes unable to provide ABS control.

As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes inoperative,

causing the warning light to illuminate.

Although both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control and ABS are inoperative in

this case, the ordinary functions of the

brake system are still available. You

will be safe while driving in this

condition, but drive carefully and have

your vehicle checked at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illu-

minates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-

lock Brake System) remains fully

operational.

. The warning light illuminates when the

electronic control system of the ABS/

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and brake

system warning light illuminate simul-

taneously if the EBD system malfunc-

tions. For further details of the EBD

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

187

(190,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

system malfunction warning, refer to

“Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning” �P184.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following examples, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be

considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates after the

engine has started and turns off while

the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but turns off immediately and

remains off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control op-

eration indicator light

s03ae1402

The indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and

during activation of the traction control

function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for a

short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the fol-

lowing condition. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

. The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the

engine has warmed up) after the

engine has started.

VEHICLE DYNAMICS

CONTROL OFF INDICA-

TOR LIGHT

s03ae15

The light illuminates when “Vehicle Dy-

namics Control” is selected to deactivate

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

Refer to “To Turn On/Off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control System” �P358.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate while the

system check.

. The light does not turn off even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds

after the ignition switch has been

turned to the “ON” position.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

188

(191,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING CHIMES AND

WARNING INDICATOR OF THE

KEYLESS ACCESS WITH

PUSH-BUTTON START SYS-

TEM (If Equipped)

s03ae55

S_307541-W

The keyless access with push-button

start system is equipped with a warning

chime and the access key warning

indicator in order to minimize improper

operations and help protect your vehicle

from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator appears, take the

appropriate action.

You cannot turn the warning chimes off.

However, the volume setting of the out-

side warning chime can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indicator

on the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in green when starting the

engine. This indicates the status that

the steering wheel is not released and

could result in an accident involving

serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch flashes

in green, if the operation indicator

is still flashing in green, there could

be a steering lock malfunction.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside the

vehicle, the access key warning for

engine start may be provided de-

pending on the status of the access

key fob and the environmental condi-

tions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open win-

dow, the access key takeout warning

or passenger access key takeout

warning will not be provided.

List of warnings

s03ae5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warning

indicator does not appear, take the

appropriate action.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

189

(192,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Inside

warning

chime

Outside

warning

chime

Operation in-

dicator on

push-button

ignition

switch

Status Action

Ding, ding

...

(intermit-

tent)

— —

The driver’s door is opened

while the push-button ignition

switch is “ACC” position and the

select lever is in the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”, or close the

driver’s door.

When exiting the vehicle, be

sure to switch the push-button

ignition switch to “OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch

is switched to “OFF” while the

driver’s door is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 sec-

onds)

—

Lockout warning:

The doors are locked by follow-

ing methods when an access

key fob is left in the car.

. The door is closed when the

lock lever of the door is in

the lock position.

. The door is closed when the

power door locking switch is

in the lock position.

Take out the access key fob from

the vehicle, and lock the doors.

The doors cannot be locked

while the access key fob is

inside the vehicle.

A chirp sound will be heard, and

all doors will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 sec-

onds)

—

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while the push-button ignition

switch is “OFF” and the access

key fob is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from

the vehicle, and lock the doors.

If the access key fob is inside the

vehicle, the doors cannot be

locked.

—

Beep,

beep,

beep, beep

(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while the ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position and one of the

doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and

lock them.

If one of the doors including the

rear gate is opened, the doors

cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep

(60 sec-

onds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor is touched

while you are carrying the ac-

cess key fob, the push-button

ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select

lever is in the “P” position.

Return the access key fob inside

the vehicle, or switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF”.

If the push-button ignition switch

is not switched to “OFF”, the

doors cannot be locked.

Ding, ding

...

(7 sec-

onds)

— —

Access key warning:

The vehicle is driven while the

access key fob is not inside the

vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and

drive the vehicle.

Ding — —

Access key warning for en-

gine start:

The push-button ignition switch

is pressed while the access key

fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

Ding

Beep,

beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with

the access key fob and closes

the driver’s door while the push-

button ignition switch is in a

position other than “OFF” and

the select lever is in a position

other than the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”, and get out of

the vehicle.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

190

(193,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Inside

warning

chime

Outside

warning

chime

Operation in-

dicator on

push-button

ignition

switch

Status Action

Ding

Beep,

beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Passenger access key take-

out warning:

A fellow passenger exits the

vehicle with the access key fob

and closes a door other than the

driver’s door while the push-

button ignition switch is in a

position other than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to

inside the vehicle, or switch the

push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

Long beep

(continu-

ous)

Long beep

(continu-

ous)

—

Access key takeout without

“P” position warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with

the access key fob and closes

the driver’s door while the push-

button ignition switch is in a

position other than “OFF” and

the select lever is in a position

other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button

ignition switch to “OFF” and exit

the vehicle.

Long beep

(continu-

ous)

— —

Select lever position warning:

. Case 1: The engine is

turned off by pressing the

push-button ignition switch

while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P”

position.

. Case 2: The driver’s door is

opened while the push-but-

ton ignition switch is in a

position other than “OFF”

and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P”

position.

. Case 1: Start the engine,

shift the select lever to the

“P” position, switch the

push-button ignition switch

to “OFF” and exit the vehi-

cle.

. Case 2: Shift the select

lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button igni-

tion switch to “OFF” and exit

the vehicle.

Ding — —

The battery of the access key

fob is low.

Replace the battery of the ac-

cess key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in

green

(15 seconds

max)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure is

performed, but the steering is

still locked.

While turning the steering wheel

right and left lightly, depress the

brake pedal and press the push-

button ignition switch.

Ding —

Flashes in

orange

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction is detected in the

power system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer im-

mediately and have the vehicle

inspected.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

191

(194,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SECURITY INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae16

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

Alarm system

s03ae1601

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm System”

�P142.

Immobilizer system

s03ae1602

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button

ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the

following conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is

in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregis-

tered or the ID code does not match), the

power is not switched to “ON” and the

security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position.

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates. For details about the immobilizer

system, refer to “Immobilizer” �P131.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains off

in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer sys-

tem is deactivated, and it does not

indicate a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or

closed

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– For approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such as

the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

SI-DRIVE INDICATOR

s03ae52

S_307901-W

Models with Sport (S) mode

Models with Sport Sharp (S#) mode

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

192

(195,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to

“SI-DRIVE” �P350.

SELECT LEVER/GEAR POSI-

TION INDICATOR

s03ae43

S_307902-W

Upshift indicator

Downshift indicator

Select lever/gear position indicator

The select lever position is displayed on

the indicator.

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator, which shows the

current gear selection, and the available

up shift/downshift indicator light up. Refer

to “Selection of Manual Mode” �P347.

TURN SIGNAL INDI-

CATOR LIGHTS

s03ae20

These lights show the operation of the

turn signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be

burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as

possible. Refer to “Replacing Bulbs”

�P523.

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae21

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

operating the headlight flasher.

HIGH BEAM ASSIST IN-

DICATOR

s03ae83

This indicator appears when the high

beam assist function is activated. For

details about the high beam assist func-

tion, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P242.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT

BEAM LEVELER WARN-

ING LIGHT

s03ae33

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates while driving, have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

LED HEADLIGHT WARN-

ING LIGHT

s03ae76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

STEERING RESPONSIVE

HEADLIGHT OFF INDI-

CATOR LIGHT

s03ae89

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight function is off. For

details about the on/off setting, refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P225 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

193

(196,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

STEERING RESPON-

SIVE HEADLIGHT

WARNING LIGHT

s03aeb2

The light illuminates when a malfunction

occurs in the Steering Responsive

Headlight. Refer to “Steering Responsive

Headlight (SRH)” �P246.

HEADLIGHT INDICATOR

LIGHT

s03ae24

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. The light switch is turned to the “

”

or “

” position.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

FRONT FOG LIGHT INDI-

CATOR LIGHT (If

Equipped)

s03ae25

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

AUTO START STOP

WARNING LIGHT (Yellow)

s03ae65

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light is

illuminated in yellow, there may be a

malfunction in the Auto Start Stop

system. When starting the engine

again after the Auto Start Stop warn-

ing light illuminates, if it is still illumi-

nating, we recommend that you have

your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

The Auto Start Stop warning light will

illuminate in yellow if you open the engine

hood when the engine has been tem-

porarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop

system.

In this case, to ensure safety, the engine

will not be automatically restarted, even if

you release the brake pedal. Use normal

operation to restart the engine.

AUTO START STOP OFF

INDICATOR LIGHT

s03aeb3

This light will illuminate when “Auto Start

Stop” is touched to prevent the Auto Start

Stop system from operating. It will turn off

when “Auto Start Stop” is touched once

more to enable operation of the Auto Start

Stop system. For details about the

setting, refer to the following sections.

– “Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator

light does not illuminate when “Auto

Start Stop” is touched, we recommend

that you contact a SUBARU dealer for

an inspection as soon as possible.

AUTO START STOP INDI-

CATOR LIGHT (Green)

s03ae66

This indicator light illuminates when the

engine has been temporarily stopped by

the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off

when the engine is restarted.

AUTO START STOP NO

ACTIVITY DETECTED IN-

DICATOR LIGHT

s03aea3

When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator

light illuminates when the operating con-

dition of the Auto Start Stop system is not

met. The light will turn off when the

vehicle starts driving. Refer to “Non-

operational conditions” �P373.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

194

(197,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

X-MODE INDICATOR (If

Equipped)

s03ae68

S_307903-W

Models with 1 mode

Models with 2 modes (DEEP SNOW/

MUD, SNOW/DIRT)

This indicator appears while X-MODE is

activated. It will disappear when X-MODE

is deactivated. Refer to “To Activate/

Deactivate X-MODE” �P360.

HILL DESCENT CON-

TROL INDICATOR LIGHT

(If Equipped)

s03ae69

This indicator appears while the hill

descent control function is in standby. It

will flash while the hill descent control

function is operating. It will disappear

when the hill descent control function is

not available. Refer to “Hill Descent

Control Function” �P360.

BSD/RCTA WARNING IN-

DICATOR (If Equipped)

s03ae80

This warning indicator appears on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is mal-

functioning for any reason. For further

details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning

Indicator” �P394. If this indicator re-

mains displayed, have your vehicle in-

spected by your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

BSD/RCTA OFF INDICA-

TOR (If Equipped)

s03ae86

This indicator appears on the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) when

“Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” is

touched to deactivate the BSD (Blind

Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross

Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/RCTA is

suspended temporarily. For details, refer

to “BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator” �P393.

ICY ROAD SURFACE

WARNING INDICATOR

s03ae82

When the outside temperature is 37°F

(3°C) or less, the icy road surface warning

indicator will illuminate to inform the driver

that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be de-

layed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. The icy road surface warning indicator

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

indicator appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temperature has

increased to 41°F (5°C) or higher.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

195

(198,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

RAB WARNING INDI-

CATOR (If Equipped)

s03ae91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system mal-

functions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) System” �P397.

RAB OFF INDICATOR (If

Equipped)

s03ae92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is

turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) system is sus-

pended temporarily. Refer to “Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) System”

�P397.

SONAR AUDIBLE ALARM

OFF INDICATOR (If

Equipped)

s03ae93

This indicator illuminates when the Sonar

Audible Alarm is turned OFF. For the

setting procedure, refer to “Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/

OFF Setting” �P407.

DRIVER MONITORING

SYSTEM OPERATION IN-

DICATOR LIGHT (Green)

(If Equipped)

s03aea4

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is activated. Refer to

“Driver Monitoring System operation in-

dicator light (green)” �P417.

DRIVER MONITORING

SYSTEM WARNING

LIGHT (Yellow) (If

Equipped)

s03aeb6

This warning light illuminates if the Driver

Monitoring System malfunctions. We re-

commend that you have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible. Refer to “Driver Monitoring

System warning light (yellow)” �P417.

DRIVER MONITORING

SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR

LIGHT (If Equipped)

s03aea5

This indicator illuminates when “Driver

Monitoring System” is touched to deacti-

vate the Driver Monitoring System. Refer

to “Driver Monitoring System OFF indi-

cator light” �P417.

DRIVER MONITORING

SYSTEM TEMPORARY

STOP INDICATOR LIGHT

(If Equipped)

s03aea6

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily

stopped. Refer to “Driver Monitoring

System temporary stop indicator light”

�P417.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily when the temperature of the

Driver Monitoring System unit is high.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

196

(199,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-7. COMBINATION METER

DISPLAY (Color LCD)

s03bn

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe

driving when operating the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) while

the vehicle is in motion. When opera-

tion of the combination meter display

(color LCD) interferes with your ability

to concentrate on driving, stop the

vehicle before performing operations

on the screen. Also, do not concen-

trate on the display while driving.

Doing so may cause you to look away

from the road and could result in an

accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

Also, a warning message will appear on

the display if a malfunction is detected. In

addition, several settings for the dis-

played content can be performed.

S_307904-W

Meter information screen (Refer to

“Meter Information Screen” �P199.)

Warning screen (Refer to “Warning

Screen” �P199.)/Basic screen (Refer

to “Basic Screens” �P201.)

EyeSight screen*

Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital

Speed Screen” �P204.)

Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale

Screen” �P200.)

Select lever/gear position indicator

(Refer to “Select Lever/Gear Position

Indicator” �P193.)

X-MODE indicator*

(Refer to

“X-MODE Indicator” �P195.)/

SI-DRIVE indicator (Refer to

“SI-DRIVE Indicator” �P192.)

Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”

�P171.)/Double trip meter (Refer to

“Double Trip Meter” �P171.)

Activating the EyeSight system

Deactivating the EyeSight system

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

197

(200,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

*1: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight

Owner’s Manual.

*2: If equipped

BASIC OPERATION

s03bn01

S_307905-W

By operating or of the control

switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display

accompanied by a beep. If such a screen

is displayed, take proper action according

to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the

information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with

on the display,

press the

switch on the steering wheel.

WELCOME SCREEN (Opening

Animation) AND GOOD-BYE

SCREEN (Ending Animation)

s03bn08

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

and center information display upon en-

tering and exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the

welcome screen (opening animation) will

appear on the combination meter display

(color LCD) for approximately 20 sec-

onds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination

meter display (color LCD) gradually turns

off by showing good-bye screen (ending

animation).

NOTE

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen may differ in the actual

words and appearance.

. The basic screen will be shown when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position while the welcome screen is

displayed.

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated after

unlocking the driver’s door, the wel-

come screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

(all models) or the keyless access

function (if equipped) while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

audio/navigation unit can be set to on

or off.

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen can be set to on or off. For

details, refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

198

(201,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING SCREEN

s03bn05

Example of warning

S_307548-W

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

combination meter display (color LCD).

Take the appropriate actions based on

the messages indicated.

METER INFORMATION

SCREEN

s03bn12

This screen informs the driver of various

information.

The meter information screen can be

changed. For details, refer to the follow-

ing sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

ECO gauge

s03bn1201

S_307549-W

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel con-

sumption.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

“+” side “−” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer

Better

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is

not shown until driving 0.6 miles (1

km). Until that time, the ECO gauge

does not operate.

Clock and temperature

s03bn1202

S_307550-W

This screen displays the clock and out-

side temperature.

NOTE

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Setting 12-Hour

Display/24-Hour Display” �P236.

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be de-

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

199

(202,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

layed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or

Celsius (°C). For details, refer to the

following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

Compass (if equipped)

s03bn1203

S_307551-W

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Driving range on remaining fuel

s03bn1204

S_307552-W

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on the

remaining fuel, so you must immediately

fill the tank when the low fuel warning light

illuminates.

TELLTALE SCREEN

s03bn09

S_307906-W

Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

. When there is warning information to

display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the left

in ascending order of severity.

. If there are 6 or more warning mes-

sages to display, the indicators will be

displayed in sequential order.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator light 186

Engine hood open warning

light

186

LED headlight warning

light

193

High beam assist indicator 193

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

200

(203,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Mark Name Page

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

193

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

194

Engine low oil level warn-

ing light

180

AT OIL TEMP warning light 181

All-Wheel Drive warning

light

186

RAB warning indicator (if

equipped)

196

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

196

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF

indicator (if equipped)

196

BSD/RCTA warning indi-

cator (if equipped)

195

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

(if equipped)

195

Hill descent control indica-

tor light (if equipped)

195

Auto Start Stop warning

light (yellow)

194

Auto Start Stop indicator

light (green)

194

Auto Start Stop OFF indi-

cator light

194

Auto Start Stop No Activity

Detected indicator light

194

Automatic headlight beam

leveler warning light

193

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

186

Mark Name Page

Driver Monitoring System

operation indicator light

(green) (if equipped)

196

Driver Monitoring System

warning light (yellow) (if

equipped)

196

Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator light (if

equipped)

196

Driver Monitoring System

temporary stop indicator

light (if equipped)

196

Icy road surface warning

light

195

BASIC SCREENS

s03bn06

By operating the or switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the

screen that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

S_307554-W

AVG: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on the

remaining fuel, so you must immediately

fill the tank when the low fuel warning light

illuminates.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

201

(204,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Current fuel consumption screen:

S_307555-W

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on the

remaining fuel, so you must immediately

fill the tank when the low fuel warning light

illuminates.

Driving information screen:

S_307556-W

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

Auto Start Stop screen:

S_307557-W

: The total amount of time that the engine

was stopped by means of the Auto Start

Stop system

: The total amount of fuel saved due to the

engine being stopped by the Auto Start

Stop system

The indicated values are calculated from

the most recent reset of the currently

displayed trip meter to the current time.

The indication ranges are as follows.

Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to

9999h59’59@

. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 gal to

9999.999 gal

NOTE

. When the trip meter is reset, the

corresponding accumulated time and

the amount of fuel saving are also

reset.

. The time spent with the engine

stopped by means of the Auto Start

Stop system is also added to the

journey time.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

202

(205,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

S_307558-W

This screen displays each tire pressure.

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

. The tire pressure values are displayed

several minutes after driving.

. You can set the tire pressure units. For

details about setting the units, refer to

the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

. Once the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the low tire pressure,

the tire pressure values will display in

yellow until the system detects the

normal tire pressure.

. Immediately adjust the tire pressure

when the warning light illuminates.

When the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the adjusted tire pres-

sure, the warning light will turn off and

the tire pressure values will turn to

white.

. For information about the specified

value of the air pressure, refer to

“Tires” �P535.

Compass screen (if equipped):

S_307559-W

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Navigation screen (if equipped):

S_307560-W

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information. For details

about the navigation system, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

203

(206,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Audio screen:

S_307561-W

The audio screen shows the status of

audio information. For details about the

audio system, refer to the separate nav-

igation/audio Owner’s Manual.

Clock and outside temperature

screen:

S_307562-W

This screen displays the clock and out-

side temperature. For details about clock

setting, refer to “Clock” �P235.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be de-

layed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or

Celsius (°C). For details, refer to the

following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

DIGITAL SPEED SCREEN

s03bn11

S_307907-W

Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

204

(207,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-8. CENTER INFORMATION

DISPLAY (CID) FEATURES

s03bs

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving

when operating the center information

display while the vehicle is in motion.

When operation of the center infor-

mation display is disturbing your

awareness and ability to concentrate

on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe

place before performing operations on

the display. Also, do not concentrate

on the display while driving. Doing so

could result in an accident.

All information is displayed on the center

information display, including vehicle

settings, vehicle status, navigation sys-

tem (if equipped) operation, audio op-

eration, and climate control operation.

Items

Page for

dual 7.0-inch

display mod-

els

Page for

11.6-inch

display mod-

els

Interruption screen 206

Vehicle status and

maintenance infor-

mation

216/216 224

Vehicle settings 209 223

Climate control op-

erations

208 222

Rear view camera 383

Surround View

Monitor*

— 376

Navigation system

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

Audio/telephone

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

EyeSight

Refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the EyeSight

system.

*: If equipped

The center information display can also

be used to set and initialize the center

information display itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion, certain

functions and selections may not be

available.

. The language and units for both the

center information display and the

combination meter display (color

LCD) can be changed. For details,

refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

For details about unit settings, refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Car settings icon” �P225 (11.6-

inch display models)

. The images displayed in this Owner’s

Manual are sample images. The ac-

tual image may vary depending on the

region and vehicle specifications.

WELCOME SCREEN

s03bs02

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

and center information display upon en-

tering and exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear

for a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is shown.

. The welcome screen can be turned on

or off. For details, refer to the following

sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

205

(208,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared,

it may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is opened and closed.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

GOOD-BYE SCREEN

s03bs08

The good-bye screen will be displayed

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is opened after the

ignition switch is put in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

. 3 minutes have passed after the

ignition switch is put in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position with the driver’s door

closed.

. 10 minutes have passed when the

hands-free phone is used after the

ignition switch is put in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

. The battery voltage is low when the

ignition switch is put in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

INTERRUPTION SCREEN

s03bs03

Useful messages, such as reminders,

weather information (if equipped) and

traffic information (if equipped) may in-

terrupt the current screen and appear on

the display accompanied by a beep. Take

the proper action according to the mes-

sage.

TOUCH SCREEN OPERATIONS

s03bs04

The center information display has a

touch screen. Operations are performed

by touching the touch screen directly.

Touch

s03bs0401

S_307564-W

Quickly touch and release once.

Drag

s03bs0402

S_307565-W

Touch the screen and move the screen to

the desired position.

Swipe

s03bs0403

S_307566-W

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

your finger.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

206

(209,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be performed

smoothly in high altitudes.

ON/OFF setting

s03bs0404

S_307908-W

OFF

Touch the changing menu and select OFF

or ON .

Item selecting

s03bs0405

S_307700-W

Touch the preferred setting.

3-9. CENTER INFORMATION

DISPLAY (Dual 7.0-Inch Dis-

play)

s03bw

S_307909-W

Upper display

Lower display

HOME button (Refer to “HOME Button”

�P208.)

Status bar (Refer to “Status Bar”

�P208.)

Upper main screen

Lower main screen

Climate control screen (Refer to “Cli-

mate Control Screen” �P208.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will acti-

vate.

Upper main screen:

For details about items, refer to “Shortcut

Icons” �P209.

For details about the following menu,

refer to the separate audio Owner’s

Manual.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

207

(210,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Apps

. Add to Shortcut

Lower main screen:

For details about the setting items, refer

to “Shortcut Icons” �P209.

If this screen changes to the climate

control screen, refer to “Dual 7.0-Inch

Display Models” �P278.

HOME BUTTON

s03bw01

Press (HOME) to display the top

menu.

STATUS BAR

s03bw02

The driver profiles icon, outside tem-

perature and clock are shown on the

display.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature

may not be indicated correctly or the

update may be delayed in the follow-

ing conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or

Celsius (°C). For details, refer to

“Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210.

. The clock can be shown in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For

details about the setting, refer to

“Setting 12-Hour Display/24-Hour

Display” �P236.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen. Refer

to “Clock” �P235.

CLIMATE CONTROL SCREEN

s03bw03

S_307910-W

Driver’s seat heater icon*

Set temperature indicator (driver’s

side)

SYNC mode indicator

Airflow mode

Climate control mode

Air inlet selection

Air conditioner ON indicator

Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

Dynamic Ventilation ON/OFF icon

Front passenger’s seat heater icon*

Customizable icon

Fan speed control

Climate control ON/OFF icon

*: If equipped

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details about

climate control operation, refer to “Cli-

mate Control Panel” �P277.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

208

(211,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

HOW TO CHANGE THE

SCREEN SETTINGS

s03bw05

Set and adjust the brightness and con-

trast of the center information display.

Brightness/Contrast

s03bw0501

1. Press (HOME).

2. Touch

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

S_307796-W

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted when

“Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to “Settings

icon (General settings)” �P210.

SHORTCUT ICONS

s03bw04

Upper main screen:

For details about the following menu,

refer to the separate audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Apps

. Add to Shortcut

Lower main screen:

If this screen changes to the climate

control screen, refer to “Dual 7.0-Inch

Display Models” �P278.

Valet mode icon

s03bw0401

For details, refer to “Valet Mode” �P237

Display Off

s03bw0402

Activation of the display off mode:

Touch “Display Off”.

S_307607-W

Deactivation of the display off mode:

Press and hold the volume knob to turn

the screen back on.

S_307608-W

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

209

(212,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Settings icon (General settings)

s03bw0403

In this Owner’s Manual, the settings of the

“General” menu will be explained. The

“General” menu is used to set the display,

language and time.

For details about other items, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

1. Press

(HOME).

2. Touch

(Settings).

S_307606-W

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

210

(213,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your

personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting Sync With Phone/Manual

235

Clock Format 12H/24H

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. —

Brightness Dial ON/OFF —

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the bright-

ness and contrast of the

screen display and cam-

era display.

—

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

206Birthday ON/OFF

Anniversary ON/OFF

Valet Mode

Passcode Setting*

keyboard: Enter New

Passcode

237Activate Valet Mode

keyboard: Enter Your

Passcode

Change Passcode

keyboard: Change Pass-

code

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 171

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/

Clock/Gas Range

199

Camera

Rear Camera Delay

Control

ON/OFF 384

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 386

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

211

(214,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Climate Control

Customize Climate But-

ton

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Re-

circulation/SYNC

284

Temperature Unit °F/°C — 208

Language —

English/Français/Espa-

ñol

197 and 205

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 201

Home Screen Shortcuts — ON/OFF *

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 198

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 198

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 206

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 206

SUBARU STARLINK

Apps Recovery

— OK/Cancel

SUBARU STARLINK

Auto Connect

— ON/OFF

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

System Information — —

Free/Open Source Soft-

ware Information

—

*1: Displayed until valet mode is set.

*2: If equipped

*3: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and

navigation system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

212

(215,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Vehicle settings while driving

s03bw0404

S_307610-W

Touch the following icons to display the

items that remain operable during driving.

– Vehicle Control icon

– Driving Assistance icon

– More Settings icon

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

213

(216,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Vehicle

Control

Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 358

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 367

Cruise Control Accelera-

tion

—

Eco/Comfort/Standard/

Dynamic

Steering Responsive

Headlights (SRH)

— ON/OFF 246

Driving

Assis-

tance

Pre-Collision Braking

System

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

Forward Collision Warn-

ing

Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure

Prevention & Warning

All Functions/Lane De-

parture Prevention Func-

tion Only/Warning Buzzer

Only/OFF

Warning Timing Normal/Later

More Set-

tings

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

171 and 197

Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF

375

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

214

(217,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

s03bw0405

S_307911-W

Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Touching “

” deactivates the Auto Start

Stop system and turns off the Auto Start

Stop indicator (green) on the screen.

Touching “

” again activates the Auto

Start Stop system and turns on the Auto

Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “To

turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system”

�P375.

Auto Vehicle Hold icon

s03bw0406

S_307612-W

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, touch the “Auto Vehicle Hold”

icon.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn off.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function” �P367.

NOTE

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

on, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

on the combination meter turns on. The

“Auto Vehicle Hold” indicator also turns

on at the same time.

Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

s03bw0407

S_307613-W

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is turned off during engine op-

eration, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combination

meter illuminates and the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system will be deacti-

vated.

For details about the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, refer to “To Turn On/Off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control System”

�P358.

NOTE

When Vehicle Dynamics Control is on,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light on the combination meter

turns off. The “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

indicator turns on at the same time.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

215

(218,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Driving Statistics icon

s03bw0408

S_307912-W

Steering angle

Vehicle posture

Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status of the

functions. For functions that are operat-

ing, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt

caused by the occupants, cargo, and

acceleration or deceleration.

Maintenance icon

s03bw0409

S_307622-W

Maintenance reminders can be set.

1. Touch

(Maintenance).

2. ?

(Engine Oil , Oil Filter, Tires, or

Maintenance Schedule)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the default

value.

Car settings icon

s03bw0410

Touch (Car Settings).

S_307614-W

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

216

(219,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your

personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu 4th menu

Car Set-

tings

EyeSight

Pre-Collision

Braking System

Pre-Collision

Braking

Setting ON/Setting

OFF

Forward Collision

Warning

Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure

Prevention &

Warning

All Functions/Lane

Departure Preven-

tion Function Only/

Warning Buzzer

Only/OFF

Warning Timing Normal/Later

Cruise Control Ac-

celeration

—

Eco/Comfort/Stan-

dard/Dynamic

Lead Vehicle Ac-

quisition Sound

— ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle

Moving Monitor

— ON/OFF

Select Drive on

Left/Drive on Right

—

Right Lane/Left

Lane

EyeSight Assist

Monitor*

Red Indicator — ON/OFF

Yellow Indicator — ON/OFF

Green Indicator — ON/OFF

Keyless Entry Sys-

tem

Hazard Warning

Flasher

— ON/OFF 135

Audible Signal — ON/OFF 129 and 134

Defogger — —

15 minutes/Con-

tinuous

254

Interior Light — —

10 seconds/20

seconds/30 sec-

onds/OFF

299

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

217

(220,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu 4th menu

Car Set-

tings

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity — Min/Low/Mid/Max 239

Wiper Link — ON/OFF 240

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time

Set

—

30 seconds/60

seconds/90 sec-

onds/OFF

240

Leaving Time Set —

30 seconds/60

seconds/90 sec-

onds/OFF

One-Touch Lane

Changer

— — ON/OFF 248

Auto Door Lock/

Unlock

Auto Door Lock —

Vehicle Speed/

Shift into or out of

PARK/OFF

139

Auto Door Unlock —

Ignition OFF/Dri-

ver Door Open/

Shift into or out of

PARK/OFF

Rear Seat Remin-

der

— — ON/OFF 67

Vehicle Dynamics

Control

— — ON/OFF 358

Auto Vehicle Hold

(AVH)

— — ON/OFF 367

Auto Start Stop — — ON/OFF 375

Steering Respon-

sive Headlight

(SRH)

— — ON/OFF 246

Warning Volume — — Min/Mid/Max *

Units — —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gal-

lon

171 and 197

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

218

(221,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-10. CENTER INFORMA-

TION DISPLAY (11.6-Inch

Display)

s03bx

S_307913-W

HOME icon (Refer to “HOME Icon”

�P219.)

Status bar (Refer to “Status Bar”

�P219.)

Information bar (Refer to “Information

Bar” �P220.)

Main screen (Refer to “Shortcut Icons”

�P223.)

Manage device icon (Refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.)

Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver

profiles icon” �P227.)

Climate control screen (Refer to “Cli-

mate Control Screen” �P222.)

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon (Refer to

“Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon”

�P227.)

Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings

icon” �P225.)

Auto Vehicle Hold icon (Refer to “Auto

Vehicle Hold icon” �P224.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will acti-

vate.

HOME ICON

s03bx01

S_307581-W

To display the main screen, touch

(HOME).

STATUS BAR

s03bx02

The outside temperature and clock are

displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature

may not be indicated correctly or the

update may be delayed in the follow-

ing conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Fahrenheit (°F) or

Celsius (°C). For details, refer to

“Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models).

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

219

(222,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen. Refer

to “Clock” �P235.

. For details about Bluetooth device

information, refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

INFORMATION BAR

s03bx03

S_307704-W

Swipe the information bar or touch “ ” or

“

” on the information bar to switch the

item displayed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

220

(223,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Items Details NOTE

Audio screen

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

Navigation screen*

The directions to the destination are

displayed on the screen.

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orienta-

tion, street name and speed limit remain

displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

. Some items may not be shown de-

pending on the model and specifica-

tions.

. The items shown on the favorite

screen can be changed. For details,

refer to “Favorite screen items”

�P222.

Weather informa-

tion screen*

When all of the following conditions are

satisfied, weather information is displayed.

. The vehicle is equipped with an audio

and navigation system for SiriusXM

satellite radio.

. The SiriusXM satellite radio subscrip-

tion is active.

. The weather forecast for the set

destination remains displayed until

you set a new destination or until you

reach your destination.

. Depending on the reception timing of

the satellite radio service, the weather

information may be delayed.

X-MODE screen

X-MODE information is displayed on the

screen. Also, X-MODE can be switched to

a different mode (if equipped) on the

screen.

—

*: If equipped

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

221

(224,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Favorite screen items

s03bx0301

Item Details

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil temperature

Average vehicle speed

Accelerator opening ratio

Vehicle posture

Direction of the vehicle*

Weather information for the next

three hours*

Weather information for the next

six hours*

Posted speed limit of the road

you are currently driving on*

Calendar

Driver Monitoring System*

in-

formation and the average fuel

consumption of driver

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

CLIMATE CONTROL SCREEN

s03bx04

The climate control status is shown on the

screen.

S_307914-W

Driver’s seat heater/ventilation icon*

Set temperature indicator (driver’s

side)

SYNC mode indicator

Airflow mode

Climate control mode

Air inlet selection

Air conditioner ON indicator

Dynamic ventilation mode indicator

Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

Dynamic ventilation ON/OFF icon

Front passenger’s seat heater/ventila-

tion icon*

Customizable icon

Fan speed control

Climate control ON/OFF icon

*: If equipped

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details, refer

to “Climate Control Panel” �P277.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

222

(225,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

HOW TO CHANGE THE

SCREEN SETTINGS

s03bx06

Set and adjust the brightness and con-

trast of the center information display.

Brightness/Contrast

s03bx0601

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

S_307797-W

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted when

“Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to “Settings

icon (General settings)” �P227.

SHORTCUT ICONS

s03bx05

This Owner’s Manual includes explana-

tions of the vehicle settings.

For details about the following menu,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Map

. Apps

. Add to Shortcut

For details about the following menu,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for “SUBARU STARLINK Safety and

Security”.

. MySubaru

Valet mode icon

s03bx0501

For details, refer to “Valet Mode” �P237.

Display Off icon

s03bx0502

Activation of the display off mode:

Touch “Display Off”.

S_307577-W

Deactivation of the display off mode:

Press and hold the volume knob to turn

the screen back on.

S_307873-W

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

223

(226,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Auto Vehicle Hold icon

s03bx0503

S_307915-W

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, touch the “Auto Vehicle Hold”

icon.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn off.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function” �P367.

Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

s03bx0504

S_307576-W

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is turned off during engine op-

eration, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combination

meter illuminates and the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system will be deacti-

vated.

For details about the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, refer to “To Turn On/Off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control System”

�P358.

Car information icon

s03bx0505

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top

menu.

2. ?

(Car Info)

S_307601-W

Driving Statistics screen:

S_307916-W

Driving Statistics

Steering angle

Running condition

Vehicle posture

Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status

functions. For functions that are operat-

ing, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

224

(227,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt

caused by the occupants, cargo, and

acceleration or deceleration.

Maintenance screen:

S_307603-W

Maintenance reminders can be set.

1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd

menu in the car info screen.

2. ?

(“Engine Oil”, “Oil Filter”, “Tires”,

or “Maintenance Schedule”)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Default” to revert to the default

value.

. For details about the “Auto”, refer to

the Owner’s Manual supplement for

“SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Se-

curity”.

Car settings icon

s03bx0506

S_307731-W

Touch (car settings icon) to display the

items that are changeable while driving.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

225

(228,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Vehicle Control

Vehicle Dy-

namics Control

— ON/OFF 358

X-MODE —

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

Models with 2 modes: Snow/Dirt,

Normal, Deep Snow/Mud

360

Cruise Control

Acceleration

— Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *

Auto Vehicle

Hold (AVH)

— ON/OFF 367

Steering Re-

sponsive Head-

lights (SRH)

— ON/OFF 246

Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 375

Driving Assis-

tance

Pre-Collision

Braking

— Setting ON/Setting OFF

Forward Colli-

sion Warning

— Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure

Prevention &

Warning

All Functions/Lane Departure Pre-

vention Function Only/Warning

Buzzer Only/OFF

Warning Timing Normal/Later

Rear Vehicle

Detection (BSD/

RCTA)*

— ON/OFF 393

Driver Monitor-

ing System*

— ON/OFF 409

More Settings

Warning Vo-

lume

— Min/Mid/Max 392, 407 and *

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

171 and 197

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

226

(229,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

s03bx0507

S_307917-W

Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Touching “

” deactivates the Auto Start

Stop system and turns off the Auto Start

Stop indicator (green) on the screen.

Touching “

” again activates the Auto

Start Stop system and turns on the Auto

Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “To

turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system”

�P375.

Driver profiles icon

s03bx0508

Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm

the driver’s information. For details, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

Manage devices icon

s03bx0509

Touch the manage devices icon to pair

your vehicle’ system with a device that

uses Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, or a

similar application. For details, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

Settings icon (General settings)

s03bx0510

Set the time and display general items.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

S_307582-W

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

227

(230,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your

personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting*

AUTO/Manual

235

Time Setting*

Sync With Phone/Manual

Time Zone*

AUTO/Pacific/Mountain/

Central/Eastern/Atlantic/

Newfoundland/Guam/Ha-

waii/Alaska

Daylight Saving Time*

AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF

Clock Format 12H/24H

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. —

Brightness Dial ON/OFF 174

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness

and contrast of the display.

219

Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi ON/OFF

Connected to: Select the registered devise.

Available Wi-Fi Networks Add

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

PIN Setup/Push Button Set-

Registered Wi-Fi Net-

works

—

Wi-Fi Security In-

formation

Wi-Fi Security Informa-

tion (AP mode)

—

Wi-Fi Hotspot

Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF

Wi-Fi name (SSID): —

Security Type: —

Password: —

Broadcast Frequency: —

SSID Broadcast ON/OFF

Connected Devices: —

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

206Birthday ON/OFF

Anniversary ON/OFF

Valet Mode

Passcode Setting*

Keyboard: Enter New Pass-

code

237Activate Valet Mode

Keyboard: Enter Your Pass-

code

Change Passcode

Keyboard: Change Pass-

code

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

228

(231,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Meter Screen
Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 171
Meter Information Screen
Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/
Clock/Compass*
4
/Gas
Range
199
Turn by Turn Screen In-
terruption*
1
ON/OFF 201
Camera
Rear Camera Delay
Control
ON/OFF 384
Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 386
Climate Control
Customize Climate But-
ton
A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recir-
culation/SYNC
284
Temperature Units °F/°C — 219
Language — English/Français/Español 197 and 205
Tire Pressure
Units*
5
— kPa/PSi 201
Home Screen
Shortcuts
— ON/OFF *
6
Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 198
Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 198
Favorite Widgets —
Set a favorite widget from the
list.
222
Birthday List — Set a birthday. 206
Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 206
Periodic Rest No-
tification*
1
— ON/OFF
*
6
Software Update
Update
Check if a new software
update
Automatically Check for
Updates
ON/OFF
Automatically Download
Updates
ON/OFF
Default —
SUBARU
STARLINK Apps
Recovery
— OK/Cancel
SUBARU
STARLINK Auto
Connect
—
ON/OFF
– CONTINUED –
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
229
3

(232,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Factory Data Re-

set

— Reset/Cancel

System Informa-

tion

— —

Free/Open Source

Software Informa-

tion

—

*1: Models with navigation system

*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK without navigation system

*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK or navigation system

*4: Models without navigation system

*5: If equipped

*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and

navigation system.

*7: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

*8: Displayed until valet mode is set.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

230

(233,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Settings icon (Car settings)

s03bx0511

Perform the EyeSight system setting and

vehicle setting.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

S_307583-W

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

231

(234,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your

personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

EyeSight

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

Forward Collision Warning Far/Normal/Near

Lane De-

parture

Prevention &

Warning

All Functions/Lane Depar-

ture Prevention Function

Only/Warning Buzzer

Only/OFF

Warning

Timing

Normal/Later

Cruise Control Accelera-

tion

Eco/Comfort/Standard/

Dynamic

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving

Monitor

ON/OFF

Select Drive on Left/Drive

on Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

EyeSight Assist Monitor*

Red Indicator ON/OFF

Yellow Indicator ON/OFF

Green Indicator ON/OFF

Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB)*

Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 397

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem*

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF

409

Request Setting Update ON/OFF

Repeat Facial Scan

Perform the user recogni-

tion.

User Recognition ON/OFF

Auto Retract Seat on Entry ON/OFF

Update Seat and Mirror

Position

Re-register the driver’s

position.

Delete Driver Position

Delete the registered dri-

ver’s position.

Delete User Delete the registered user.

Delete All Users

Delete all registered

users.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

232

(235,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Item
Available settings
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem opera-
tion
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal*
1
*
2
ON/OFF 129 and 134
Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 129 and 135
Driver Door Unlock*
1
Driver Door Only/All 122
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*
1
Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All 122
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 254
Interior Light —
10 seconds/20 seconds/
30 seconds/OFF
299
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 239
Wiper Link ON/OFF 240
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds/OFF
240
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds/OFF
One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 248
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Vehicle Speed/Shift into or
out of PARK/OFF
139
Auto Door Unlock
Ignition OFF/Driver Door
Open/Shift into or out of
PARK/OFF
Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 67
Door Mirror Setting*
1
Reverse Tilt ON/OFF 270
Power Rear Gate*
1
Power Rear Gate Memory ON/OFF 156
Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 358
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 367
Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 375
Rear Vehicle Detection
(BSD/RCTA)*
1
— ON/OFF 393
X-MODE —
Models with 1 mode: ON/
OFF
Models with 2 modes:
Snow/Dirt, Normal, Deep
Snow/Mud
360
Steering Responsive
Headlights (SRH)
— ON/OFF
246
– CONTINUED –
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
233
3

(236,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item

Available settings

Page refer-

ence for the

vehicle sys-

tem opera-

tion

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max

392, 407

and *

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

171 and 197

*1: If equipped

*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.

However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.

*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

234

(237,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-11. CLOCK

s03af

For models with a genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

SETTING THE CLOCK MANU-

ALLY

s03af03

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press

(HOME) (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

S_307623-W

Touch (HOME) (11.6-inch display

models).

S_307625-W

3. Touch (Settings).

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. ? “Manual”

Dual 7.0-inch display models

S_307624-W

11.6-inch display models

S_307626-W

8. ? or

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

235

(238,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SETTING THE CLOCK AUTO-

MATICALLY

s03af02

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press

(HOME) (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

S_307623-W

Touch (HOME) (11.6-inch display

models).

S_307625-W

3. ? (Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. Models with navigation system:

? “AUTO”

Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without navigation

system:

? “AUTO”

Models without SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security or navigation

system:

? “Sync With Phone”

Models with navigation system:

The clock will be set automatically where

a GPS signal is available.

Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without navigation

system:

The clock will be set automatically where

a DCM (Data Communication Module in

vehicle cellular connection) signal is

available.

Models without SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security or navigation

system:

The clock will be set and adjusted

automatically when a smartphone is

connected via Bluetooth

for transferring

phonebook data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental

Owner’s Manual for the audio/navi-

gation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental

Owner’s Manual for the audio/navi-

gation system. The clock will be

adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smartphone,

the settings of the connected smartphone

may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or

other models, notification settings may

need to be activated.) For details, check

the instructions on connecting smart-

phones.

SETTING 12-HOUR DISPLAY/

24-HOUR DISPLAY

s03af08

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press

(HOME) (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

Touch

(HOME) (11.6-inch display

models).

3. ?

(Settings).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

236

(239,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Clock Format”

TIME ZONE (Models with Navi-

gation System)

s03af06

You can configure the “Time Zone” setting

on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Time Zone” is set automati-

cally. Refer to “Settings icon (General

settings)” �P227 for the setting.

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME (Mod-

els with Navigation System)

s03af07

You can configure the “Daylight Saving

Time” setting on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Daylight Saving Time” is set

automatically. Refer to “Settings icon

(General settings)” �P227 for the setting.

NOTE

. When “Time Setting” is set to “AUTO”,

you can change “Daylight Saving

Time” and “Time Zone” settings.

. When “Daylight Saving Time” is set to

“AUTO”, the “Time Zone” setting can

only be set to “AUTO”.

3-12. VALET MODE

s03bt

When leaving your vehicle with a valet

service, such as at a hotel or restaurant,

you can set the valet mode, which

disables the navigation, audio, and vehi-

cle setting functions.

ACTIVATION OF VALET MODE

s03bt01

1. Touch “Valet Mode”.

S_307630-W

2. Enter the passcode.

S_307632-W

3. Touch “OK”.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

237

(240,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

DEACTIVATION OF VALET

MODE

s03bt02

1. Touch “Deactivate” (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

S_307635-W

Touch “Valet Mode” or select OFF

(11.6-inch display models).

S_307634-W

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch “OK”.

NOTE

If you enter the passcode incorrectly

three times in a row when setting or

canceling valet mode, a message

prompting you to contact a SUBARU

dealer will be displayed, but it is still

possible to enter the passcode even after

the fourth attempt.

If you have forgotten your passcode,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

3-13. LIGHT CONTROL

SWITCH

s03ah

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the light control switch is

turned to the off position. If the

vehicle is left unattended for a long

time with the light control switch set

to a position other than the off

position, even though the lights will

turn off after 10 minutes, the

battery may be discharged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when

the push-button ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when

the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be operated

(except auto on/off headlights) even

when under the following conditions.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

238

(241,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. When the push-button ignition switch

is turned to the “OFF” position (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”)

. When the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, a chirp sound will inform the

driver that the lights are illuminated.

HEADLIGHTS

s03ah01

S_307636-W

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the light control switch.

“OFF” position (for U.S. models):

The headlights are all off.

Only when the following conditions are

fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail

lights and license plate lights are auto-

matically on or off depending on the level

of the ambient light.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

“OFF” position (for Canada models):

The headlights are all off.*

*1: When the light switch is switched to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,

the lights turn off. Then the light switch will

automatically return to the “AUTO” position.

*2: The headlights will automatically change to

the AUTO mode when the following condi-

tions are met:

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other than

the “P” position.

“AUTO” position:

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, headlights, parking lights, front side

marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail

lights and license plate lights are auto-

matically on or off depending on the

level of the ambient light.

NOTE

. If the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights do

not turn on when it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the “

”

position. If this happens, have your

vehicle inspected by your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

. The light sensitivity of the auto on/off

headlights can be changed by oper-

ating the center information display.

For details, refer to the following

sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231 (11.6-inch display models)

Also, the setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

239

(242,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights,

rear side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate lights are on.

Auto-on/off wiper-linked head-

lights

s03ah0106

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will

automatically turn on when the wind-

shield wipers operate several times. The

headlights will automatically turn off ap-

proximately 1 minute after the wiper

stops.

The ON/OFF setting of this function can

be changed by operating the center

information display. Refer to the following

sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

Also, the setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

Welcome lighting function

s03ah0103

The welcome lighting function turns on

the low beam headlight for smooth

approaching to or exiting from the vehicle

at night or in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning off

the light switch, the welcome lighting

function may not operate (for Canada

models).

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors by using the remote keyless

entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds*

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of

the following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”).

The low beam headlights will turn off

under any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by

the welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the

door is opened and closed.*

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking pro-

cedure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which

the low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can

change the setting by operating the center

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

240

(243,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

information display. For details, refer to the

following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

Battery drainage reduction

function

s03ah0107

When the headlights are illuminated

under the following conditions, the battery

drainage reduction function will be active.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”).

When the battery drainage reduction

function is active, the following system

operations help reduce the risk of battery

discharge.

. The headlights turn off automatically

after 10 minutes.

. When you open or close the door or

operate the headlight control switch,

the headlights will turn off automati-

cally 10 minutes later.

NOTE

. When you leave the vehicle, put the

light control switch in the “OFF” posi-

tion to prevent battery discharge.

. When you open or close the door or

operate the headlight control switch

after the headlights turn off automati-

cally, the headlights will turn on again.

Sensor for the auto on/off

headlights

s03ah0101

S_307957-W

Solar sensor and humidity sensor (if

equipped)

Solar sensor

The location of the sensor is shown in the

illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect the

level of the ambient light correctly and

the auto on/off headlights may not

operate properly.

HIGH/LOW BEAM CHANGE

(Dimmer)

s03ah02

S_307638-MW

While the light control switch is in the “ ”

or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the

headlights will turn on.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

241

(244,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Pushing the lever forward and releasing it

will activate the high beam. Pulling the

lever rearward and releasing it will switch

the headlights to low beam.

When the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, pushing the lever for-

ward turns the High Beam Assist is on.

Refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P242.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

HEADLIGHT FLASHER

s03ah03

S_307639-MW

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the off

position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

HIGH BEAM ASSIST FUNCTION

s03ah07

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to

or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is

dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to low

beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle

is bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncom-

ing vehicle.

. When the EyeSight system is mal-

functioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

. Do not overestimate the capacity of

the high beam assist function. The

driver always has the responsibility to

understand the surrounding situation,

to drive safely, and to change the

headlight mode manually if necessary.

. The high beam assist function utilizes

the stereo camera installed at the

position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

. The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “operational”.

This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

242

(245,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

How to use the high beam assist

function

s03ah0701

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following condi-

tions are met.

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam

headlights are on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed for-

ward.

S_307640-W

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped,

the headlight will be fixed at low beam.

How to temporarily lower the

sensitivity of the high beam

assist function

s03ah0704

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by using the

following operations.

1. After turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control

switch to the “AUTO” position and

push the signal lever forward (high

beam position).

2. After the high beam assist indicator on

the combination meter will illuminate,

turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15

seconds, press the “

/ ” (following

distance setting) switch more than 10

times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator “

” on the combination

meter display (color LCD) will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function cannot be lowered in the

following conditions.

– Cruise control indicator is illumi-

nated.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function returns to normal level the

next time the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and the

engine is restarted.

How to change the headlight

mode manually

s03ah0702

Change to the low beam:

. Set the light control switch to “

”.

. Pull the lever while the high beam is

turning on and release it.

Change to the high beam:

Push the lever forward and release it.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

will turn off and the high beam indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the headlight

mode to the high beam, if you turn on

the high beam assist function, push

the lever forward and release it.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

the light control switch to the “

”

position, the parking lights, front side

marker lights, rear side marker lights,

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

243

(246,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

tail lights and license plate lights will

turn on.

Tips for the high beam assist

system

s03ah0703

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the condition surrounding the

vehicle based on the brightness of

illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc.

Therefore, the headlight mode may

switch in some situations that do not

match to the driver’s sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination

may not be detected correctly and the

high beam assist function may not

work properly. As a result, the glare of

the high beam may disturb the on-

coming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also,

the low beam mode may continue

although there are no oncoming ve-

hicles and vehicles ahead. In the such

cases, change the headlight mode

manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty

or fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is driven without its

headlights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if

the light beams are not aimed

correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven sur-

faces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, re-

flects light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehi-

cle are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or

is being towed.

– When the stereo camera is de-

formed or the stereo camera

lenses are dirty.

– Immediately after the engine has

started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically

changed from the high beam to the

low beam.

– When your vehicle passes an

oncoming vehicle suddenly in a

blind curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead comes in and out of

view because of continuous

curves, median strips, roadside

trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light

of the front fog lights of an oncoming

vehicle, the headlight mode may

change from the high beam to the low

beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the

low beam mode may continue, when

affected by a street light, traffic signal,

illumination of an advertisement

board, or a reflective object such as a

road sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

244

(247,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– Color or brightness of the head-

lights of an oncoming vehicle or the

tail lights of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the

vehicle ahead are covered with

mud, snow, etc.

– Movement and direction of an

oncoming vehicle or a vehicle

ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a

vehicle ahead illuminate on only

one side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT

SYSTEM

s03ah04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the “

”

position to illuminate the headlights

and tail lights. This will improve visibi-

lity and allow other drivers to see your

vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,

“

” or “OFF”.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “

”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate lights are also illuminated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

245

(248,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-14. STEERING RESPON-

SIVE HEADLIGHT (SRH)

s03bl

S_307918-MW

The target area of illumination when

SRH is activated

The target area of illumination when

SRH is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically

moves the headlight beam to the left or

right in accordance with the steering

angle and vehicle speed. This function

helps to improve the visibility at night by

illuminating the road ahead at corners

and intersections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off.

The settings can be changed by using the

center information display. Refer to the

following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

S_307919-W

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light

The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) turns off when SRH is

turned on.

The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) illuminates when

SRH is turned off.

S_307920-W

Steering Responsive Headlight warn-

ing light

If SRH is malfunctioning, the Steering

Responsive Headlight warning light on

the combination meter display (color

LCD) illuminates and a message appears

on the warning screen when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. It indicates

that SRH has been deactivated. Contact

a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

246

(249,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. The SRH function operative/non-op-

erative status is kept when the engine

is turned off, even if the engine is

restarted.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight OFF indicator light

will illuminate and turn off after several

seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle is

traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or

more.

3-15. HEADLIGHT BEAM LE-

VELER

s03at

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming

vehicle may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the head-

lights may become misaligned, and

the headlight beam leveler will not

reset them to the proper angle. This

may occur after transporting your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the

vehicle is parked and restarted on

different angles. In such cases, have

the headlight alignment checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If you are driving with the headlights set to

high beam and the following conditions

are met, the headlight beam leveler will

be aimed slightly upwards so that the light

shines further ahead of your vehicle.

. The SRH function is ON.

. The high beam setting of the head-

lights is ON.

. The vehicle speed exceeds approxi-

mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

When these operating conditions are no

longer met, this function is canceled and

the headlight beam leveler will return to

the original position.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

247

(250,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-16. FRONT FOG LIGHT

SWITCH (If Equipped)

s03ba

S_307921-W

Headlight switch

Fog light switch

To turn on the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch to the “

”

position while the headlights are in either

of the following conditions.

. The headlight switch is in the “

”

position with the low beam mode

selected.

. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights

turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch back down to the

“OFF” position.

S_307645-W

The front fog light indicator light located

on the combination meter will illuminate

when the front fog lights are on.

3-17. TURN SIGNAL LEVER

s03ai

S_307922-MW

Right turn

Lane change right signal

Lane change left signal

Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,

return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral posi-

tion when you release it.

ONE-TOUCH LANE CHANGER

s03ai01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational setting

of the one-touch lane changer can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

The setting can also be changed by

operating the center information display.

Refer to the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

248

(251,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-18. WIPER AND WASHER

s03am

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the windshield

is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze

on the windshield, blocking your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid tank

is empty. This may cause over-

heating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry. This may scratch

the glass, damage the blade rub-

bers and might cause the wiper

motor to fail. Before operating the

wiper on a dry windshield, always

use the windshield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blade rubbers frozen to the

window glass could cause not only

the blade rubbers to be damaged

but also might cause the wiper

motor to fail. If the blade rubbers

are frozen to the window glass, be

sure to operate the defroster or

windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defogger

before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during operation

because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to fail

even if the wiper switch is turned

off. If this occurs, promptly stop the

vehicle in a safe location, turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and clean the

window glass to allow proper wiper

operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield Washer Fluid”

�P514.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wiper

blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as paint

thinner or benzine. This will cause

deterioration of the wiper blades.

. When the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position, do not touch the

windshield near the rain sensor

and do not place a wet cloth on the

windshield near the rain sensor.

Doing so may result in unexpected

wiper operation and cause injury.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates con-

tinuously under an unusually heavy

load, the circuit breaker may trip to

stop the motor temporarily. If this

happens, park your vehicle in a safe

location, turn off the wiper switch, and

wait for approximately 10 minutes.

The circuit breaker will reset itself, and

the wipers will again operate normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and window

glass periodically with a washer solu-

tion to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

249

(252,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove the streaks after op-

erating the windshield washer or if the

wiper operation is jerky, clean the

outer surface of the windshield and

rear window using a sponge or soft

cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-

abrasive cleaner. Do not, however,

use detergent to clean the blade

rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft

cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild

abrasive cleaner) when you clean the

blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber

of the blade strongly, the black coating

component will peel off, which will

cause the wiper to judder. Also, after

wiping it off, check that the rubber has

not come loose. After cleaning the

window glass and wiper blade rub-

bers, be sure to rinse them with clean

water. Rinse the window until the

water does not form beads on the

glass. This indicates that the glass is

clean.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades (or blade

rubbers) with new ones. For replace-

ment instructions, refer to “Replace-

ment of Wiper Blades” �P516.

. When the wiper switch is turned to the

“AUTO” position while the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position, the

wipers will operate once. This indi-

cates that the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position.

. When the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the following situa-

tions may occur.

– The wipers may operate if the rain

sensor or the windshield is vibrated

or objects such as insects, dirt,

mud, etc. are covering them. Turn

off the wiper unless it is raining or

snowing.

– The wipers do not operate if the

rain sensor does not detect rain or

snow. If necessary, push the wiper

control lever down to the low speed

position or high speed position.

– The wipers may not operate prop-

erly if the rain sensor does not

detect the amount of raindrops

because a water-repellent coating,

dirt, or ice is on the upper half of the

windshield.

– The rain sensor may be malfunc-

tioning if the wiper intermittent

operation does not vary depending

on the amount of rainfall. If neces-

sary, turn the wiper switch to any

position except the “AUTO” posi-

tion. We recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer and

have the system inspected as soon

as possible.

– The wipers stop operation if the

ambient temperature decreases to

5°F (−15°C) or lower. The wipers

resume operation when the ambi-

ent temperature increases to 14°F

(−10°C) or higher. If you need to

operate the wipers under 5°F

(−15°C), push the wiper control

lever down to the low speed posi-

tion or high speed position.

– The wipers may not operate if the

temperature around the rain sen-

sor is more than 176°F (80°C)

because the system cannot detect

the amount of raindrops under

these temperatures.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

250

(253,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCHES

s03am01

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Windshield wipers

s03am0101

S_307701-W

: Mist (for a single wipe)

OFF : Off

/AUTO : Intermittent/Automatic operation

: Low speed

High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

NOTE

. The automatic adjusting mode of the

wiper timing can be changed from the

rain-sensing mode to the vehicle

speed interlocking mode. The setting

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

. While the intermittent wiper is in

operation, if the vehicle is started, the

wiper will operate once. The opera-

tional/non-operational setting of this

function can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. For details, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

. If the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the wipers do not operate

when it rains, or the wiper switch is in

the “Low speed” position and the

wipers do not operate, turn the wiper

switch to the “High speed” position. In

this case, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Wiper intermittent time control

(models without automatic rain

sensing windshield wipers)

s03am0103

S_307649-W

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the

operating interval of the wiper. The

operating interval can be adjusted in

several steps from the shortest interval to

the longest.

Automatic operation (models

with automatic rain sensing

windshield wipers)

s03am0107

With the wiper switch in the “AUTO”

position, the wipers operate automatically

when the rain sensor detects falling rain.

The wiper timing is automatically adjusted

depending on the amount of rain.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

251

(254,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_307794-W

The rain sensor is on the windshield

glass.

S_307795-W

Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the

rain sensor for wiper control. Turn the dial

downward to increase the sensitivity.

Turn the dial upward to decrease the

sensitivity.

NOTE

When the wiper control lever is in the

“AUTO” position, if you turn the dial

downward, the wipers will operate once to

inform you that the sensor sensitivity has

been increased.

Windshield washer

s03am0104

S_307650-W

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

S_307651-W

The windshield washer fluid warning light

appears when the washer fluid level in the

tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the

warning light appears, refill the tank with

fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to

“Windshield Washer Fluid” �P514.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

s03am02

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

252

(255,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_307652-W

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

OFF: Off

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

Rear wiper

s03am0201

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob

switch upward.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob

switch to the “OFF” position.

With the switch turned to the “

”

position, the rear wiper will operate

intermittently at intervals corresponding

to the vehicle speed. In this position,

when you move the select lever to the “R”

position, the rear wiper will switch to

continuous operation. When you move

the select lever from the “R” (reverse)

position to another position, the rear

wiper will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the

“OFF” position, if the front windshield

wiper is operating continuously, the rear

wiper will operate intermittently when you

move the select lever to the “R” (reverse)

position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the

reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is

operational.

This setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

Washer

s03am0202

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob switch

upward to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch

downward to the “

” position. The

washer fluid sprays and the wiper oper-

ates until you release the knob.

The rear view camera washer also

operates while the rear window washer is

operating.

NOTE

S_307653-W

The windshield washer fluid warning light

appears when the washer fluid level in the

tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the

warning light appears, refill the tank with

fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to

“Windshield Washer Fluid” �P514.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

253

(256,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-19. DEFOGGER AND DEI-

CER

s03bi

S_307923-W

Rear window defogger

Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is

activated only when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

S_307924-W

Defogger button

To activate the defogger and deicer

system, press the defogger button. The

rear window defogger, outside mirror

defogger and windshield wiper deicer are

activated simultaneously. The indicator

light on the defogger button illuminates

while the defogger and deicer system is

activated.

To turn them off, press the defogger

button again. They also turn off when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and

outside mirrors have been cleared and

the windshield wiper blade rubbers have

been deiced completely before that time,

press the defogger button to turn them off.

If defrosting, defogging or deicing is not

complete, you have to press the defogger

button to turn them on again.

It is possible to set the defogger and

deicer system for the continuous opera-

tion mode by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to the

following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than ne-

cessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

254

(257,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with snow,

remove the snow so that the wind-

shield wiper deicer works effectively.

. While the defogger and deicer system

is in the continuous operation mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper dei-

cer system automatically stops

operating. However, the rear win-

dow defogger system and outside

mirror defogger system maintain

continuous operation in this condi-

tion.

– If the vehicle battery voltage drops

below the permissible level, con-

tinuous operation of the defogger

system and deicer system is can-

celed and the system stops oper-

ating.

3-20. MIRRORS

s03ap

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

INSIDE MIRROR (without Auto-

Dimming Function) (If

Equipped)

s03ap08

S_307925-W

Normal position

Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-

glare position.

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR/

COMPASS (If Equipped)

s03ap12

S_307926-W

Compass

Switch

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

255

(258,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

During nighttime driving, the auto-dim-

ming feature senses distracting glare

from vehicle headlights behind you and

automatically dims to eliminate the glare

and preserve your vision.

To Operate the Auto-Dimming

Feature

s03ap1201

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dim-

ming feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

each ignition cycle.

To Operate the Compass Fea-

ture

s03ap1202

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 3 seconds or until the

display turns on/off. The compass

feature will default to on with each

ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

Compass calibration zones

S_307659-W

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a

zone number appears in the dis-

play.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location

zone number appears. After you

stop pressing the switch, your

new zone number will be saved.

Within a few seconds, the display

will show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears in-

accurate, recalibrate the compass.

Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 9 seconds or until a “C”

appears in the display. Once a “C”

appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR/

COMPASS WITH HOMELINK

(If

Equipped)

s03ap07

S_307927-W

Compass

HomeLink

buttons

Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dim-

ming feature senses distracting glare

from vehicle headlights behind you and

automatically dims to eliminate the glare

and help preserve your vision.

To Operate the Auto-Dimming

Feature

s03ap0705

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dim-

ming feature is enabled when the switch’s

green LED indicator is on. The auto-

dimming feature will default to on with

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

256

(259,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

each ignition cycle.

To Operate the Compass Fea-

ture (if equipped)

s03ap0706

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 3 seconds or until the

display turns on/off. The compass

feature will default to on with each

ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive

the vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

Compass calibration zones (U.S.)

S_307661-W

Compass calibration zones (South Amer-

ica)

S_307662-W

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a

zone number appears in the dis-

play.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location

zone number appears. After you

stop pressing the switch, your

new zone number will be saved.

Within a few seconds, the display

will show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears in-

accurate, recalibrate the compass.

Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 9 seconds or until a “C”

appears in the display. Once a “C”

appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

HomeLink

Wireless Control

System

s03ap0704

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up

to three hand-held radio frequency re-

motes used to activate devices such as

gate operators, garage door openers,

entry door locks, security systems, even

home lighting. The below steps are

generic programming instructions; for

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink

website. Additional information and pro-

gramming videos can be found at www.

HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/

HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside

of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink

with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features as

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

257

(260,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect an

object signaling the door to stop

and reverse does not meet current

U.S. federal safety standards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held

remote (garage door opener re-

mote) of the device for quicker and

more accurate training.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

or “ACC” position before program-

ming and/or operating HomeLink

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as for

future HomeLink

programming.

. For security reasons, when trans-

ferring ownership of your vehicle, it

is recommended to delete the

programmed HomeLink

buttons.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink

but-

tons” �P261.

Programming a New

HomeLink

button

s03ap0707

1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

The HomeLink

indicator light will

flash orange slowly (if not, refer to

“Erasing HomeLink

buttons”

�P261).

S_307928-W

Indicator Light

HomeLink

buttons

2. Position the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches

(2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

S_307929-W

Garage door opener remote

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train better

at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30

cm). Keep this in mind if you have

difficulty with the programming process.

3. While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the

hand-held remote button. Continue

pressing the hand-held remote button

until the HomeLink

indicator light

changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held re-

mote button.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

258

(261,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_307665-W

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this “Programming a New HomeLink

button” step 3 with procedures noted in

the “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-

ming” section. Refer to “Gate Operator/

Canadian Programming” �P260.

4. Press the HomeLink

button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

S_307930-W

Indicator Light

. If the indicator light remains con-

stant green, your device should

operate when the HomeLink

but-

ton is pressed. At this point, if your

device operates, programming is

complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the

HomeLink

button up to three times

to complete the programming pro-

cess. At this point if your device

operates, programming is com-

plete. If the device does not oper-

ate, continue with the next step of

the programming instructions.

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc.) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.

This can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to

the motor-head unit (see the device’s

manual to identify this button). The

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer.

S_307931-W

“Learn” button

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

259

(262,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the

HomeLink

button up to three times. At

this point programming is complete

and your device should operate when

the HomeLink

button is pressed and

released.

S_307668-W

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communica-

tion” �P261.

S_307932-W

Status Indicators

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

For Genie and Sommer garage door

openers please go directly to the

HomeLink

website.

Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming

s03ap0708

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of trans-

mission, which may not be long enough

for HomeLink

to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished trans-

mitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator

or garage door opener by using the

programming procedures, replace “Pro-

gramming a New HomeLink

button” step

3 with the following:

While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote

every two seconds until the HomeLink

indicator light changes from orange to

green. You may now release the hand-

held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or

gate operator, it is advised to unplug the

device during the “cycling” process to

prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” step 4 to complete.

Using HomeLink

s03ap0709

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink

button. Activa-

tion will now occur for the trained device

(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,

security system, entry door lock, home/

office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held remote of the device may also

be used at any time.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

260

(263,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

s03ap0710

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink

is now ready to be pro-

grammed at any time beginning with

“Programming a New HomeLink

button”

- step 1.

Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink

button

s03ap0711

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink

button can be released at

this point. Proceed with “Programming

a New HomeLink

button” - step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it

will revert to the previously stored

programming.

Garage Door Two-Way Com-

munication

s03ap0712

HomeLink

has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink

can receive and display

“closing” or “opening” status messages

from compatible garage door opener

systems. At any time, HomeLink

can

also recall and display the last recorded

status communicated by the garage door

opener to indicate your garage door being

“closed” or “opened”.

HomeLink

has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles

such as houses or trees. You may have to

slow your vehicle speed to successfully

receive the garage door opener commu-

nication.

Programming Two-Way Com-

munication

s03ap0713

S_307933-W

Status Indicators

Within 5 seconds after programming a

new HomeLink

button, both of Home-

Link’s garage door status indicators will

flash rapidly green indicating that the

garage door two-way communication has

been enabled. If your garage door status

indicators flashed, two-way communica-

tion programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink

information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

261

(264,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Using Two-Way Communica-

tion

s03ap0714

S_307934-W

Status Indicator

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink

by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink

buttons 1

and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink

will

display the last recorded status for 3

seconds.

If two-way communication programming

is successful, HomeLink

will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators (see below).

S_307935-W

Garage Door Opener CLOSING

(Blinking Orange)

Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

Garage Door Opener OPENING

(Blinking Orange)

Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

Certification

s03ap0715

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

ZOM0996

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

262

(265,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Canada-spec. models

ZOM0996

ZOM0997

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Cor-

poration.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

263

(266,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other de-

vice. Make sure that people and

objects are out of the way of the

garage door or other device to

prevent potential harm or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by applicable safety stan-

dards. A garage door opener which

cannot detect an object, signaling

the door to stop and reverse, does

not meet these safety standards.

Using a garage door opener with-

out these features increases risk of

serious injury or death. For more

information, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

SMART REARVIEW MIRROR (If

Equipped)

s03ap11

Safety precautions

s03ap1101

WARNING

. Never rely exclusively on the Smart

Rearview Mirror. The Smart Rear-

view Mirror has blind spots that

must be checked prior to operating

the vehicle. Please exercise cau-

tion when using this system.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

main unit, camera or wiring of the

Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is a

strange odor or smoke, stop using

it immediately and we recommend

that you consult a SUBARU dealer.

. Never operate the Smart Rearview

Mirror while driving. Doing so could

result in an accident that causes

serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. Do not put the main unit, camera or

wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror

close to fire. Doing so could result

in a malfunction and fire.

. When the Smart Rearview Mirror

malfunctions, change to the mirror

mode immediately and we recom-

mend that you consult a SUBARU

dealer.

. Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror

for extended period of time may

result in car sickness.

. The display could become hard to

see because of lights (e.g. sunlight

or the headlights of approaching

vehicles) from outside of the vehi-

cle. In this case, change to the

mirror mode if necessary.

NOTE

When the moonroof is opened (if

equipped):

If the sunlight is too bright to see the

display of the Smart Rearview Mirror,

close the moonroof (sunshade), or select

the mirror mode.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

264

(267,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Smart Rearview Mirror

switches

s03ap1102

S_307936-W

Mode lever

Left button

Center button

Right button

How to use the Smart Rearview

Mirror

s03ap1103

CAUTION

Adjust the rearview mirror before

driving.

1) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror

to the mirror mode.

2) Sit with the correct posture in the

driver’s seat and adjust the mirror

position to see behind.

3) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror

to the display mode.

If you start driving without adjusting

the mirror, light may reflect on the

mirror while selecting the display

mode and it may make it hard to see

the screen.

To change the mode:

S_307937-W

To select the display mode, first adjust

the rearview mirror, then pull the mode

lever towards you.

To select the mirror mode, push the

mode lever away from you.

Select the display mode to show the

image from the camera that is installed on

the rear gate.

Select the mirror mode to use as a normal

mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the

image from the camera is not shown on

the mirror.

NOTE

. It is not possible to use the Smart

Rearview Mirror in the display mode

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position.

. When using the display mode, parts of

the vehicle interior may reflect light on

the display. Adjust the angle of the

Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid un-

wanted reflection.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

265

(268,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

To adjust the display:

S_307938-W

Left button

Center button

Right button

Press any of the left, center or right

buttons to display the main menu.

NOTE

. The main menu cannot be displayed

on the display while the select lever is

in a position other than the “P” posi-

tion.

. If you do not press the adjustment

buttons that are at the bottom of the

Smart Rearview Mirror for 5 seconds,

the adjustment menu will disappear.

Brightness adjustment:

S_307939-W

Setting button: Press the setting button

to set the brightness.

Press this button to decrease the

brightness.

Press this button to increase the

brightness.

After pressing the setting button, the

mode will change to the up/down adjust-

ment mode.

Up/down adjustment:

S_307940-W

Setting button: Press the setting button

to set the angle.

Press this button to lower the angle.

Press this button to raise the angle.

After pressing the setting button, the

mode will change to the left/right adjust-

ment mode.

Left/right adjustment:

S_307941-W

Setting button: Press the setting button

to set the angle.

Press this button to turn the angle left.

Press this button to turn the angle right.

After pressing the setting button, the

mode will change to the rotation adjust-

ment mode.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

266

(269,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Rotation adjustment:

S_307942-W

Setting button: Press the setting button

to set the angle.

Press this button to turn the angle

counterclockwise.

Press this button to turn the angle

clockwise.

After you press the setting button, the

mode will return to the brightness adjust-

ment mode.

Dimming setting:

The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dim-

ming mirror mode. When the mirror mode

is selected with the ignition switch in the

“ON” position, auto dimming will activate.

This mode decreases glare automatically

depending on the brightness level from

behind.

S_307938-W

Left button

Center button

Right button

When selecting the mirror mode, press

any of the buttons to display the auto

dimming menu. Press the center or right

buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode

ON/OFF.

Dimming mirror mode ON indicator

S_307712-W

Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator

S_307713-W

When turning the dimming mirror mode

ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/

OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 sec-

onds.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, auto dim-

ming will not activate.

. When the display mode is selected,

auto dimming will not activate.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

267

(270,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When the display mode mal-

functions

s03ap1106

S_307714-W

When there is a vehicle communication

error, the warning indicators will appear

as shown in the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear,

operate the mode lever to select the

mirror mode. In such a case, we recom-

mend that you consult your SUBARU

dealer for repair.

If the mode does not change to the mirror

mode even when operating the mode

lever, the mode lever may have malfunc-

tioned. In such a case, press and hold one

of the left, center, or right buttons for 10

seconds. Then the mode will change to

the mirror mode.

S_307716-W

When there is a camera calibration error,

the warning indicators will appear as

shown in the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear,

operate the mode lever to select the

mirror mode. In such a case, we recom-

mend that you consult your SUBARU

dealer for repair.

Maintenance

s03ap1104

S_307943-W

Camera

. Make sure to clean the Smart Rear-

view Mirror and the area around the

camera regularly. If these parts are not

clean, the screen cannot be seen

clearly.

. Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror

and the area around the camera by

using a dry soft cloth. If the foreign

matter cannot be removed, first wipe

the area off using a wet soft cloth, and

then wipe using a dry cloth.

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

for cleaning. Doing so could result in

discoloration, deterioration, or mal-

function.

. Make sure to clean the rear camera

lens regularly. When you clean the

rear camera lens, first soak a soft cloth

with diluted mild detergent to wipe it

off, and wipe using a dry cloth.

. When installing a roof box or a similar

accessory, do not block the area in

front of the camera lens to avoid

interfering with the camera image on

the mirror.

. When the Smart Rearview Mirror’s

visibility is poor because there is dirt or

other foreign material adhering to the

camera, switch to the original rearview

mirror.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

268

(271,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Tips

s03ap1105

. Do not use the display mode for a long

time while the engine is not running.

Doing so could result in the battery

discharge.

. Do not install radio antennas around

the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio

waves may disturb the Smart Rear-

view Mirror screen.

. Observe the following instructions.

Not doing so could result in malfunc-

tion or the main mirror unit falling off.

– Do not push the button too strongly

or move the lever too forcibly.

– Do not turn the main mirror unit

more than 90 degrees.

– Do not impact the main mirror unit.

– Do not impact the camera or

antenna.

. If the screen is hard to see because of

light, select the mirror mode.

. If LED lights or scattered reflections

are caught in the camera, the screen

may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. If something moves rapidly near the

camera, the display may not be able to

catch the item. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. If the display mode is used, the view of

the rear will be different from the

normal use of the inner mirror or the

mirror mode. Do not rely solely on the

Smart Rearview Mirror; check the rear

visually if necessary. Pay attention to

traffic conditions for safe driving.

. Adjust the brightness of the screen

appropriately. If the screen is too

bright, the driver’s eyes may get tired

while driving.

. The Smart Rearview Mirror some-

times becomes hot. However, this is

not a malfunction.

. In the following cases, the color may

not be clear. However, this is not a

malfunction.

– The shown items are a very far

distance away.

– The environmental conditions are

very dark.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

s03ap03

Convex mirror (passenger side)

s03ap0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance of

vehicles behind you when changing

lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance

backwards) to determine the actual

size and distance of objects that you

view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors before

driving.

Remote control mirror switch

s03ap0302

S_307944-MW

Select side to adjust

Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

– CONTINUED –

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

269

(272,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left

mirror, “R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direc-

tion you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional op-

eration.

NOTE

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

For models with memory function:

. The outside mirror can be adjusted for

approximately 45 seconds after the

following conditions are met.

– The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position.

– The door is unlocked using the

access key fob.

. The outside mirror angle can be

registered with button “1”, “2” or each

of the key fobs. For details, refer to

“Driver’s Seat Memory Function”

�P40.

. The outside mirror angle can also be

retrieved with the Driver Monitoring

System user information. To do so,

perform user registration in the Driver

Monitoring System settings. Refer to

“Using the Driver Monitoring System”

�P417.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if

equipped)

s03ap0306

When backing the vehicle up, the right

and/or left outside mirrors will turn down-

ward automatically to provide better rear

visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Move the select lever to the R (Re-

verse) position.

3. The outside mirror angle moves

downward.

The outside mirror angle will return to its

original position when the following con-

dition are met.

. Approximately 9 seconds after the

select lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position.

. The vehicle is running.

NOTE

. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can

be registered with button “1”, “2” or

each of the key fobs. For details, refer

to “Driver’s Seat Memory Function”

�P40.

. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can

also be retrieved with the Driver

Monitoring System user information.

To do so, perform user registration in

the Driver Monitoring System settings.

Refer to “Using the Driver Monitoring

System” �P417.

. The operational/non-operational

setting can be changed by operating

the center information display. Refer

to “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231.

. The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as the front pas-

senger’s side mirror. The setting of

driver’s side mirror operation can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal during the

reverse tilt-down mirror angle adjust-

ment.

To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror

angle, adjust the outside mirror using the

remote control mirror switch while the

reverse tilt-down operates. For details

about how to adjust the outside mirror

angle, refer to “Remote control mirror

switch” �P269.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

270

(273,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Memory function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror

can be registered. Register the position

with button “1”, “2” or each of the access

key fobs and retrieve the position.

For details about registration or retrieval

of a position, refer to “Driver’s Seat

Memory Function” �P40.

NOTE

If the seat is moved forward or backward

1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the reverse tilt-

down will move to the factory default

position or the last position hold.

Hold last position function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror

can be set to the latest adjusted angle.

The hold last position function operates

when the following condition are met.

. The memory function is not used.

. The seat is moved forward or back-

ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more.

NOTE

. The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “non-opera-

tional”. This setting can be changed to

“operational” at SUBARU dealers. For

more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

. If the hold last position function setting

is “non-operation”, the reverse tilt-

down will move to the factory default

position.

3-21. TILT/TELESCOPIC

STEERING WHEEL

s03bf

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of vehicle

control and result in personal

injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in perso-

nal injury.

S_307945-W

Tilt adjustment

Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to

“Front Seats” �P37.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and

down, and forward and backward.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

271

(274,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-22. HEATED STEERING

WHEEL SYSTEM (If

Equipped)

s03bm

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

S_307946-W

Heated Steering Wheel switch

Indicator light

Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering

wheel will be warmed and the indicator

light on the switch will illuminate. To turn

off the Heated Steering Wheel system,

pull the switch again. Then the indicator

light will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the engine running.

Otherwise, the battery voltage may

drop below the permissible level

and it may not be possible to start

the engine.

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer slight

burns even at low temperatures if

they use the Heated Steering

Wheel for a long period of time.

When using the Heated Steering

Wheel, always be sure to warn the

persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

. Do not spill liquid on the steering

wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off

immediately and dry it before using

the Heated Steering Wheel sys-

tem.

NOTE

. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately above

104°F (40°C) when the switch is

turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. Then, the indicator

light will continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 30 minutes after the system

has been turned on.

. The temperature of the Heated

Steering Wheel system cannot be

adjusted.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

272

(275,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3-23. HORN

s03ar

S_307679-W

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

273

(276,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(277,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s04
4-1. Ventilator Control........................................................................276
Center Ventilators ....................................................................... 276
Side Ventilators........................................................................... 276
Rear Ventilators (If Equipped)...................................................... 276
4-2. Climate Control Panel.................................................................277
Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models ...................................................... 278
11.6-Inch Display Models............................................................. 280
4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation .......................................282
Sensors ...................................................................................... 283
4-4. Manual Climate Control..............................................................284
Airflow Mode Selection ............................................................... 284
Dynamic Ventilation .................................................................... 285
Temperature Control ................................................................... 286
Fan Speed Control ...................................................................... 287
Air Conditioner Control ............................................................... 287
Air Inlet Selection ....................................................................... 287
To Turn Off the Climate Control System....................................... 288
4-5. Defrosting ....................................................................................288
4-6. Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner ........................289
Cleaning Ventilator Grille............................................................. 289
Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight ......................... 289
Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant Circuit.................... 289
Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer Season ......... 289
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and Low
Temperature Weather Condition ................................................ 289
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily
Loaded ..................................................................................... 289
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ............................... 290
4-7. Air Filtration System...................................................................290
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................................................... 290
CLIMATE CONTROL
4

(278,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4-1. VENTILATOR CONTROL

s04af

CENTER VENTILATORS

s04af01

S_403808-W

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab

all the way down.

SIDE VENTILATORS

s04af02

S_403882-W

Open

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab.

REAR VENTILATORS (If

Equipped)

s04af04

S_403883-W

Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

CLIMATE CONTROL

276

(279,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4-2. CLIMATE CONTROL PA-

NEL

s04ag

WARNING

. The cooling function operates only

when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should not be left alone either.

On hot, sunny days, temperatures

in a closed vehicle could quickly

become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

– CONTINUED –

CLIMATE CONTROL

277

(280,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

DUAL 7.0-INCH DISPLAY MODELS

s04ag11

S_403884-W

Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P288.)

Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger

and Deicer” �P254.)

Climate control screen (lower display)

Driver’s side temperature control but-

ton (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P286.)

Passenger’s side temperature control

button (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P286.)

CLIMATE CONTROL

278

(281,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Climate control screen

s04ag1101

S_403885-W

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

Climate control ON/OFF icon

SYNC mode indicator

Set temperature indicator (driver’s

side)

Climate control mode indicator

Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

Dynamic Ventilation ON/OFF icon

Customizable icon*

Fan speed control

SYNC icon

Climate control mode select icon

Airflow mode selection screen

Seat heater*

(if equipped)

*1: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “Settings icon

(General settings)” �P210.

*2: For details, refer to “Front Seat Heater”

�P52.

NOTE

The layout and the available functions for

operating the climate control screen may

vary depending on the number of items

shown on the center information display.

– CONTINUED –

CLIMATE CONTROL

279

(282,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11.6-INCH DISPLAY MODELS

s04ag12

S_403886-W

Climate control screen

Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger

and Deicer” �P254.)

Passenger’s side temperature control

button (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P286.)

Driver’s side temperature control but-

ton (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P286.)

Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P288.)

CLIMATE CONTROL

280

(283,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Climate control screen

s04ag1201

S_403887-W

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

Climate control ON/OFF icon

SYNC mode indicator

Climate control mode indicator

Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

Dynamic Ventilation ON/ OFF icon

Customizable icon*

Fan speed control

Climate control mode select icon

Temperature control screen (passen-

ger’s side)

SYNC icon

Temperature control bar

Airflow mode selection screen

Seat heater and front seat ventilation*

(if equipped)

Temperature control screen (driver’s

side)

*1: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “Settings icon

(General settings)” �P227.

*2: For details, refer to “Seat Heater and Front

Seat Ventilation” �P52.

NOTE

The layout and the available functions for

operating the climate control screen may

vary depending on the number of items

shown on the center information display.

CLIMATE CONTROL

281

(284,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4-3. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL OPERATION

s04ai

S_403888-W

S_403889-W

Air inlet selection

Air conditioner

Airflow mode

Fan speed

When the auto mode is selected, the

following functions are automatically

controlled.

. Airflow mode

. Air inlet selection

. Air conditioner operation

. Fan speed

To activate this mode, perform the

following.

“AUTO” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

1. Touch “AUTO”.

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer

to “Temperature Control” �P286.

“AUTO” is not displayed on the cus-

tomizable icon:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch “AUTO”.

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer

to “Temperature Control” �P286.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate control

system when the engine is running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner will automatically

turn on if the temperature is set much

lower than the current outlet air tem-

perature. Even in this case, the “A/C”

indicator light on the climate control

screen illuminates.

. The air conditioner may not operate in

the following cases:

– When the cabin temperature is low

– When the ambient temperature

decreases close to 32°F (0°C)

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. When “AUTO” is displayed, if you

operate the fan speed control or the

airflow mode, press the defroster

button, or turn on MAX A/C mode, the

“AUTO” display will turn off. You can

then manually control the system as

desired using the climate control

screen. To change the system back to

auto mode, touch “AUTO”.

To turn off the climate control system,

touch “ON/OFF”.

At this time, the air inlet selection mode

will differ depending on the auto mode

and manual mode.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

When the ignition switch is changed to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position from

“ON”, the air inlet mode will automatically

CLIMATE CONTROL

282

(285,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

change to the outside air mode regard-

less of whether it is the auto mode or

manual mode.

SENSORS

s04ai03

S_403890-W

Solar sensor and humidity sensor*

Solar sensor*

Interior air temperature sensor*

Interior air temperature sensor and

humidity sensor*

*1: Models with automatic rain sensing wind-

shield wipers

*2: Models without automatic rain sensing

windshield wipers

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tem-

perature correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

CLIMATE CONTROL

283

(286,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4-4. MANUAL CLIMATE

CONTROL

s04aj

AIRFLOW MODE SELECTION

s04aj01

Select the preferred airflow mode by the

following operation.

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation:

S_403891-W

Models with rear ventilators

Instrument panel outlets

Ventilation 2:

S_403892-W

Models with rear ventilators

Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

Bi-level:

S_403893-W

Models with rear ventilators

Instrument panel outlets and the foot

outlets

Heat:

S_403894-W

Models with rear ventilators

Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through

windshield defroster outlets (A small

amount of air flows to the windshield and

both side windows to prevent fogging.)

CLIMATE CONTROL

284

(287,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Heat-def:

S_403895-W

Models with rear ventilators

Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets

and both side outlets of the instrument

panel

DYNAMIC VENTILATION

s04aj11

Dynamic Ventilation is a system that uses

sensors and other technology to judge

that someone is sitting in the front

passenger seat or rear seat and prior-

itizes the climate control for these seats

when they are occupied.

When the push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, the climate

control system automatically selects the

Dynamic Ventilation mode according to

where the vehicle occupants are sitting.

“DRIVER” mode (driver’s seat is only

occupied):

S_403822-W

When the climate control system judges

that the driver is the only vehicle occu-

pant, “DRIVER” is displayed on the

screen and the system directs the airflow

only to the driver. To cancel the airflow

“DRIVER” mode, touch the “

” icon, and

“ALL” will be displayed instead of “DRI-

VER”, and airflow will be directed to all the

seats.

“FRONT” mode (driver’s seat and front

passenger’s seat are occupied):

S_403823-W

When the climate control system judges

that the driver’s and passenger’s seats

are occupied, “FRONT” is displayed on

the screen and the system directs the

airflow to the driver and front passenger.

To cancel the airflow “FRONT” mode,

touch the “

” icon, and “ALL” will be

displayed instead of “FRONT”, and air-

flow will be directed to all the seats.

“ALL” mode (rear seats are occupied

by passengers):

S_403824-W

When the climate control system judges

that there are passengers occupying the

rear seats, “ALL” is displayed on the

screen and the system directs the airflow

to all vehicle occupants. To cancel the

– CONTINUED –

CLIMATE CONTROL

285

(288,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

airflow “ALL” mode, touch the “ ” icon,

and “DRIVER” or “FRONT” will be dis-

played on the screen depending on which

passenger’s seats are occupied, and

airflow will be directed to the seats

depending on the airflow mode.

NOTE

. Depending on the settings of the

climate control system or other factors

affecting the temperature inside the

vehicle, the operation of the Dynamic

Ventilation mode for occupants may

differ from the operation displayed on

the screen.

. The climate control system judges that

the front passenger’s seat is occupied

by detecting such things as the fas-

tening of the seatbelt, opening or

closing of the door, and operation of

the passenger’s side temperature

setting controls.

. If “FRONT” is displayed on the screen

when the front passenger’s door is

opened and then closed and the

climate control system subsequently

judges that the front passenger’s seat

is not occupied, the screen will display

“DRIVER” when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 13 mph (20

km/h).

. The climate control system judges that

there are passengers occupying the

rear seats according to the opening

and closing of the rear doors. How-

ever, touching “

” icon will turn off the

function that judges whether the rear

doors are open or closed. To turn the

function on again, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

for approximately one hour.

. The system may not be able to judge

the presence of passengers accu-

rately, in which case this function may

not operate properly.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

s04aj02

Perform the following operation to regu-

late the temperature of airflow from the air

outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to

the blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen (11.6-inch

display models):

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by

the following operation.

. Touch and move the temperature

control bar.

. Touch “

”/“ ”.

. Touch the preferred temperature in

the temperature control screen.

Max A/C mode

s04aj0208

For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon or

customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to the recircu-

lation mode.

. The airflow mode setting will be set to

the ventilation mode.

To turn off the Max A/C mode and return

to the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”

again.

NOTE

For models with the Driver Monitoring

System, MAX A/C mode will be canceled

if the Driver Monitoring System completes

user recognition again while MAX A/C

mode is in use.

CLIMATE CONTROL

286

(289,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SYNC mode

s04aj0207

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both

the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-

peratures are synchronized using the

driver’s side temperature control button

and temperature control screen.

. If “SYNC” is displayed on the custo-

mizable icon, touch “SYNC” to turn the

SYNC mode on or off.

. If a customizable icon other than

“SYNC” is displayed, touch the climate

control mode indicator. Then touch

“SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode on or

off.

When the SYNC mode is on, the SYNC

mode indicator will be displayed. Touch

“SYNC” again, press the passenger’s

side temperature control button or oper-

ate the passenger’s side temperature

control bar to cancel the SYNC mode.

When the SYNC mode is off, the SYNC

mode indicator will no longer be dis-

played. In this case, temperature control

on the driver’s side and passenger’s side

will be separated. The temperature will be

controlled individually using the driver’s

and passenger’s temperature control

button and the driver’s and passenger’s

temperature control bar.

FAN SPEED CONTROL

s04aj03

Select the preferred fan speed by touch-

ing

or on the climate control

screen.

AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL

s04aj04

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner.

. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air

conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator

illuminates. And A/C icon will be

displayed on the climate control mode

indicator.

. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”

is displayed, touch the climate control

mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon.

When the air conditioner is on, the

“A/C” indicator illuminates. The A/C

icon will be displayed on the climate

control mode indicator.

To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”

again. The indicator light will turn off or it

will be grayed out.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidifying

in cold weather, turn on the air condi-

tioner. However, if the ambient tempera-

ture decreases to approximately 32°F

(0°C), the air conditioner and dehumidifi-

cation system may not work properly.

AIR INLET SELECTION

s04aj05

Select the air inlet by touching the air inlet

selection icon.

Recirculation mode:

Interior air is recirculated inside the

vehicle. This mode is used for the

following cases.

. When driving on a dusty road

. When you want cooling performance

to increase (for example, in particu-

larly hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select

this mode.

is displayed on the customizable

icon:

(1) Touch

is not displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode

indicator.

(2) Touch

on the climate control

mode select icon.

will be displayed on the climate

control mode indicator.

– CONTINUED –

CLIMATE CONTROL

287

(290,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Outside air circulation mode:

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment. This mode is used for the

following cases.

. When the road is no longer dusty

. When the interior has cooled to a

comfortable temperature

Perform the same operation as the

recirculation mode to change the mode.

will be displayed on the climate

control mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recircula-

tion mode may fog up the windows.

Switch to the outside air circulation

mode as soon as the outside dusty

condition clears.

NOTE

When outside air circulation is selected,

the system may automatically adjust the

air inlet setting depending on such factors

as the temperature setting, the tempera-

ture inside the vehicle, or conditions

outside the vehicle.

TO TURN OFF THE CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM

s04aj07

To turn off the climate control system,

touch the climate control ON/OFF icon.

4-5. DEFROSTING

s04ah

S_403825-W

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, perform the

following procedures.

. To select the “

” mode, press the

defroster button.

. To select the “

” mode, touch “ ” on

the airflow mode selection screen.

NOTE

. When the “

” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner operates

automatically regardless of the posi-

tion of the air conditioner icon to

defrost the windshield more quickly.

However, the indicator on the air

conditioner icon may not illuminate. At

the same time, the air inlet selection is

automatically set to the outside air

circulation mode.

. After defrosting the windshield by

pressing the defroster button “

”,

pressing the button again returns the

system to the setting that had been

selected before the defroster was

activated.

CLIMATE CONTROL

288

(291,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4-6. OPERATING TIPS FOR

HEATER AND AIR CONDI-

TIONER

s04ad

CLEANING VENTILATOR

GRILLE

s04ad01

S_403896-W

Front ventilator inlet grille

Condenser

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept

clean because cooling performance is

impaired by any accumulation of insects

and leaves on the condenser.

EFFICIENT COOLING AFTER

PARKING IN DIRECT SUN-

LIGHT

s04ad02

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

LUBRICATION OIL CIRCULA-

TION IN THE REFRIGERANT

CIRCUIT

s04ad03

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

CHECKING AIR CONDITION-

ING SYSTEM BEFORE SUM-

MER SEASON

s04ad04

Check the air conditioner unit for refrig-

erant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air

conditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFY-

ING IN HIGH HUMIDITY AND

LOW TEMPERATURE WEATH-

ER CONDITION

s04ad05

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.)

a small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

AIR CONDITIONER COMPRES-

SOR SHUT-OFF WHEN ENGINE

IS HEAVILY LOADED

s04ad06

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is de-

signed to temporarily shut off during air

conditioner operation whenever the ac-

celerator is fully depressed such as

during rapid acceleration or when driving

on a steep upgrade.

– CONTINUED –

CLIMATE CONTROL

289

(292,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

REFRIGERANT FOR YOUR

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

s04ad07

S_403897-W

Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).

Before adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant, check the air conditioner label

in the location shown in the illustration to

confirm which type of refrigerant is used

in your vehicle.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.

Repairs needed as a result of using the

wrong refrigerant are not covered under

warranty.

4-7. AIR FILTRATION SYS-

TEM

s04ae

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

This schedule should be followed to

maintain the filter’s dust collection ability.

Under extremely dusty conditions, the

filter should be replaced more frequently.

Have your filter checked or replaced by

your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,

use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter.

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condition-

ing, heating and defroster performance if

not properly maintained.

REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER

s04ae01

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

CLIMATE CONTROL

290

(293,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_403828-W

3. Push both sides of the glove box

inward to unlock the stoppers and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

S_403898-W

Stoppers

4. Pull out the glove box horizontally and

remove the hinge portion. When doing

this, be careful not to damage the

hinge.

S_403830-W

5. Pinch both tabs and remove the filter

cover.

S_403831-W

6. Gently tilt down the end of the filter and

slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm). Slowly

pull out the rest of the filter.

7. Replace the cabin air filter with a new

one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must point

UP.

8. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

9. Close the glove box.

NOTE

When removing the cabin air filter, do not

allow any adhering foreign material to fall

into the housing.

CLIMATE CONTROL

291

(294,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(295,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s05

5-1. Antenna .......................................................................................294

Roof Antenna.............................................................................. 294

5-2. Audio Set .....................................................................................294

AUDIO

(296,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

5-1. ANTENNA

s05aa

ROOF ANTENNA

s05aa03

S_502085-W

The satellite radio antenna and tele-

matics antenna (if equipped) are installed

in the center of the roof at the rear.

5-2. AUDIO SET

s05ac

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

AUDIO

294

(297,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(298,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(299,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s06
6-1. Interior Light................................................................................298
Map Lights.................................................................................. 298
Dome Light ................................................................................. 298
Cargo Area Light ........................................................................ 299
Rear Gate Light........................................................................... 299
OFF Delay Timer ......................................................................... 299
6-2. Sun Visors ...................................................................................300
Sun Visor Extension Plate........................................................... 300
Vanity Mirror with Light (If Equipped) .......................................... 301
6-3. Overhead Console ......................................................................302
6-4. Storage Compartment ................................................................302
Glove Box................................................................................... 302
Center Tray ................................................................................. 303
Center Console ........................................................................... 303
Center Console Tray ................................................................... 303
6-5. Cup Holder ..................................................................................304
Front Passenger’s Cup Holder .................................................... 304
Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder (If Equipped) ................................. 304
6-6. Bottle Holders .............................................................................305
6-7. Accessory Power Outlets...........................................................305
6-8. USB Power Supply .....................................................................306
How to Use the USB Power Supply ............................................. 307
6-9. Wireless Charger (If Equipped)..................................................308
How to Use the Wireless Charger ................................................ 308
Certification for the Wireless Charger.......................................... 312
6-10. Ashtray (Dealer Option)..............................................................313
6-11. Assist Grip...................................................................................314
6-12. Floor Mat .....................................................................................315
6-13. Shopping Bag Hook....................................................................316
6-14. Cargo Upper Hooks ....................................................................316
6-15. Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) ................................................317
Using the Cover .......................................................................... 317
To Remove the Cover Housing .................................................... 318
Stowage of the Cargo Area Cover ............................................... 318
To Install the Cover Housing ....................................................... 318
6-16. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks ..............................................................319
6-17. Under-Floor Storage Compartment ...........................................319
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6

(300,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-1. INTERIOR LIGHT

s06aa

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make sure

the lights are turned off to avoid

battery discharge.

MAP LIGHTS

s06aa06

S_602759-W

Door interlock switch

Lens

To turn on the map light, press the lens.

To turn it off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not keep watching the light source

because they use LEDs. Doing so

could damage your eyes.

The door interlock switch has the follow-

ing positions.

OFF:

The map lights do not illuminate in

conjunction with a door opening. How-

ever, the lights can be turned on manually

by pressing the map light lens.

DOOR:

The map light illuminates in the following

cases.

. Any of the doors (other than the rear

gate) is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function. Refer to

“Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless

Access” Entry Function” �P120.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P133.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

After all the doors (other than the rear

gate) are closed, the map lights gradually

turn off. For details, refer to “OFF Delay

Timer” �P299.

DOME LIGHT

s06aa01

S_602760-W

OFF

DOOR

ON:

The light remains on continuously.

OFF:

The light remains off.

DOOR:

The dome light illuminates in the following

cases.

. Any of the doors or the rear gate is

opened.

. The doors or the rear gate are

unlocked using the keyless access

function (if equipped). Refer to “Lock-

ing and Unlocking with “Keyless Ac-

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

298

(301,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

cess” Entry Function” �P120.

. The doors or the rear gate are

unlocked using the remote keyless

entry system. Refer to “Remote Key-

less Entry System” �P133.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

CARGO AREA LIGHT

s06aa02

S_602761-W

OFF

DOOR

OFF:

The light remains off.

DOOR:

The light illuminates when the rear gate is

opened. The light remains illuminated

and gradually turns off after the rear gate

is closed.

ON:

The light remains on continuously.

REAR GATE LIGHT

s06aa04

S_602762-W

OFF

DOOR

OFF:

The light remains off.

DOOR:

The rear gate light will illuminate when the

rear gate is opened.

OFF DELAY TIMER

s06aa07

This function will automatically illuminate

the following lights for a certain period of

time.

. Dome light

. Map lights

. Cargo area light

. Rear gate light

When the door interlock switch is set to

the “DOOR” position, the light will turn on

and off depending on the locking and

unlocking of the doors, the opening and

closing of the doors, as well as the

position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in which

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer)

can be changed by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

the following sections.

– “Car settings icon” �P216 (dual 7.0-

inch display models)

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

299

(302,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

– “Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models)

Also, the setting of the lights remain on

(OFF delay timer) can be changed by

your SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

6-2. SUN VISORS

s06ac

S_602639-W

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

SUN VISOR EXTENSION PLATE

s06ac01

S_602640-W

With the sun visor positioned over the

side window, you can use the sun visor

extension plate to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it

toward the rear of the vehicle. When you

have finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

300

(303,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

S_602641-W

Do not pull out the extension plate with

the sun visor positioned over the

windshield. The extension plate would

obstruct your view of the inside mirror.

VANITY MIRROR WITH LIGHT (If

Equipped)

s06ac02

S_602642-W

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror

cover.

The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nate when the mirror cover is opened.

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being blinded by glare.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

301

(304,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-3. OVERHEAD CONSOLE

s06bc

S_602643-W

To open the console, push on the lid

lightly and it will automatically open.

CAUTION

. Before driving, ensure that the

overhead console is closed.

. When your vehicle is parked in the

sun or on a warm day, the inside of

the overhead console heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other heat-

vulnerable or flammable articles

such as a lighter in the overhead

console.

6-4. STORAGE COMPART-

MENT

s06ad

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage compart-

ment closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stops or an accident.

. Do not store the following items in

the storage compartment. Other-

wise, it may cause a fire or

accident.

– Spray cans, containers with

flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items.

– Plastic or other heat-vulnerable

or flammable articles such as a

lighter.

GLOVE BOX

s06ad01

S_602654-W

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

When the instrument panel illumination is

on, the light that illuminates the glove box

(if equipped) is on. Refer to “Headlights”

�P239.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

302

(305,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CENTER TRAY

s06ad13

S_602655-W

The center tray is located below the

center of the instrument panel.

WARNING

For models with the wireless charger:

When the wireless charger is turned

on, do not place coins, keys, clips, or

other metal objects on the center tray.

For details, refer to “Wireless Charger”

�P308.

CAUTION

Do not use the center tray to hold

objects that could roll out of the tray.

You may get injured if objects are

thrown out of the tray while the vehicle

is in motion.

NOTE

When the instrument panel illumination is

on, the light that illuminates the center

tray is on. Refer to “Headlights” �P239.

CENTER CONSOLE

s06ad02

The center console box provides a

storage space.

S_602656-W

To open the lid, pull up the lock release

lever.

CENTER CONSOLE TRAY

s06ad18

S_602657-W

The center console tray is located on the

front side of the center console.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

303

(306,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-5. CUP HOLDER

s06ae

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if

hot, might burn you and/or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery, carpets or

audio equipment.

FRONT PASSENGER’S CUP

HOLDER

s06ae01

S_602658-W

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care not to spill a beverage on

the select lever or any switch(es) in

the adjacent area. If the beverage

is spilled, it may cause a malfunc-

tion of the select lever and/or

switch(es).

REAR PASSENGER’S CUP

HOLDER (If Equipped)

s06ae02

S_602659-MW

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage is

in the cup holder, do not fold down or

recline any seat. Otherwise, the bev-

erage could spill while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn you

and/or your passengers.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

304

(307,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-6. BOTTLE HOLDERS

s06av

S_602660-W

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as this

may distract you and lead to an

accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if the

beverage is hot, it could burn you

and/or your passengers.

6-7. ACCESSORY POWER

OUTLETS

s06af

S_602661-W

S_602644-W

An accessory power outlet is provided as

shown in the illustration.

You can use an in-vehicle electrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

Electrical power (12 V DC) from the

battery is available at any of the outlets

when the ignition switch is in either the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That could

cause a short circuit. Always put

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

305

(308,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

the cap on the accessory power

outlet when it is not in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12 V DC.

. The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected is

120 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances connected

to two or more outlets simulta-

neously, the total power consumed

by them must not exceed 120 W.

Overloading the accessory power

outlet can cause a short circuit. Do

not use double adapters or more

than one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too tight

for the accessory power outlet, this

can result in a poor contact or

cause the plug to get stuck. Only

use plugs that fit properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and

brake pedals. If they do, do not use

the electrical appliance while driv-

ing.

6-8. USB POWER SUPPLY

s06ay

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB port that

can be used is the Type-A and

Type-C. If a different specification

of device is connected, power

supply or charging may not be

possible, or the device may mal-

function.

. There is a risk that a connected

device may malfunction or data

may be damaged. The connection

of a device shall be performed at

your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a

malfunction, observe the following

precautions.

– Do not connect a USB hub.

– Do not insert any metal or other

foreign object into the USB

port.

– Do not spill water or other liquid

on the USB port.

. Be careful not to pull the connected

cable. Doing so could break the

USB port and the connected de-

vice.

. If a device is connected for a long

time when the engine is not run-

ning, doing so may cause the risk

of a discharged battery. Even when

the engine is running, we recom-

mend that you do not connect a

device for an unnecessarily long

time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning

device. Doing so may cause the

risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE

. The rated voltage of each USB port is

5 V. For details about the maximum

rated power, refer to “How to Use the

USB Power Supply” �P307. Before

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

306

(309,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

connecting a device, be sure to read

the instruction manual of the device

and check whether or not this speci-

fication of the output is supported by

the device. If a device that requires

power exceeding the maximum rating

is connected, power supply or char-

ging may not be possible. Even if

charging could be completed, the time

required for charging may be longer

than when the genuine charger for that

device is used.

. Depending on the device, charging

may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to

connect the device using the special

cable.

. When a device that communicates

with a PC is connected, power supply

or charging may not be possible.

. When connect a device for charging,

disconnect the device promptly after

charging is completed.

HOW TO USE THE USB POWER

SUPPLY

s06ay01

Front seat USB port:

S_602763-W

USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A (if

equipped)

USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A

Console USB port (if equipped):

S_602764-W

USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A

USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A

Before using the USB port to use or

charge an electronic device, turn the

ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON”

position. The combined maximum output

of the two USB ports is 5.4 A.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

307

(310,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-9. WIRELESS CHARGER

(If Equipped)

s06bh

S_602664-W

To charge a cell phone, smartphone or a

similar mobile device compatible with the

Qi wireless charging standard, place the

device in the charging area located below

the center information display.

The “Qi” logo is a trademark of the

Wireless Power Consortium.

S_602765-W

Indicator light

Power switch

Charging area

NOTE

Mobile devices and wireless chargers

contain coils for charging. These coils

allow the wireless charging system to

charge a mobile device with a high level of

charging efficiency. When your device is

in the charging area, the wireless charger

detects it and aligns an integrated moving

coil with the coil in your device for

charging. If vehicle vibration causes the

two coils to become misaligned while the

vehicle is in motion, the moving coil of the

wireless charger automatically reposi-

tions itself and resumes charging.

However, if the mobile device moves out

of the charging area, charging will auto-

matically stop.

HOW TO USE THE WIRELESS

CHARGER

s06bh01

1. The wireless charger operate when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

2. Press the power switch once to turn on

the wireless charger. When the wire-

less charger is ON, the indicator light

illuminates in green.

S_602665-W

3. Place the mobile device so that the

screen or keypad is facing up (the

charging surface is facing downward).

The center of the device must also be

aligned with the center of the charging

area. The indicator light illuminates in

orange during charging.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

308

(311,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_602666-W

4. The indicator light illuminates in green

when charging is complete.

NOTE

. If the indicator light does not illuminate

in orange and device charging does

not occur, move the device to the

center of the charging area. Depend-

ing on the mobile device, the charging

coil may not be in the center of the

device. In such cases, place the

mobile device so that its charging coil

is in the center of the charging area.

. The power status of the wireless

charger is stored even when the

ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position.

How to use the quick charge

s06bh0101

The following types of mobile devices

support quick charging as opposed to

normal charging (5 W).

. Mobile devices compliant with WPC*

Ver. 1.2.4 and compatible with fast

chargers can be charged up to 10 W.

. iPhone 8 (or later) with an iOS version

compliant with WPC* Ver. 1.2.4 and

compatible with 7.5 W charging.

* WPC: Wireless Power Consortium

1. Press the power switch three times to

change to the quick-charging mode

while your mobile device is charging in

normal mode. The indicator light will

change from orange to alternating

green and orange when the wireless

charger switches to the quick-char-

ging mode.

2. When charging is complete, the quick-

charging mode ends. To restart quick-

charging, switch to the quick-charging

mode again.

To turn off the wireless charger

s06bh0104

Press the power switch once. When the

wireless charger is OFF, the indicator light

turns off.

Indicator light patterns

s06bh0102

Indicator light Interpretation

Off

The wireless charger is turned

off

Green (illumi-

nated)

Standby (ready for charging)*

Charging is complete*

Orange (illumi-

nated)

A mobile device is in the char-

ging area (a mobile device is

being detected)

Charging

Green and or-

ange illuminate

alternately

Quick charging is in progress

*1: No power is output for charging when the wireless

charger is in standby mode. Even if metal objects

are placed on the charging tray in this state, they

will not overheat.

*2: For some mobile devices, the indicator light

remains orange even after charging is complete.

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

309

(312,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

List of warnings

s06bh0103

Indicator light Possible causes Solution

Flashes orange

once per second

A communication error occurred between

the wireless charger and the access key

fob.

If the engine is running, stop the engine

and restart it.

If the ignition switch is in “ACC”, start the

engine once.

Repeatedly flashes

orange three times

Metallic foreign object detected.

A foreign object is detected between the

mobile device and the charging area.

The mobile device is out of alignment:

The overheat prevention function of the

charging coils was triggered because the

mobile device’s charging coils were out of

alignment with the charging area.

Remove any foreign objects between the

mobile device and the charging area.

Remove the mobile device from the char-

ging area, check that the activation indi-

cator light is illuminating in green again,

and place the device in the center of the

charging area. If there is a case or cover on

your mobile device, be sure to remove it.

Repeatedly flashes

orange four times

The temperature inside the wireless char-

ger has increased.

Remove the mobile device from the char-

ging area temporarily to stop charging.

When the temperature of the mobile device

cools down, start charging the device

again.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

310

(313,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

. For safety reasons, drivers must

not operate a charging mobile

device while driving.

. Do not charge small devices such

as cordless headphones or light-

weight cell phones while driving.

Due to their light weight, these

devices may be thrown from the

charging tray resulting in an acci-

dent.

. The wireless power receiver can

affect some implanted or other

electrical medical devices. If you

use a cardiac pacemaker, ventri-

cular pacing pulse generator, car-

dioverter-defibrillator, or a similar

device, consult with your physician

before using the wireless charger.

CAUTION

. Before charging your device, make

sure that there is no metal between

the charging area and the mobile

device. Metal objects may gener-

ate heat and cause burns when

placed in the charging area.

. Do not apply strong force or impact

to the charging area.

. Do not affix aluminum stickers to or

place other metal objects in the

charging area. Also, do not charge

a mobile device that has aluminum

stickers or other metal objects

attached to it that may come in

contact with the charging area.

Metal objects may generate heat

and cause burns when placed in

the charging area.

. Do not disassemble, modify, or

remove the wireless charger.

. Do not place magnetized objects in

or near the charging area.

. During charging, do not cover your

device with a cloth, etc.

. Do not charge your device in dusty

conditions.

. Make sure that no foreign objects

or liquids are placed or spilled in

the wireless charger.

. Do not place the access key fob

near the wireless charger.

. When your device is charging,

keep any magnetic cards such as

credit cards and precision devices

such as watches away from the

charging area. They may be da-

maged.

. Do not leave objects in the trays

unattended for a long period of

time. The paint on the trays may

deteriorate depending on the type

of device case or accessory.

. When the OS version of a mobile

device is updated, the charging

specifications may change signifi-

cantly. Also, if the OS versions

compatible with WPC change, the

quick charging function may be-

come unavailable. For details,

check the website of your mobile

device manufacturer.

. To prevent discharging the vehicle

battery, do not use the wireless

charger for long periods of time

when the engine is stopped.

NOTE

. This function is not available for

devices larger than the charger tray.

. The wireless charger and mobile

device will emit heat during charging,

but this is not a malfunction.

. When your mobile device emits heat

during charging, the mobile device’s

protective function may cancel char-

ging.

. A beep will sound when the power

switch of the wireless charger is

pressed to turn the power ON or when

a mobile device is being detected.

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

311

(314,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This is not a malfunction.

. The fan may activate when the tem-

perature rises, but this is not a

malfunction.

. Qi standard wireless charger can be

used on compatible devices.

However, not all Qi standard devices

and compatibility are guaranteed.

. If you hear noise on the AM radio while

your device is charging, you may be

able to reduce the noise by changing

the charging frequency. To change the

charging frequency, press and hold

the power switch to turn on the

system. After a certain amount of time,

the indicator light will flash orange

twice to indicate the frequency switch.

. If the access key fob cannot be

detected in the cabin, the battery

cannot be charged. In addition, char-

ging may be temporarily suspended

when the remote keyless entry system

is in operation, such as when opening

and closing doors.

. If your mobile device does not charge

even after you place it in the charging

area, remove the device case and any

accessories.

CERTIFICATION FOR THE

WIRELESS CHARGER

s06bh02

The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries:

FCC ID: ACJ932AF2201

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

wireless power charger, pursuant to

part 18 of the FCC Rules.

This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio

communications.

However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a parti-

cular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio communications,

which can be determined by turning

the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the inter-

ference by one or more of the following

measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

– Increase the separation between

the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an

outlet on a circuit different from that

to which the receiver is connected.

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment and

meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines. This equipment

should be installed and operated

keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or

more away from person’s body.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 and part

18 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

312

(315,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Canada-spec. models:

ZOM1003

6-10. ASHTRAY (Dealer Op-

tion)

s06ag

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them into

the ashtray, and then close the

ashtray securely. If you keep the

ashtray open, the fire of the cigar-

ette may spread to another cigar-

ette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts

in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ashtray’s

inner lid. Clean them off using a tooth-

brush or a similar narrow-ended imple-

ment.

S_602646-MW

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

Holder” �P304. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”

�P305.

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

313

(316,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When using the ashtray, open the lid of

the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using

the ashtray to help reduce residual

smoke.

6-11. ASSIST GRIP

s06bd

S_602766-MW

Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the

body of the passengers when they are in

the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when

getting up from the seat. Holding and

pulling the assist grip in the wrong way

could break the grip and possibly

cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it and

damage the object.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

314

(317,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-12. FLOOR MAT

s06aj

CAUTION

S_602650-MW

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU

floor mat designed with grommets

in the correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed back in its proper

location and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

1. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into

the floor mat eyelets.

S_602651-W

2. Turn the upper knob of each retaining

hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in

place.

S_602767-W

Align the triangle marks ( ) when

installing the floor mats.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

315

(318,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-13. SHOPPING BAG HOOK

s06ai

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

S_602667-W

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

6-14. CARGO UPPER

HOOKS

s06bf

S_602668-W

Cargo upper hooks

There are two hooks on the lining in the

cargo area. Use them to hang or secure

lightweight objects when the vehicle is

stopped.

WARNING

Do not hang anything on the hooks

that produces a flame. Flammable gas

may fill the inside of the vehicle or

cause a fire.

CAUTION

When using a hook, observe the

following precautions.

. Do not drive with an object hanging

on a hook. There is a risk that you

will not be able to see behind you,

or that an object may be propelled

when braking or starting suddenly,

which could lead to an accident or

injury.

. Do not hang heavy or large objects

on the hook.

Maximum load capacity: 6 lbs (3

kg)

. Do not use the hooks to secure a

child restraint system.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

316

(319,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. On hot, sunny days, do not leave

objects hanging from the hooks for

a long time. If the inside of the car

becomes hot, the hook may be

deformed, and the hanging objects

may fall.

6-15. CARGO AREA COVER

(If Equipped)

s06ak

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover

is detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

USING THE COVER

s06ak01

S_602669-W

To extend the cover, pull the cargo area

cover using the center hole, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown.

To rewind it, unhook it from the catches

and it will rewind automatically. You

should hold on to the cover and guide it

back into the cover housing while it is

rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the extended

cover. Putting excessive weight on the

extended cover can break it and an

object on the cover could tumble

forward in the event of a sudden stop

or collision. This could cause serious

injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate

stays while extending and rewinding

the cover.

Scratches on the stays could cause

leakage of gas from the stays, which

– CONTINUED –

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

317

(320,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

may result in their inability to hold the

rear gate open.

TO REMOVE THE COVER

HOUSING

s06ak02

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten it.

S_602670-W

3. Take it off the retainer.

STOWAGE OF THE CARGO

AREA COVER

s06ak04

The cargo area cover can be stowed

under the cargo floor as follows.

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the

cargo floor board.

S_602671-W

2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.

S_602672-W

3. Put the cargo floor board back.

TO INSTALL THE COVER

HOUSING

s06ak05

The right end of the cargo area cover is a

sliding structure.

1. Insert the right end of the cover into

the recessed portion.

S_602674-W

2. Hold the cover housing securely and

insert the left end of the cover into the

recessed portion.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

318

(321,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6-16. CARGO TIE-DOWN

HOOKS

s06am

S_602675-W

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the front tie-down hooks, turn

them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that exceeds

the capacity of the hooks. The max-

imum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg)

per hook.

6-17. UNDER-FLOOR STO-

RAGE COMPARTMENT

s06an

S_602676-W

The under-floor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the cargo area

and can be used to store small items. To

open the lid, pull the strap up.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the under-

floor storage compartment closed

while driving to reduce the risk of

injury in the event of sudden stop or

an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the under-floor storage

compartment.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

319

(322,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(323,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s07
7-1. Fuel ..............................................................................................324
Fuel Requirements ...................................................................... 324
Fuel Filler Lid and Cap ................................................................ 325
7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ...........................................328
7-3. Preparing to Drive.......................................................................329
7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without
Push-Button Ignition Switch).....................................................330
General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine................... 330
Starting Engine ........................................................................... 330
Stopping the Engine ................................................................... 331
Steering Lock ............................................................................. 331
7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button
Start System)...............................................................................332
Safety Precautions...................................................................... 332
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System ........................... 332
Starting Engine ........................................................................... 332
Stopping Engine ......................................................................... 334
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ...................... 334
Steering Lock ............................................................................. 334
7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) ..........................335
Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) .................................... 336
Alternate Operation Method for Models with “Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” ................................................ 339
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start
(Models without “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System”)................................................................................... 339
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start
(Models with “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System”)................................................................................... 340
Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown ... 340
Heating or Cooling the Interior of the Vehicle .............................. 340
Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver) .............................................................................. 340
System Maintenance ................................................................... 341
Certification for Remote Engine Starter ....................................... 342
7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission.........................................343
Continuously Variable Transmission Features ............................. 344
Select Lever................................................................................ 344
Shift Lock Function..................................................................... 346
Selection of Manual Mode (If Equipped)....................................... 347
Selection of “L” (If Equipped)...................................................... 349
Driving Tips ................................................................................ 349
7-8. SI-DRIVE ......................................................................................350
Intelligent (I) Mode ...................................................................... 350
Sport (S) Mode............................................................................ 350
Sport Sharp (S#) Mode ................................................................ 350
SI-DRIVE Switch.......................................................................... 351
7-9. Power Steering............................................................................351
STARTING AND OPERATING
7

(324,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
7-10. Braking ........................................................................................352
Braking Tips ............................................................................... 352
Brake System ............................................................................. 352
Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators..................................... 354
7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)..................................................354
ABS Self-Check .......................................................................... 355
ABS Warning Light ..................................................................... 355
7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System .................355
EBD System Malfunctions ........................................................... 355
7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System ............................................356
Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .................................. 357
To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System.................. 358
7-14. X-MODE (If Equipped).................................................................359
To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE ................................................... 360
Hill Descent Control Function...................................................... 360
7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.
Models) ........................................................................................362
Certification for Tire Pressure Monitoring System........................ 363
TPMS Screen .............................................................................. 363
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle ..................................................................363
Electronic Parking Brake............................................................. 363
Parking Tips ............................................................................... 366
Auto Vehicle Hold Function......................................................... 367
Emergency Brake........................................................................ 369
7-17. Hill Start Assist System .............................................................370
7-18. Auto Start Stop System..............................................................372
System Operation ....................................................................... 372
Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status ............................. 375
System Warning.......................................................................... 376
7-19. Surround View Monitor (If Equipped)........................................376
How to Change the Display of Surround View Monitor ................. 377
How to Cancel Surround View Monitor ........................................ 379
How to View the Camera Images ................................................. 379
Range of Surround View Monitor................................................. 382
Using the Camera ....................................................................... 382
7-20. Rear View Camera ......................................................................383
How to Use the Rear View Camera .............................................. 384
Viewing Range on the Screen...................................................... 385
Help Lines .................................................................................. 386
7-21. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped).............................................................388
System Features ......................................................................... 388
Operating Conditions .................................................................. 390
BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer................... 391
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator............................................................. 393
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator....................................................... 394
To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ..................................................... 394
Certification for the BSD/RCTA.................................................... 395
Handling of Radar Sensors ......................................................... 396
STARTING AND OPERATING

(325,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
7-22. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)........397
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview ................... 399
Operating Conditions .................................................................. 400
Sonar Audible Alarm Function .................................................... 403
Automatic Braking Function Operation ........................................ 406
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Operation.................................................................................. 407
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting.......... 407
RAB Warning Indicator................................................................ 408
Handling of the Sonar Sensors.................................................... 408
7-23. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped)....................................409
User Recognition Function.......................................................... 413
Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning............................................. 415
Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning................................ 417
Using the Driver Monitoring System ............................................ 417
Deleting a User ........................................................................... 421
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings ................................. 421
How to Get the Source Code That Uses Open Source Software ... 422
STARTING AND OPERATING
7

(326,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-1. FUEL

s07aa

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause damage to the

engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly

those in high altitude areas, offer

fuels posted as regular octane

gasoline with an octane rating

below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of

those fuels are not recommended.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

s07aa01

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

Fuel octane rating

s07aa0103

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact

your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with

the specified octane rating and your

vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

RON:

This octane rating is the Research Oc-

tane Number.

AKI:

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Unleaded gasoline

s07aa0104

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

Reformulated gasoline

s07aa0128

SUBARU supports the use of reformu-

lated gasoline when available. Reformu-

lated gasoline has been blended to burn

more cleanly and reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

MMT

s07aa0106

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

If you use such fuels, your emission

control system performance may dete-

riorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light may turn

on. If this happens, return to your

authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If

it is determined that the condition is

caused by the type of fuel used, repairs

may not be covered by your warranty.

Gasoline for cleaner air

s07aa0107

Your use of gasoline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of

these fuels can also help keep the air

cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as

ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be

used in your vehicle, but should contain

no more than 15% ethanol for the proper

operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 15% ethanol, including from

any pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which

are only some examples of fuel contain-

ing more than 15% ethanol).

STARTING AND OPERATING

324

(327,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain de-

tergents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle

emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that

specified in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded ga-

soline. Methanol can be used in your

vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5%

of the fuel mixture AND if it is

accompanied by sufficient quantities

of the proper cosolvents and corrosion

inhibitors required to prevent damage

to the fuel system. Do not use fuel

containing methanol EXCEPT under

these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems

are experienced and you suspect they

may be fuel related, try a different

brand of gasoline before seeking

service at your SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

FUEL FILLER LID AND CAP

s07aa02

Locations of the fuel filler lid

s07aa0202

S_703117-W

The fuel filler lid is located at the rear right

side of the vehicle.

Refueling

s07aa0201

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then

turn off the ignition switch to turn off all

the electrical components. At this

time, the fuel filler lid also unlocks.

NOTE

When you lock the door, the fuel filler lid

also locks. To unlock the fuel filler lid,

perform one of the operations below.

– Press the “

” button on the key fob.

– Press the unlock side of the power

door locking switch.

2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.

Open it further by hand.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

325

(328,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first

touch the vehicle body or a metal

portion of the fuel pump or similar

object to discharge any static electri-

city that may be present on your body.

If your body is carrying an electrostatic

charge, there is a possibility that an

electric spark could ignite the fuel,

which could burn you. To avoid

acquiring a new static electric charge,

do not get back into the vehicle while

refueling is in progress.

4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

S_703260-W

Open

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and

then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there are

no lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adjacent

area. Only handle fuel outdoors.

Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you are

removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly open

the cap to prevent fuel from spray-

ing out and creating a fire hazard.

5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

S_703119-W

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not function,

causing fuel to overflow the tank

and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the automatic

stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle

activates. If you continue to add

fuel, temperature changes or other

conditions may cause fuel to over-

flow from the tank and create a fire

hazard.

6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add

any more fuel.

7. Put the cap back on and turn it

clockwise until you hear a clicking

STARTING AND OPERATING

326

(329,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

noise. Be certain not to catch the

tether under the cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to wipe

off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint

damage caused by spilled fuel is not

covered under the SUBARU Limited

Warranty.

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

lid is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until

it clicks or if the tether is caught under

the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light may

illuminate. Refer to “CHECK ENGINE

Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator

Light” �P179.

. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one of

the operations below. However if

these operations are performed when

the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid

will not lock when it is subsequently

closed.

– Press the “

” button on the key fob.

– Press the lock side of the power

door locking switch.

. When the doors are locked or un-

locked using the automatic door lock

system, the fuel filler lid will be locked

or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause damage

to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that it is

fully tightened. If the cap is not

securely tightened, fuel may leak

out while the vehicle is being driven

or fuel spillage could occur in the

event of an accident, creating a fire

hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be sure

to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled

fuel is not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong

cap, it may not fit or have proper

venting and your fuel tank and

emission control system may be

damaged. It could also lead to fuel

spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine. Continuing

to operate your vehicle at an

extremely low fuel level may result

in a reduction of engine perfor-

mance.

STARTING AND OPERATING

327

(330,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-2. STATE EMISSION TEST-

ING (U.S. Only)

s07ab

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single two-

wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do

so will result in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an acci-

dent or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remember

to tell your inspection or service

station in advance not to place your

SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-

wheel dynamometer. Otherwise,

serious transmission damage will

result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of the

state inspection program or its

contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs

to inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle

emissions to exceed allowable limits.

OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model

year and newer passenger cars and

trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of

Columbia have implemented emission

inspection of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check

of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning

light/malfunction indicator light (MIL)

and an examination of the OBDII

system with an electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

observed, there are no stored diag-

nostic trouble codes, and the OBDII

readiness monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

not properly operating (light is illumi-

nated or is not working due to faulty

LED (Light Emitting Diode)) or there is

one or more diagnostic trouble codes

stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the

number of OBDII system readiness

monitors “NOT READY” is greater

than one. If the vehicle’s battery has

been recently replaced or discon-

nected, the OBDII system inspection

may indicate that the vehicle is not

ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a

few days to reset the readiness

monitors and return for an emission

re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer

for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains

in one place. Prior to your vehicle being

put on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

STARTING AND OPERATING

328

(331,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-

wheel dynamometers in their emission

testing program have EXEMPTED

SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion

of the testing program that involves a two-

wheel dynamometer. There are some

states that use four-wheel dynamometers

in their testing program. When properly

used, this equipment should not damage

a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. PREPARING TO DRIVE

s07ac

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seat-

belts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10.Check the gauges, indicator and

warning lights after starting the en-

gine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cooling

fan and drive belt may result in a

malfunction. Check that no small

animal enters the engine compart-

ment and under the vehicle before

starting the engine.

NOTE

. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

Hitch (Dealer Option)” �P443.

STARTING AND OPERATING

329

(332,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-4. STARTING AND STOP-

PING THE ENGINE (Models

without Push-Button Ignition

Switch)

s07bd

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

WHEN STARTING/STOPPING

ENGINE

s07bd06

WARNING

. Never start the engine from outside

the vehicle (except when using the

remote engine start system). It may

result in an accident.

. Do not leave the engine running in

locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors. The

exhaust gas may enter the vehicle

or indoors, and it may result in

carbon monoxide poisoning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flammable

substances. The exhaust pipe and

exhaust emissions can create a fire

hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may overheat

and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine start

system).

NOTE

. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration

immediately after the engine has

started.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult to

start the engine depending on the fuel

used and the driving condition (re-

peated short trips when the engine is

not warmed up sufficiently). In such a

case, it is recommended to switch to a

different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knocking

may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly

such as a rapid start-up and a rapid

acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

STARTING ENGINE

s07bd01

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine starter

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the engine starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more

before trying again.

NOTE

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position for

approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

engine starter is cranking.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select lever

into the “N” position. Do not attempt to

place the select lever of a moving

vehicle into the “P” position.

STARTING AND OPERATING

330

(333,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

engine starter will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P” or “N”

position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights”

�P175.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the ac-

celerator pedal. Release the key im-

mediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform

the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. After checking

that the parking brake is applied,

turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while depres-

sing the accelerator pedal slightly

(approximately a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine

starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. Then fully de-

press the accelerator pedal and

turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine

starts, quickly release the accel-

erator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the

“LOCK” position. After waiting for

10 seconds or longer, turn the

ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine

has started. The fuel injection system

automatically lowers the idle speed as

the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the select lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

STOPPING THE ENGINE

s07bd02

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause loss

of power to the power steering and the

brake booster, making steering and

braking more difficult. It could also

result in accidental activation of the

“LOCK” position on the ignition switch,

causing the steering wheel to lock.

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK/

OFF” position.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

STEERING LOCK

s07bd07

After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering

wheel will be locked due to the steering

lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

331

(334,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When the steering lock cannot

be released

s07bd0701

When you cannot unlock the steering

wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering

wheel left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by

doing the steps, consult your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

7-5. STARTING AND STOP-

PING ENGINE (Models with

Push-Button Start System)

s07be

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s07be06

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P118.

OPERATING RANGE FOR

PUSH-BUTTON START SYS-

TEM

s07be01

Refer to “Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System” �P168.

STARTING ENGINE

s07be03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precautions

When Starting/Stopping Engine”

�P330.

. If the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch flashes in green

after the engine has started, never

drive the vehicle. The steering is

still locked, and it may result in an

accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. If the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch is flashing in green

after the engine has started, it

means that the steering is still

locked. While moving the steering

wheel right and left, depress the

brake pedal, and press the push-

button ignition switch.

STARTING AND OPERATING

332

(335,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Do not continue pressing the push-

button ignition switch for more than

10 seconds. Doing so could cause

a malfunction. If the engine does

not start, stop pressing the push-

button ignition switch. Instead,

press the push-button ignition

switch without depressing the

brake pedal to switch the power

status to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds,

and then press the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE

. When pressing the push-button igni-

tion switch while depressing the brake

pedal:

– The engine starter operates for a

maximum of 10 seconds and after

starting the engine, the engine

starter stops automatically.

– The engine can be started regard-

less of the power status.

. If the engine does not start, check the

security indicator light. Then press the

push-button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to switch

the power to “OFF”.

– If the light had illuminated, try to

start the engine again.

– If the light had been off, press the

push-button ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal more

forcefully.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio wave

conditions around the vehicle. In such

a case, refer to “Starting Engine”

�P472.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the

steering cannot be unlocked. Charge

the battery.

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position for

approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

engine starter is cranking.

S_703261-W

Operation indicator

Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake ped-

al, the engine will start. The starting

procedure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the parking brake is ap-

plied.

3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position. The engine can also start

when the select lever is in the “N”

position, however, for safety reasons,

start in the “P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When

starting with the select lever in the “N”

position, the indicator does not turn

green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

While pressing the select lever button in,

the indicator on the push-button ignition

switch will not turn green even when the

select lever is in the “P” position.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

333

(336,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

STOPPING ENGINE

s07be04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power

will be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows, the

engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

The electric power steering system

will not operate either. A greater

force will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped in

a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power will

be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is left in

this condition, the battery may be

discharged.

NOTE

S_703123-W

. If you press the push-button ignition

switch while driving, the emergency

engine stop interrupt screen alerts the

driver by messages on the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) and

beeps.

. Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

WHEN ACCESS KEY FOB

DOES NOT OPERATE PROP-

ERLY

s07be05

Refer to “If Access Key Fob Does Not

Operate Properly” �P471.

STEERING LOCK

s07be07

After stopping the engine and any door is

opened, the steering wheel will be locked

due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

STARTING AND OPERATING

334

(337,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When the steering lock cannot

be released

s07be0701

S_703261-W

Operation indicator

Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due

to the steering lock, check the status of

operation indicator and perform the fol-

lowing steps.

Operation indicator flashing in green:

1. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

while turning the steering wheel left

and right.

Operation indicator flashing in or-

ange:

There may be a malfunction in the

steering lock function. Immediately con-

tact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-6. REMOTE ENGINE

START SYSTEM (Dealer Op-

tion)

s07az

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precautions

When Starting/Stopping Engine”

�P330.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an

enclosed environment (e.g. closed

garage). Prolonged operation of a

motor vehicle in an enclosed en-

vironment can cause a harmful

build-up of carbon monoxide. Car-

bon monoxide is harmful to your

health. Exposure to high levels of

carbon monoxide can cause

headaches, dizziness or in ex-

treme cases unconsciousness

and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows

you to start the engine from outside the

vehicle. In addition, the remote engine

start system can activate the heater or air

conditioner, providing you with a comfor-

table cabin upon entry. For more details,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the remote engine start system.

NOTE

. The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the local

rules when using the remote engine

start system.

. When taking your vehicle in for ser-

vice, it is recommended that you

inform the service personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with a remote

engine start system.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

335

(338,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

REMOTE ENGINE STARTER

TRANSCEIVER (Fob)

s07az21

S_703262-MW

Fob button

Starting the engine

s07az2101

NOTE

All vehicle doors and the engine hood

must be closed prior to activating the

remote engine start system. Any open

entry point will prevent starting or cause

the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the

start request is received, the following will

occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following will

occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a

vehicle malfunction is preventing starting.

If the engine does not start after 3

additional attempts, the remote engine

start request will be aborted.

Stopping the engine

s07az2102

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is

too far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

Remote start safety features

s07az2103

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the

following conditions is detected. In addi-

tion, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. A key is in the ignition switch.

. The engine hood is open.

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

rpm.

. The security alarm is triggered.

. The select lever is not in the “P”

position.

STARTING AND OPERATING

336

(339,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

If the system detects any door open

during operation, it will prevent starting or

stop the engine, and sound the horn and

flash side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activa-

tion (the security indicator light on the

combination meter is flashing), the

alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at the

time of remote engine starter activa-

tion (the security indicator light on the

combination meter is not flashing), the

alarm system will remain disarmed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

Remote start operation - fob

confirmation

s07az2104

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate the status of the

system using the following the flash and

beep sequences, provided the fob is

within operational range of the system.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

337

(340,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while

button is held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by

pressing fob button twice within 3

sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Vehicle is in range but engine not

started

Engine idling by remote engine

start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system time-out

or for safety reasons (see sections

above)

User attempts to stop engine by

pressing and holding fob button for

at least 2 sec

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine

still idling.

STARTING AND OPERATING

338

(341,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ALTERNATE OPERATION

METHOD FOR MODELS WITH

“KEYLESS ACCESS WITH

PUSH-BUTTON START SYS-

TEM”

s07az22

S_703263-W

Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

Before starting the engine

s07az2201

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors are closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in

the “OFF” position.

Starting the engine

s07az2202

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash

once and the buzzer chirps once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock

button briefly again. The hazard

warning flashers then flash once

again, and the buzzer chirps once

again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard

warning flashers then flash three

times, and the horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine

will then start successfully.

Stopping the engine

s07az2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

Remote start safety features

s07az2204

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

start safety features” �P336.

ENTERING THE VEHICLE

WHILE IT IS RUNNING VIA RE-

MOTE START (Models without

“Keyless Access with Push-

Button Start System”)

s07az03

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of the

following procedures to disarm the alarm

system. Refer to “Alarm System” �P142.

– Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn it to the “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut

down when any door is opened.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “START” position to

restart the engine.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

339

(342,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ENTERING THE VEHICLE

WHILE IT IS RUNNING VIA RE-

MOTE START (Models with

“Keyless Access with Push-

Button Start System”)

s07az24

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function and remote

keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of the

following procedures to disarm the alarm

system. Refer to “Alarm System” �P142.

– Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion.

– Press any button on the access key

fob.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will

remain running provided the access

key fob is present and detected by the

vehicle.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

once while depressing the brake pedal

before driving your vehicle. The re-

mote engine starter transceiver (fob)

will flash and beep 3 times to indicate

that the remote start system has been

shut down.

ENTERING THE VEHICLE FOL-

LOWING REMOTE ENGINE

START SHUTDOWN

s07az10

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle

is opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds imme-

diately following remote engine start

shutdown.

HEATING OR COOLING THE

INTERIOR OF THE VEHICLE

s07az04

After the system starts the engine, the

heater or air conditioning will activate and

heat or cool the interior to a factory default

temperature setting, with automatic se-

lected for all other settings.

REMOTE TRANSMITTER PRO-

GRAM (Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver)

s07az13

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed ac-

cording to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain open throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, then back to “ON”

again and leave the ignition “ON”

throughout the programming process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating

that the system has entered the

transmitter learn mode.

5. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to pro-

gram.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that

the system has learned the transmit-

ter. Upon successful programming,

the remote start confirmation trans-

mitter button will flash one time.

STARTING AND OPERATING

340

(343,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept up

to eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is

closed or after 2 minutes.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

s07az09

NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected, it

will be necessary to start the vehicle a

minimum of one time using the key prior

to activating the remote engine start

system. This is required to allow the

vehicle electronic systems to resynchro-

nize.

Changing the battery

s07az0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the remote

engine start transmitter when re-

placing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any removed

parts; children could swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if an

incorrect replacement battery is

used. Replace only with the same

or equivalent type of battery.

. Battery should not be exposed to

excessive heat such as sunshine,

fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing Battery of Access Key Fob”

�P526.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-

2450) supplied in your remote engine

start transmitter should last approxi-

mately one year, depending on usage.

When the battery begins to weaken, you

will notice a decrease in range (distance

from the vehicle that your remote control

operates). Follow the instructions below

to change the remote engine start trans-

mitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side lower left

corner of the transmitter.

S_703126-MW

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

341

(344,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small

flat-head screwdriver.

S_703127-MW

S_703128-MW

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove

the battery and replace with new one.

Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the

old battery before removing it to

ensure that the new battery is inserted

properly (battery “+” should be pointed

away from the transmitter circuit board

on battery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw

and test the remote engine start

system.

CERTIFICATION FOR REMOTE

ENGINE STARTER

s07az23

U.S.-spec. models

s07az2301

ZOM0993-W

STARTING AND OPERATING

342

(345,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Canada-spec. models

s07az2302

ZOM0994-W

7-7. CONTINUOUSLY VARI-

ABLE TRANSMISSION

s07bg

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position

into the “D” or “R” position while

depressing the accelerator pedal. This

may cause the vehicle to lurch forward

or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to observe these precau-

tions could cause damage to the

transmission.

– Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle has com-

pletely stopped.

– Do not shift from the “D” posi-

tion into the “R” position or vice

versa until the vehicle has

completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position when

the brake is applied or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the transmission

fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set in

a forward driving position or move

the vehicle forward by inertia with

the select lever set in the “R”

position. Doing so may result in an

unexpected accident or malfunc-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

343

(346,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION FEATURES

s07bg06

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. For some models, it also

has a manual mode or an “L” position.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant temperature

is still low, the transmission will shift at

higher engine speeds than when the

coolant temperature is sufficiently

high in order to shorten the warm-up

time and improve driveability. The

gearshift timing will automatically shift

to the normal timing after the engine

has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid is

replaced, you may feel that the trans-

mission operation is somewhat unu-

sual. This results from invalidation of

data which the on-board computer has

collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous heavy

load conditions such as climbing a

long, steep hill, the engine speed,

vehicle speed and air conditioning

system cooling performance may

automatically be reduced. This is not a

malfunction. This phenomenon re-

sults from the engine control function

maintaining the cooling performance

of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle

speed will return to a normal speed

when the engine is able to maintain

the optimum cooling performance

after the heavy load decreases. Driv-

ing under a heavy load must be

performed with extreme care.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

times, depending on varying driving

conditions, a chain operating noise

may be heard that is characteristic of

this type of system.

. Place the shift boot to the original

position after it is lifted. If the select

lever is operated with the shift boot in

the rolled up position, the shift boot

may have tension and it may disturb

the select lever operation.

SELECT LEVER

s07bg01

S_703264-W

Select lever button

STARTING AND OPERATING

344

(347,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703265-W

Models with “L” position

Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button in

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has an “L” or “M”

gate.

NOTE

. For some models, to protect the

engine while the select lever is in the

“P” or “N” position, the engine is

controlled so that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

. When you change the select lever

position, make sure to move the select

lever firmly to the selected position.

P (Park)

s07bg0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmis-

sion.

To shift the select lever from the “P” to any

other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the select

lever. This prevents the vehicle from

lurching when it is started.

R (Reverse)

s07bg0102

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “ACC” position, the movement of

the select lever from the “N” to “R”

position is only possible by depressing

the brake pedal. For details, refer to “Shift

Lock Function” �P346.

N (Neutral)

s07bg0103

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission

is neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the select

lever in the “N” (neutral) position.

Engine braking has no effect in this

condition and the risk of an accident is

consequently increased.

D (Drive)

s07bg0104

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and

continuously into a suitable gear accord-

ing to the vehicle speed and the accel-

eration you require. Also, while driving up

and down a hill, the transmission assists

and controls the driving performance and

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

345

(348,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

engine braking while corresponding to

the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position.

The transmission will automatically

downshift. In this case, the transmission

will operate like a conventional automatic

transmission. When you release the

pedal, the transmission will return to the

original gear position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the

steering wheel is operated while driving in

the “D” position, the transmission will

temporarily switch to the manual mode. In

this mode, you can shift to any gear

position using the shift paddles. For

details about the manual mode, refer to

“Selection of Manual Mode” �P347.

Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the

transmission will switch from the manual

mode back to the “D” position for normal

driving.

While climbing a grade:

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift

is prevented from taking place when the

accelerator is released. This minimizes

the chance of subsequent downshifting to

a lower gear when accelerating again.

This prevents repeated upshifting and

downshifting resulting in a smoother

operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift, de-

pending on the way the accelerator pedal

is depressed to accelerate the vehicle

again.

SHIFT LOCK FUNCTION

s07bg04

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and the brake pedal

is depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved

from the “P” position to any other

position before the brake pedal is

depressed. Depress the brake pedal

first, and then operate the select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the key from the “ACC” position to the

“LOCK” position and remove the key

from the ignition key cylinder (models

without “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the push-button ignition switch to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”).

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” position while the select lever is

in the “N” position, the select lever

may not be moved to the “P” position

without depressing the brake pedal

and pressing the select lever button.

Shift lock release

s07bg0401

If the select lever cannot be operated,

turn the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position, then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the select lever button

pressed and the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, check

and confirm the following and release the

shift lock accordingly.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion” �P347.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:

Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

If the select lever still does not move, refer

to “Shift lock release using the shift lock

release portion” �P347.

STARTING AND OPERATING

346

(349,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

If the shift lock cannot be released without

using the shift lock release button in the

above cases, there may be a malfunction

in the shift lock system or the vehicle

control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an in-

spection as soon as possible.

Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion

s07bg0402

Perform the following procedure to re-

lease the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver

into the two slits and then lift upward.

S_703266-W

Slit

3. Remove the center tray or wireless

charger (if equipped).

S_703132-W

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the shift lock release portion,

and then move the select lever.

S_703133-W

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an in-

spection as soon as possible.

SELECTION OF MANUAL

MODE (If Equipped)

s07bg02

S_703134-W

With the vehicle either moving or sta-

tionary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

347

(350,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703267-W

Upshift indicator

Downshift indicator

Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indi-

cator and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate. The gear

position indicator shows the currently

selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear

range. The upshift and downshift indica-

tors show when a gearshift is possible.

When the upshift indicator “

” is on,

upshifting is possible. When the down-

shift indicator “

” is on, downshifting is

possible. When both indicators are on,

upshifting and downshifting are both

possible. When the vehicle stops (for

example, at traffic signals), the downshift

indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

S_703136-W

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the

“M” position. While driving with the select

lever in the “D” position, if you change

gears by operating the shift paddle, the

gear position indicator illuminates and

shows the current gear condition.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the

shift paddles. Doing so may result in

accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points carefully

and bear them in mind when using the

manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps

will be emitted to warn you that the

downshift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the trans-

mission will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmission

fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL

TEMP warning light will illuminate.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light turns off.

STARTING AND OPERATING

348

(351,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SELECTION OF “L” (If

Equipped)

s07bg03

S_703134-W

“L” is for using engine braking when going

down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move

the select lever from the “D” position to

the “L” position.

S_703137-W

When selected, the indicator “L” will

illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “L”, move the select lever to

the “D” position.

DRIVING TIPS

s07bg05

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull

away from a standstill safely and

easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of

the manual mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”

or “R” position.

. Make sure to apply the parking brake

when parking your vehicle. Do not

hold the vehicle with only the trans-

mission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using

the “D” position. Use the brake in-

stead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly accel-

erates or rapidly pulls away from a

standstill. This phenomenon does not

indicate a malfunction.

NOTE

If the accelerator and brake pedals are

depressed at the same time, driving

torque may be restrained. This is not a

malfunction.

STARTING AND OPERATING

349

(352,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-8. SI-DRIVE

s07bc

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.

Your vehicle is equipped with one of the

following combination features:

. Intelligent (I) mode and Sport (S)

mode

. Intelligent (I) mode and Sport Sharp

(S#) mode

Intelligent (I) mode is selected when the

push-button ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position. By adjusting the

SI-DRIVE switch, the character of the

power unit changes.

INTELLIGENT (I) MODE

s07bc02

S_703138-W

The linear acceleration characteristic of

the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal

driving usage.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

SPORT (S) MODE

s07bc03

S_703139-W

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

SPORT SHARP (S#) MODE

s07bc04

S_703144-W

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating

level of engine performance and control.

The throttle becomes more responsive

regardless of the engine speed. Deliver-

ing maximum driving enjoyment, this

mode is ideal for tackling twisting roads

and for merging or overtaking other

vehicles on the freeway with confidence.

STARTING AND OPERATING

350

(353,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SI-DRIVE SWITCH

s07bc01

S_703140-W

To select the intelligent (I) mode, press

the “I” side of the switch.

To select the Sport (S) mode/the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode, press the “S” side/the

“S#” side of the switch.

NOTE

. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink,

the SI-DRIVE system may be mal-

functioning. Contact your SUBARU

dealer.

. The default mode of the SI-DRIVE

system is the Intelligent (I) mode.

Once you turn off the engine, the

previous setting mode is canceled and

the SI-DRIVE system returns to the

Intelligent (I) mode the next time you

turn on the engine.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light illuminates, the

SI-DRIVE mode changes to the In-

telligent (I) mode. In this case, it is not

possible to change to another mode.

. The SI-DRIVE mode will not be

affected even if the SI-DRIVE switch is

pressed while X-MODE is activated.

At this time, the buzzer will sound

twice.

7-9. POWER STEERING

s07aj

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system.

S_703141-W

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the power steering warning

light on the combination meter illuminates

to inform the driver that the warning

system is functioning properly. Then, if

the engine started, the warning light turns

off to inform the driver that the steering

power assist is operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning light

is illuminated, there may be more

resistance when the steering wheel is

operated. Drive carefully to the near-

est SUBARU dealer and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering control

system may temporarily limit the power

assist in order to prevent the system

components, such as the control compu-

ter and drive motor, from overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

351

(354,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The steering wheel remains in the fully

turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resistance

when steering. However, this is not a

malfunction. Normal steering force will be

restored after the steering wheel is not

operated for a while and the power

steering control system has an opportu-

nity to cool down. However, if the power

steering is operated in a non-standard

way which causes power assist limitation

to occur too frequently, this may result in a

malfunction of the power steering control

system.

7-10. BRAKING

s07ak

BRAKING TIPS

s07ak01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the brakes

and needless wear on the brake pads.

When the brakes get wet

s07ak0101

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the

vehicle at a safe speed while lightly

depressing the brake pedal to heat up the

brakes.

Use of engine braking

s07ak0102

Remember to make use of engine brak-

ing in addition to foot braking. When

descending a grade, if only the foot brake

is used, the brakes may start working

improperly because of brake fluid over-

heating, caused by overheated brake

pads. To help prevent this, shift into a

lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

Braking when a tire is punctu-

red

s07ak0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

BRAKE SYSTEM

s07ak02

Two separate circuits

s07ak0201

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

STARTING AND OPERATING

352

(355,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

Electronic brake booster

s07ak0207

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic

brake booster to provide additional brak-

ing force. Do not turn off the ignition

switch while driving because that will turn

off the brake booster, resulting in poor

braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

NOTE

When the following operations are per-

formed, an operating sound from the

electronic brake boost control module

may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

. The brake pedal was operated.

. The driver’s door was opened.

. The EyeSight function was activated.

. Several minutes have passed after the

engine stopped.

Supplemental booster function when

pressure fails:

If there is a malfunction in the brake

system, the power for the braking will be

stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-

sure of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is

operating, an operation sound and brake

pedal vibration may be generated.

Brake assist system

s07ak0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capability.

Always use the utmost care when

driving regarding vehicle speed and

safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the brake

assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance sys-

tem. It assists the brake power when the

driver cannot depress the brake pedal

strongly and the brake power is insuffi-

cient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following phe-

nomena occur. However, even though

these occur, they do not indicate any

malfunctions, and the brake assist sys-

tem is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and generates

a greater braking force.

. You might hear the sound of ABS

operating from the engine compart-

ment.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

353

(356,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

DISC BRAKE PAD WEAR

WARNING INDICATORS

s07ak03

S_703142-MW

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking,

immediately have your vehicle inspected

by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)

s07al

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving

– overconfidence because you are

driving with an ABS equipped vehicle

could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other vehi-

cles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over newly fallen snow, stopping

distances may be longer for a

vehicle with the ABS than one

without. When driving under these

conditions, therefore, reduce your

speed and leave ample distance

from other vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not pump

the brake pedal since doing so may

defeat the operation of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking

or braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when

the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING

354

(357,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ABS SELF-CHECK

s07al01

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating noise of the

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

being carried out and does not indicate

any abnormal condition.

ABS WARNING LIGHT

s07al02

Refer to “ABS Warning Light” �P182.

7-12. ELECTRONIC BRAKE

FORCE DISTRIBUTION

(EBD) SYSTEM

s07am

The EBD system maximizes the effec-

tiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

function fails, the EBD system also stops

working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a

slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is

normal and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

EBD SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS

s07am01

S_703143-W

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD

system, the system stops working and the

following warning lights illuminate simul-

taneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

355

(358,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

If all of the warning lights remain on even

though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid level may be low or there could

be a problem with the EBD system. Park

the vehicle in a safe place immediately

and contact a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous. This

indicates your brake system may

not be working properly. If the light

remains on, have the brakes in-

spected by a SUBARU dealer

immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-13. VEHICLE DYNAMICS

CONTROL SYSTEM

s07an

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving

– overconfidence because you are

driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system equipped vehicle could

easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be used

when driving on snow-covered or

icy roads; in addition, vehicle

speed should be reduced consid-

erably. Simply having a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be

able to avoid accidents in any

situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is an indication that

the road being traveled on has a

slippery surface; since having Ve-

hicle Dynamics Control is no guar-

antee that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation should

be seen as a sign that the speed of

the vehicle should be reduced

considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or an

axle are removed from a vehicle

equipped with the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system, have an

inspection of that system per-

formed by an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure that

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is operating properly.

– All four wheels should be fitted

STARTING AND OPERATING

356

(359,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

with tires of the same size,

type, and brand. Furthermore,

the amount of wear should be

the same for all four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

tire inflation pressure label at-

tached to the driver’s side door

pillar.

– When replacing a flat tire, use

only the specified temporary

spare tire. However, even with

the specified temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem will be reduced.

. If non-matching tires are used, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may not operate correctly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed

to prevent spinning of the driving wheels

on slippery road surfaces, thereby help-

ing to maintain traction and directional

control. Activation of this function is

indicated by flashing of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control operation indicator

light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is de-

signed to help maintain directional stabi-

lity by suppressing the wheels’ tendency

to slide sideways during steering opera-

tions. Activation of this function is indi-

cated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal when the

following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake pedal

is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating noise from the engine

compartment is heard briefly when

starting the engine and when driv-

ing off after starting the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt when

driving off after starting the engine.

. In the following circumstances, the

vehicle may be less stable than it feels

to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system may therefore oper-

ate. Such operation does not indicate

a system malfunction.

– On gravel-covered or rutted roads

– On unfinished roads

– When the vehicle is towing a trailer

– When the vehicle is fitted with snow

tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. It is always important to reduce speed

when approaching a corner, even if

the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle

Dynamics Control.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

VEHICLE DYNAMICS CON-

TROL SYSTEM MONITOR

s07an01

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control

Warning Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control

Operation Indicator Light” �P187 and

“Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator

Light” �P188.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

357

(360,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TO TURN ON/OFF THE VEHI-

CLE DYNAMICS CONTROL

SYSTEM

s07an07

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, operate the center information

display. For details, refer to the following

sections.

– “Vehicle Dynamics Control icon”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Vehicle Dynamics Control icon”

�P224 (11.6-inch display models)

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip

by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system temporarily may help to

escape from the following situations. Turn

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off

when necessary.

. A standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. Extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light on the combination meter

illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system will be deactivated. When

“Vehicle Dynamics Control” has been

touched again to reactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

turns off.

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

helps prevent unstable vehicle motion

such as skidding using control of the

brakes and engine power. Do not turn

off the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unless it is absolutely neces-

sary. If you must turn off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, drive very

carefully based on the road surface

condition.

NOTE

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control” has

been touched to deactivate the Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

automatically reactivates itself the

next time the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and the

engine is restarted.

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control” has

been touched to deactivate the Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system, the

vehicle’s running performance is

comparable with that of a vehicle that

does not have a Vehicle Dynamics

Control system. Do not deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system ex-

cept when absolutely necessary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, com-

ponents of the brake control system

may still activate. When the brake

control system is activated, the Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control operation indi-

cator light flashes.

STARTING AND OPERATING

358

(361,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-14. X-MODE (If Equipped)

s07bi

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with

X-MODE could easily lead to a

serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving a vehicle with hill

descent control function could ea-

sily lead to a serious accident. Be

especially careful, and depress the

brake pedal if necessary when

driving on extremely steep down-

hill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads.

Failure to control the vehicle’s

speed may cause a loss of control

and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-MODE, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having

X-MODE does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activate X-MODE when you en-

counter a very slippery surface at

low speed. However, having

X-MODE is no guarantee that full

vehicle control will be maintained

at all times and under all condi-

tions. When activating X-MODE,

the speed of the vehicle should be

reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or an

axle are removed from a vehicle,

have the system inspected by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precautions

in order to ensure that X-MODE is

operating properly:

– All four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size,

type, and brand. Furthermore,

the amount of wear should be

the same for all four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

– Use only the special temporary

spare tire to replace a flat tire.

With a normal temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of

X-MODE is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may be

temporarily disabled. In this case,

the hill descent control indicator

light will disappear. When the hill

descent control indicator light dis-

appears, the hill descent control

function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system

of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system, etc. for driving

with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE,

you can drive more comfortably even in

slippery road conditions including uphill

and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function,

you can keep the vehicle at a consistent

speed driving downhill. If the vehicle

speed is likely to increase, the brake

control system will be activated to adjust

the vehicle speed.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

359

(362,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE

X-MODE

s07bi01

S_703268-W

Models with 1 mode

Models with 2 modes (DEEP SNOW/

MUD, SNOW/DIRT)

To activate or deactivate X-MODE, oper-

ate the center information display. Refer

to “Car settings icon” �P225 (11.6-inch

display models).

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate X-MODE

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is

activated, a buzzer will sound once

and X-MODE will be deactivated.

X-MODE will automatically reactivate

when the vehicle speed drops below

22 mph (35 km/h).

– When you use the cruise control

after X-MODE is automatically de-

activated, X-MODE will not be

automatically reactivated when the

vehicle speed drops below 22 mph

(35 km/h).

. While the engine is running, if any of

the following conditions is met,

X-MODE will be deactivated. In this

case, it is not possible to activate

X-MODE. Also, the SI-DRIVE mode

will change to the Intelligent (I) mode

and it will not be possible to change to

the other modes.

– The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator light illu-

minates.

– The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

– The ABS warning light illuminates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. The Auto Start Stop system will be

stopped while X-MODE is activated.

. If there is a possibility that the engine

could overheat because of a tem-

perature increase of the engine cool-

ant, it is not possible to activate

X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is

activated, X-MODE will be deacti-

vated when the engine coolant tem-

perature increases. In this case, the

SI-DRIVE mode will change to the

Intelligent (I) mode.

Models with 2 modes:

. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on

a snow-covered road where the points

of contact between the tires and road

surface are visible, or for driving on an

unpaved road.

. DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for

driving on a road covered with deep

snow where the points of contact

between the tires and road surface are

not visible, or for driving on a muddy

road.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL

FUNCTION

s07bi03

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when X-MODE is activated

and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

STARTING AND OPERATING

360

(363,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12

mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal

is depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill descent

control function may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is needed

(e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary the

vehicle speed using the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the stop lights will

illuminate.

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient of

the road.

. The hill descent control function may

be considered normal when the fol-

lowing conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard briefly

from the engine compartment

while the hill descent control func-

tion is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder

than usual etc.) when the brake

pedal is depressed during hill

descent control function operation.

Hill descent control indicator

light

s07bi0301

S_703146-W

This indicator appears while the hill

descent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. It will disappear when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed reaches more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING

361

(364,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-15. TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

s07ao

The tire pressure monitoring system

provides the driver with a warning mes-

sage by sending a signal from a sensor

that is installed in each wheel when tire

pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused by running

over a sharp object).

WARNING

S_703147-W

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, never

brake suddenly. Instead, perform

the following procedure. Otherwise

an accident involving serious ve-

hicle damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure to

the COLD tire pressure shown

on the tire inflation pressure

label on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures increase

accordingly. Be sure to let the tires

cool thoroughly before adjusting

their pressures to the standard

values shown on the tire inflation

pressure label. Refer to “Tires and

Wheels” �P506. The tire pressure

monitoring system does not func-

tion when the vehicle is stationary.

After adjusting the tire pressures,

increase the vehicle speed to at

least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the

TPMS rechecking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should turn

off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If

you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P459.

. When a replacement tire is

mounted or a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure sen-

sor/transmitter being transferred,

the low tire pressure warning light

will illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute. This

indicates the TPMS is unable to

monitor all four road wheels. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible for tire and sensor

replacement and/or system reset-

ting.

STARTING AND OPERATING

362

(365,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This may

cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

tire pressure monitoring system will

not function properly.

CERTIFICATION FOR TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

s07ao01

ZOM0993-W

TPMS SCREEN

s07ao05

S_307558-W

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P201.

7-16. PARKING YOUR VEHI-

CLE

s07ap

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children or

pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or

sunny days, the temperature in a

closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause severe

or possibly fatal injuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as they

may burn easily if they come near

hot engine or exhaust system

parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passenger

compartment, occupants in the

vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

ELECTRONIC PARKING

BRAKE

s07ap03

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-

nic parking brake. You can apply/release

the parking brake by operating the elec-

tronic parking brake switch.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

363

(366,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703269-W

Electronic parking brake switch

Indicator light

Release the electronic parking brake

Apply the electronic parking brake

To apply:

Depress the brake pedal and pull up the

electronic parking brake switch.

S_703150-W

When the parking brake is applied, the

following indicator lights illuminate.

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light on the combination meter (for

details, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake Indicator Light” �P184.)

. The indicator light on the electronic

parking brake switch

To release:

Press the electronic parking brake switch

firmly while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the parking brake may

be released and an accident may

occur.

. If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle

in a safe location, use tire stops

under the tires to prevent the

vehicle from moving and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

. If the electronic parking brake is

operated under the following con-

ditions, the electronic parking

brake indicator light may flash.

– The brake is overheated.

– The vehicle is on a steep slope.

In such cases, the vehicle may

start to move which may lead to an

accident. Always use the tire

stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking brake

cannot be applied due to a mal-

function, contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspec-

tion. If you have to park your

vehicle in such conditions, perform

the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select lever

cannot be shifted into the “P”

position, you must release shift

lock. Refer to “Shift Lock

Function” �P346.

– Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing.

STARTING AND OPERATING

364

(367,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Never drive with the parking brake

applied. Doing so will cause un-

necessary brake pad wear. Before

driving off, always make sure that

the parking brake has been re-

leased and the brake system

warning light has turned off.

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is needed

(e.g., when parking on a steep

slope while towing a trailer).

NOTE

. The parking brake will not be released

under the following conditions even if

the electronic parking brake switch is

pressed.

– The ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

– The brake pedal is not depressed.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking

brake. Therefore, operating sounds

from the motors will be heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Make sure that the motor

sounds are heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the

electronic parking brake operation is

prohibited temporarily, if the electronic

parking brake switch is operated, a

chirp sound is heard and the electronic

parking brake indicator light flashes.

. When you cannot release the parking

brake due to, for example, a system

malfunction, contact your SUBARU

dealer and have your SUBARU dealer

release the parking brake.

. If the operation of the electronic

parking brake switch is stopped mid-

way or performed extremely slowly,

the system may detect an error and

turn on the brake system warning light.

However, this does not indicate a

malfunction if the warning light turns

off after operating the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake has

not been used for a long period of

time, the electronic parking brake may

operate automatically after the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position. This occurs due to checking

the proper operation of the electronic

parking brake and does not indicate a

malfunction.

. If the electronic parking brake switch is

malfunctioning and the electronic

parking brake cannot be released,

refer to the instructions described in

“Automatic release function by accel-

erator pedal” �P366.

. After activating the electronic parking

brake, you may hear a short sound

several minutes after the electronic

parking brake indicator light and the

indicator light on the electronic parking

brake switch illuminate as the system

confirms proper engagement. This

sound is different from the apply and

release sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

This is a normal operating sound

under any of these conditions.

. The Auto Start Stop system is deac-

tivated while the electronic parking

brake is applied.

. If you operate the electronic parking

brake switch while the Auto Start Stop

system is activated, the Auto Start

Stop system will be deactivated. The

electronic parking brake will activate

after the engine is restarted. After the

electronic parking brake indicator light

is illuminated, release your foot from

the brake pedal.

. When starting the engine or restarting

the engine using the Auto Start Stop

system, if you operate the electronic

parking brake switch, the electronic

parking brake indicator light may flash

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

365

(368,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

temporarily. However, this is not a

malfunction if the light turns off after

the electronic parking brake is deacti-

vated.

Automatic release function by

accelerator pedal

s07ap0301

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The park-

ing brake will be automatically released

by depressing the accelerator pedal.

However, the automatic release function

does not operate under the following

conditions.

. Any door (other than the rear gate) is

open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the electronic parking brake switch turn

off.

NOTE

Even if you have applied the parking

brake, the parking brake will be automa-

tically released when the accelerator

pedal is depressed.

Electronic parking brake sys-

tem warning

s07ap0304

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light turns

on, the electronic parking brake sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Immedi-

ately stop your vehicle in the nearest

safe location and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Electro-

nic parking brake system warning”

�P184.

PARKING TIPS

s07ap02

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake.

. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)

position.

Never rely on the transmission alone to

hold the vehicle.

S_703152-MW

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When

the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the

curb.

S_703153-MW

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a bumper under

guard (optional), pay attention to

blocks and other obstructions on the

ground when parking. The underspoi-

ler could be damaged by contact with

STARTING AND OPERATING

366

(369,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

them.

AUTO VEHICLE HOLD FUNC-

TION

s07ap04

The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-

matically keep the vehicle stopped even

after releasing the brake pedal when the

vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at

traffic signals.

WARNING

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function on a steep hill or slippery

road. The vehicle may move even

when using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, causing serious injury or

accidents.

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function to park the vehicle. The

vehicle may move unexpectedly,

causing serious injury or accidents.

Make sure to shift the select lever

to the “P” position and apply the

electronic parking brake in the

following cases.

– When you are going to park

your vehicle.

– When passengers are getting

in or out of the vehicle.

– When you are loading or un-

. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, do not release the brake

pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator illuminates. The vehicle

may move unexpectedly, causing

serious injury or accidents.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function in the following cases.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly, causing serious in-

jury or accidents.

– When washing your vehicle in

an automatic car wash

– When being towed

CAUTION

. When stopping on a steep slope

with the Auto Vehicle Hold function

turned on, the electronic parking

brake may be automatically ap-

plied. Then the electronic parking

brake indicator light will flash. In

such a case, depress and hold the

brake pedal while stopping. Other-

wise, the vehicle may move.

. When being towed, turn off the

Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto

Vehicle Hold function when stopping on

an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is turned off, the vehicle may roll

backward when driving off.

To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

s07ap0401

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, operate the center information

display. For details, refer to the following

sections.

– “Auto Vehicle Hold icon” �P215 (dual

7.0-inch display models)

– “Auto Vehicle Hold icon” �P224 (11.6-

inch display models)

S_703151-W

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

367

(370,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned ON, the Auto Vehicle Hold indica-

tor light will turn on.

NOTE

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the

Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned

on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle

Hold indicator light will turn off and the

brake system warning light will turn on.

. Every time when starting the engine,

the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be

set to “OFF”.

To operate the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

s07ap0402

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal when all of the following conditions

are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold

function will operate.

. Driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

S_703151-W

While the vehicle is kept stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto

Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.

To release the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

s07ap0403

Perform any of the following operations to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

. Depress the accelerator pedal.

. Depress the brake pedal again.

. Apply the electronic parking brake.

. Shift the select lever to the “P” position

with the brake pedal pressed.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function operating with the center

information display while depressing

the brake pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will change from flashing to illumi-

nated.

Under any of the following conditions, the

Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-

matically released and the electronic

parking brake will be automatically ap-

plied.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has

been in operation for 10 minutes.

. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. The vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is

malfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator light will turn off and the elec-

tronic parking brake indicator light will

illuminate.

Tips

s07ap0404

. When the electronic parking brake is

automatically applied with the vehicle

kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, release the electronic park-

ing brake by either of the following

operations before starting off. Then

make sure that the electronic parking

brake indicator light is off.

– Depress the accelerator pedal with

the driver’s seatbelt fastened and

with the doors closed.

– Press the electronic parking brake

switch with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

368

(371,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Under certain conditions, including a

malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a

warning buzzer will sound and a

warning message will appear on the

combination meter display (color

LCD). All warning messages should

be strictly observed.

. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot

be kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle

Hold function. In such a case, depress

and hold the brake pedal.

. When stopping on a steep slope with

the Auto Vehicle Hold function acti-

vated, the electronic parking brake

may be automatically applied after

stopping, then the electronic parking

brake indicator light may flash. In such

a case, depress and hold the brake

pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the

vehicle may move. When getting out

of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat

surface, then apply the electronic

parking brake.

. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

does not illuminates even after touch-

ing “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with the

operating conditions met, the function

may have a malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the Auto

Vehicle Hold function is keeping your

vehicle stopped. This is normal, and

does not represent a malfunction.

. When you depress the brake pedal to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion, an operation sound or vibration

may be generated, or the brake pedal

may return slowly. This is not a

malfunction.

. While the vehicle is kept stopped by

the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. However,

this is not a malfunction.

. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, depress the brake pedal

firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle

Hold may not operate.

EMERGENCY BRAKE

s07ap05

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you

can stop the vehicle by pulling the

electronic parking brake switch continu-

ously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

and the indicator light on the electronic

parking brake switch illuminate and a

chirp sounds.

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in case

of an emergency. If the emergency

brake is excessively used, the brake

parts will wear down faster or the

brake may not work sufficiently due to

brake overheating.

NOTE

. While using the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

and the indicator light on the electronic

parking brake switch illuminate and a

chirp sounds.

. While using the emergency brake, a

sound may be heard from the engine

compartment. This is the operating

sound of the brake that is activated by

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

and does not indicate a malfunction.

STARTING AND OPERATING

369

(372,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-17. HILL START ASSIST

SYSTEM

s07au

The Hill start assist system temporarily

holds the vehicle so that it does not roll

downhill even if the brake pedal is

released when starting on a slope. This

makes it easier to start on a slope.

S_703270-W

Starting forward facing uphill

Starting backward facing downhill

Brake pedal

The Hill start assist system operates

when the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed.

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the accelerator

pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake

pedal is released, apply more braking

power by depressing the brake pedal

again.

CAUTION

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver to

START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents when

the vehicle is parked on a slope, be

sure to firmly set the parking brake.

When setting the parking brake,

make sure that the vehicle remains

stationary when the brake pedal is

released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will deactivate, causing an

accident.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in

the following cases.

STARTING AND OPERATING

370

(373,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703155-W

. When starting backward facing uphill

. When starting forward facing downhill

. While the parking brake is applied

. While the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light is illuminated. Refer to

“Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning

Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-

eration Indicator Light” �P187.

. While the Auto Start Stop warning light

is illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start

Stop Warning Light (Yellow)” �P194.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start

assist system may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is needed

(e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

. A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

. When using the Hill start assist sys-

tem, a braking effect may be felt even

after the brake pedal has been re-

leased.

. The Hill start assist system will deac-

tivate when the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is activated.

STARTING AND OPERATING

371

(374,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-18. AUTO START STOP

SYSTEM

s07bh

The Auto Start Stop system is designed to

automatically stop and restart the engine

when the vehicle is stationary for a short

period of time (while waiting for a traffic

light or in a traffic jam) after the engine

has warmed up. The system operates in

order to reduce fuel consumption, ex-

haust emissions and undesired idling

noise.

SYSTEM OPERATION

s07bh01

WARNING

Turn off the Auto Start Stop system

before towing the vehicle.

CAUTION

The Auto Start Stop system is de-

signed to automatically stop and re-

start the engine for a short period of

time during idling. Do not use the

system when parking the vehicle

normally.

So that it can be used safely and

comfortably, in addition to driver opera-

tions, the Auto Start Stop system is

designed to constantly monitor the vehi-

cle conditions as well as the environment

inside and outside the vehicle, in order to

control stopping and restarting of the

engine.

After the vehicle has been completely

stopped by depressing the brake pedal

with the select lever in the “D” position,

the engine will be automatically stopped.

If you release the brake pedal with the

select lever kept in the “D” position, the

engine will be automatically restarted.

However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator light illuminates, the engine will

not restart.

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)

S_703156-W

If the engine is temporarily stopped by the

system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light

(green) on the combination meter will

illuminate in green. This indicator light will

turn off when the system restarts the

engine.

NOTE

. After starting the engine, if the vehicle

is left idling without being driven, the

Auto Start Stop system will not oper-

ate.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a special

high-performance battery. When re-

placing the vehicle battery, be sure to

replace it with a genuine SUBARU

battery (or equivalent) designed spe-

cifically for use in a vehicle equipped

with the Auto Start Stop system. For

details, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Operational conditions

s07bh0105

The engine can be automatically stopped

by the Auto Start Stop system when all of

the following conditions are met.

. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is off.*

. The airflow mode selection is set to a

mode other than “

” mode.

STARTING AND OPERATING

372

(375,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The rear window defogger is not in

use.

. X-MODE (if equipped) has been

turned off.

After the vehicle is stopped, the engine

will be automatically stopped when the

following conditions are met.

. The steering wheel is in the straight

ahead position.

. The steering wheel is not being

operated.

*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is illuminated,

the Auto Start Stop system may operate

when the system recovers from the mal-

function.

NOTE

. After the vehicle is stopped, the

engine may not automatically stop

under the following conditions.

– The vehicle is stopped on a road

with a steep slope.

– The vehicle is stopped by hard

braking.

. After the vehicle is stopped, the

engine may not automatically stop if

the brake pedal is not fully depressed.

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

firmly when stopping the vehicle.

. In the following cases, it may take

some time for the Auto Start Stop

system to operate.

– When the battery is discharged

because the vehicle has not been

used for a long period of time, etc.

– The coolant temperature is low.

– When the battery terminals have

been reconnected after replacing

the battery, etc.

Non-operational conditions

s07bh0106

In any of the following cases, the Auto

Start Stop system will not operate.

. When the Auto Start Stop warning

light/Auto Start Stop OFF indicator

light is illuminating.

. When the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light is illu-

minating.*

. The electronic parking brake is ap-

plied.

. When the engine hood is opened.

. When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently

warmed up.

. When the temperature of the CVT fluid

is abnormally high.

. When the vehicle battery is not in good

condition.

. When using the climate control sys-

tem, the temperature difference be-

tween the setting temperature and the

temperature inside the vehicle is sig-

nificant.

. When using the climate control sys-

tem, the amount of air flow is signifi-

cant.

*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is illuminated,

the Auto Start Stop system may operate

when the system recovers from the mal-

function.

NOTE

The Auto Start Stop system may not

operate in the following cases:

. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light or other

warning lights on the combination

meter are illuminated or flashing.

. You are driving the vehicle in a high-

elevation area.

Engine restart operational con-

ditions

s07bh0107

In any one of the following cases, the

engine will be automatically restarted

even if the brake pedal is kept depressed.

. When slightly releasing the brake

pedal on road with a steep slope and

the vehicle begins rolling.

. When further depressing the brake

pedal.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

373

(376,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. When depressing the accelerator

pedal.

. When you move the select lever to the

“R” position.

. When turning the steering wheel.

. When operating the electronic parking

brake switch.

. When activating X-MODE.

. When the air flow mode selection set

to “

” mode.

. When the climate control system can

no longer maintain the set tempera-

ture.

. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt.

. When opening the driver’s door.

. When activating the rear window

defogger.

. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function

is released, refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold

Function” �P367.

Engine restart non-operational

conditions

s07bh0108

WARNING

Do not open the engine hood when the

Auto Start Stop system is in operation.

It may cause the vehicle to move while

on a slope, the steering wheel opera-

tion may become heavy, or the brakes

may not work well, which can create

dangerous conditions.

To ensure safety, the engine will not be

automatically restarted if the engine hood

is opened when the Auto Start Stop

system is in operation, even if the brake

pedal is released. In this case, check the

surrounding area and restart the engine

by normal operation.

Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold opera-

tion indicator light is illuminated, the

engine will not restart.

NOTE

. When the Auto Start Stop system is in

operation, the brake pedal may feel

stiff. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

. When the battery is discharged, the

engine will be automatically restarted

even if you keep the brake pedal

depressed.

. In the following cases, the length of

time that the engine is temporarily

stopped by the Auto Start Stop system

may be shorter.

– When the climate control system is

in operation.

– When the outside temperature is

high, or when it is low (because the

climate control system can no

longer maintain the set tempera-

ture).

– When consumption of electricity by

electrical components is high.

. When the engine is automatically

restarted by the Auto Start Stop

system, the power provided via the

accessory power outlet will be re-

duced. Depending on the connected

appliance, the power of the appliance

may temporarily turn off.

Auto Start Stop warning light

(yellow)

s07bh0109

S_703156-W

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light is

illuminated in yellow, there may be a

STARTING AND OPERATING

374

(377,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

malfunction in the Auto Start Stop

system. When starting the engine

again after the Auto Start Stop warn-

ing light illuminates, if it is still illumi-

nating, we recommend that you have

your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

The Auto Start Stop warning light will

illuminate in yellow if you open the engine

hood when the engine has been tem-

porarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop

system.

In this case, to ensure safety, the engine

will not be automatically restarted, even if

you release the brake pedal. Use normal

operation to restart the engine.

To turn on/off the Auto Start

Stop system

s07bh0111

To turn the Auto Start Stop system on and

off, operate the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to the following

sections.

– “Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

S_703158-W

When the Auto Start Stop system is

turned OFF, the Auto Start Stop OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) will illuminate.

While the engine is temporarily stopped

by the system, if the Auto Start Stop

system turns off, the engine will be

restarted even if you do not release the

brake pedal.

NOTE

. If the engine is restarted when the

Auto Start Stop system is not opera-

tional and the ignition switch has been

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,

the Auto Start Stop system will turn on

again.

. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position when

leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so

could result in the battery discharging.

Auto Start Stop No Activity

Detected indicator light

s07bh0110

S_703159-W

If the operational conditions are not met

when the vehicle is stopped, the engine

will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No

Activity Detected indicator light will illu-

minate. It will turn off when the vehicle

begins to drive.

DISPLAYING THE AUTO START

STOP SYSTEM STATUS

s07bh02

Approximate indications of the time that

the engine has been stopped by the Auto

Start Stop system and/or the amount of

fuel saved can be displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to “Basic Screens”

�P201.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

375

(378,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SYSTEM WARNING

s07bh03

So that it can be used safely and

comfortably, the Auto Start Stop system is

designed to constantly monitor the vehi-

cle conditions as well as the environment

inside and outside the vehicle in addition

to driver operations, and to provide

various warnings to the driver via the

warning light and/or indicator light illumi-

nating and a buzzer sounding. For details

about the warning light and indicator light,

refer to “Auto Start Stop Warning Light

(Yellow)” �P194.

Warning buzzer

s07bh0301

The buzzer will sound when the engine

hood is opened while the engine is

stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.

When this occurs, the buzzer will stop

sounding when the following operations

are performed.

. The engine is restarted by normal

operation. (Refer to “Preparing to

Drive” �P329.)

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

Display of warning messages

s07bh0302

If a warning message is displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

while driving, a malfunction may have

occurred in the Auto Start Stop system. In

this case, the Auto Start Stop warning

light will illuminate. Have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

7-19. SURROUND VIEW

MONITOR (If Equipped)

s07bu

Surround View Monitor is a feature that

displays camera images on the center

information display to allow the driver to

check the blind spots of the vehicle. You

can use it to check the area in the front of

the vehicle, when starting the vehicle or

while driving, and the area to the rear of

the vehicle, when backing up. You can

also use it to check your surroundings

when parking the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never rely on only the Surround

View Monitor when driving the

vehicle. The image on the monitor

screen may appear different from

the vehicle’s actual surroundings.

If you drive the vehicle by viewing

only the monitor image, a collision

or an accident may occur. When

driving the vehicle, always remain

alert and the check the surrounding

traffic directly and by using the

mirrors.

. Do not use the Surround View

Monitor in the following situations.

– You are driving on a dirt road or

a road covered in snow.

– The camera malfunctions (e.g.

the lens or bracket is broken).

– The outside mirrors are re-

tracted.

– The front door is not fully

closed.

. If the outside temperature is low,

the monitor screen may become

dark or the image may become

dim. In particular, the image of a

moving object may appear dis-

torted or disappear from the

screen. Always remain alert and

check the surrounding traffic di-

rectly when driving.

STARTING AND OPERATING

376

(379,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

If there is a Surround View Monitor

system malfunction, an error message

“

” or “ ” is displayed on the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Malfunctions of the Center Information

Display” �P474.

HOW TO CHANGE THE DIS-

PLAY OF SURROUND VIEW

MONITOR

s07bu01

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, you can operate the select lever

and the view monitor switch to display the

image on the Surround View Monitor.

S_703271-W

View monitor switch

View icon

Checking your surroundings

while parked

s07bu0101

To display the 3D view of the vehicle’s

surroundings, press the view monitor

switch when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

S_703272-W

Vehicle icon

Vehicle angle icon

When the 3D view is displayed, the

display angle switches clockwise from the

starting position. When the view returns

to the starting position, the display angle

stops switching. You can also switch the

display angle by touching the vehicle

angle icon on the screen.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View Monitor

or change the screen to operate other

functions, the next time the image is

displayed, it will be displayed at the

previously displayed angle.

Checking the rearward

s07bu0102

When the select lever is move to “R”, the

image in the rearward direction is dis-

played. Pressing the view monitor switch

or touching the view icon while the image

of the rear camera is displayed will switch

the screen view.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

377

(380,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703273-W

Original screen

Rear view screen/Top view screen/

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

screen

Rear view screen/Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) screen

Top view screen

: Shift the select lever.

: Touch the view icon or press the view

monitor switch.

NOTE

. If you turn off the Surround View

Monitor or use it to operate another

function, the next time the image is

displayed, the previously displayed

screen will be shown. However, if the

top view screen is displayed at that

time, the next time the monitor image

is displayed, the rear view screen/

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

screen will be shown.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control” is

on, the rear-view image will be dis-

played on the center information dis-

play for a certain period of time after

the select lever is shifted from the “R”

position to another position (other than

the “P” position). To turn the function

on and off, refer to “Settings icon

(General settings)” �P227.

Checking the front

s07bu0103

When the view monitor switch is pressed

while the select lever is in the “N” or “D”

position, the front view is displayed.

S_703274-W

Original screen

Top view screen

Left-side view screen/Right-side view

screen/Front-top view screen

Front view screen/Front-top view

screen

: Press the view monitor switch.

: Touch the view icon.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View Monitor

or use it to operate another function, the

next time the image is displayed, the

STARTING AND OPERATING

378

(381,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

previously displayed screen will be

shown.

HOW TO CANCEL SURROUND

VIEW MONITOR

s07bu02

There are several ways to cancel Sur-

round View Monitor.

Manual cancellation

s07bu0201

The Surround View Monitor will be can-

celed by either of the following opera-

tions.

. Press the view monitor switch until the

original screen is displayed (when the

select lever is other than the “R”

position).

. Move the select lever to a position

other than the “R” position (when the

select lever is in the “R” position).

. Touch

(car settings icon).

. Touch

(HOME).

. Touch

(driver profiles icon).

Automatic cancellation

s07bu0202

If any of the following conditions are met,

the Surround View Monitor is canceled

automatically.

. When the select lever is other than in

the “R” position

– About 3 minutes have elapsed

since you pressed the view monitor

switch to access the Surround

View Monitor.

. When the select lever is not in the “R”

or “P” position

– The vehicle accelerates to 13 mph

(20 km/h) or more.

– You depress the brake pedal and

pull up the electronic parking brake

switch to apply the parking brake.

. When the select lever is in the “D” or

“R” position

– The select lever is shifted to the “P”

position.

HOW TO VIEW THE CAMERA

IMAGES

s07bu03

S_703309-W

Cameras

The camera image displays guiding lines

that provide information on the distance

and direction of travel of your vehicle, as

well as information on any vehicles you

are approaching.

CAUTION

. When you drive the vehicle, do not

rely only on the guiding lines. Make

sure that you check your sur-

roundings directly.

. The position and other information

provided by the guiding lines may

differ from the actual distance of

objects from the vehicle if it is tilting

at an angle relative to the road

surface due to the number of

passengers or the distribution of

cargo on board the vehicle.

NOTE

. Top view and rear view only: The

display of the predicted course line

linked to the steering angle can be

turned on/off by operating “Steering

Angle Lines” in the center information

display. To turn the function on and off,

refer to “Settings icon (General set-

tings)” �P227.

. The camera image may be hard to see

in the following situations. This is not a

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

379

(382,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

malfunction.

– Vehicle surroundings are dark

(such as at night).

– Ambient temperature outside the

vehicle is high or low.

– There is water or humidity on the

lens (such as in rainy weather).

– There is foreign material (such as

mud) on or near the camera.

– Sunlight or a headlight beam

shines directly shines toward the

camera lens.

. Under an artificial light such as a

fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp

or mercury lamp, the lighted portion

may appear to flicker (flicker phe-

nomenon).

. When the display is cold, the image

may leave traces or become darker

than usual, causing a difficulty in

viewing the screen. When driving your

vehicle, make sure that you check

your surroundings directly for traffic.

. The following conditions may affect

the appearance of the screen, but any

resulting image distortion on the

screen does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

– When humidity is high on a rainy

day, the camera lens becomes

foggy.

– When driving at night, the light from

a vehicle or building located ahead

shines in the direction of the

camera.

– When the vehicle is in a dark place

or when driving at night, the cam-

era image may be adjusted to

make image noise less visible.

Therefore, the image may look like a

monochromatic image or the image

colors may differ from the actual

colors. The image sharpness in the

center and in the four corners of the

screen may differ. This is not a

malfunction.

3D view

s07bu0301

S_703312-W

Vehicle icon

Vehicle angle icon

The 3D view displays the area around the

vehicle.

Top view

s07bu0302

S_703275-W

Vehicle icon

Predicted course line*

*: When the select lever is in the “R” position.

The top view displays an image of the

vehicle’s surroundings from above the

vehicle. This view is useful for checking

the vehicle’s surroundings when you are

driving.

STARTING AND OPERATING

380

(383,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Front view

s07bu0303

S_703276-W

Guiding lines

The guiding lines that indicate the width

and the front end of your vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

Side view

s07bu0304

S_703277-W

Front-of-vehicle guiding line

Side-of-vehicle guiding line

Center-of-front-tire guiding line

The guiding lines that indicate the width

and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

Rear view

s07bu0305

S_703278-W

Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

Vehicle centerline

Dynamic guidelines

Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA))

The help lines are a guide to help you

judge distances based on the screen

image.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

381

(384,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

RANGE OF SURROUND VIEW

MONITOR

s07bu04

S_703279-W

Camera to be used

Range of displayed image

Front camera

Side camera (right-hand side)

Rear camera

Side camera (left-hand side)

Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the vehicle

Vehicle overall length

Approx. 8 ft (2.5 m) from the vehicle

Vehicle overall width

WARNING

The range that can be viewed with the

camera is limited. Always make sure

that you check your surroundings

directly when the vehicle is in motion

and proceed slowly. If you do not, it

may cause an accident or injury.

NOTE

. The range of the displayed image may

differ depending on the status of your

vehicle or of the road surface.

. Because the Surround View Monitor

system uses a specially designed

lens, the sense of distance in the

displayed image is different from the

actual distance.

USING THE CAMERA

s07bu05

CAUTION

Obey the following instructions to

prevent a system malfunction.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the camera such as by hitting it with

an object. Striking the camera can

change the mounting angle.

. The camera unit is a waterproof

structure. Do not attempt to re-

move, disassemble or modify the

unit.

. Do not vigorously rub the camera

lens or polish it using a hard brush

or abrasive compounds. The lens

may be scratched, which can affect

the camera image.

. The camera lens is made of glass

or plastic. Do not allow any organic

solvent, body wax, oil film remover

or glass coating agent to become

attached on the lens surface. If any

becomes attached, remove it im-

mediately.

. Do not expose the camera lens to

any sudden temperature change

such as spraying hot water on it in

cold weather.

. Do not apply the water jet of a high

pressure washer to the camera or

the surrounding area when clean-

ing the vehicle. The force of the

water pressure can dislodge the

camera. Also, water may enter

inside the camera and cause a

malfunction.

. If the camera is exposed to any

impact, it can lead to a malfunction.

Have the camera inspected by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

. Do not use a steam cleaner under

any circumstances. Some types of

steam cleaners inject hot steam.

STARTING AND OPERATING

382

(385,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The camera surface may be da-

maged by a flying stone.

NOTE

If the camera lens is covered in dirt, the

system will not be able to produce a sharp

image. If there is foreign material on the

camera, such as water drops, snow or

mud, clean it with water and wipe away

any moisture with a soft cloth. If the

camera is heavily soiled, wash it using a

neutral detergent.

7-20. REAR VIEW CAMERA

s07br

S_703160-W

A rear view camera is attached to the rear

gate. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position and the select lever is set to

“R”, the rear view camera automatically

displays the rear view image behind the

vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses a

wide-angle lens, the image on the

monitor is different from the actual

view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on the

monitor is limited, always check the

rear view and the surrounding area

with your eyes and mirrors, and

move backward at a slow speed.

Moving backward only by checking

the rear view image from the

camera could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If smoke

comes out or you smell a strange

odor, stop using the rear view

camera immediately. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Continued use may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

. When washing your vehicle with a

high-pressure washer, do not allow

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

383

(386,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

water to touch the camera directly.

Entry of water in the camera lens

may result in condensation, mal-

function, fire or electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen

on the camera, you must be very

careful when removing it. Other-

wise, damage to the camera may

cause a fire or electric shock. Pour

water or lukewarm water over the

camera to remove mud and ice,

and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure to

use a fuse with the specified rating.

Use of a fuse with a different rating

may result in a malfunction.

. If you use the rear view camera for

a long time while the engine is not

operated, the battery may become

completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry

cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has a hard coating to

help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or cleaning

the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear

view camera may deteriorate.

. Strong light shined on the camera lens

may develop vertical lines around the

light source. This is not a malfunction.

. Under the fluorescent light, the display

may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

. If there is a malfunction on the center

information display, refer to “Malfunc-

tions of the Center Information Dis-

play” �P474.

HOW TO USE THE REAR VIEW

CAMERA

s07br01

When the select lever is set to “R”, the

rear view camera automatically displays

the rear view image from the vehicle.

When the lever is set to other positions,

the image before setting to “R” is dis-

played.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the select lever to “R”.

NOTE

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle inside mirror or the

outside mirror.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control” is

on, the rear view image will be

displayed on the center information

display for a certain period of time

after the select lever is shifted to a

position other than the “P” position

from “R”. To turn the function on and

off, refer to the following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

STARTING AND OPERATING

384

(387,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of the

camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light is shining directly on

the camera lens (occasionally,

there are vertical lines on the

screen).

VIEWING RANGE ON THE

SCREEN

s07br02

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with the

rear view camera is limited. Always be

sure to check with your eyes when

moving backward and proceed slowly.

Otherwise, it may cause an accident

or injury.

Range of view

S_703214-W

Image from camera

S_703163-MW

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view

camera looks shorter than the actual

distance.

Range of view

S_703164-MW

Image from camera

S_703165-MW

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

385

(388,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a

wide projection on its upper part such as a

sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

HELP LINES

s07br03

The help lines are a guide to help you

realize the actual distance from the

screen image.

S_703280-W

Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

Vehicle centerline

Dynamic guidelines

Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA)) (if equipped)

When the select lever is set to “R”, the

monitor screen displays the help lines

together with the rear view image.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range within several

seconds after turning on the ignition

switch, the warning message may not be

displayed. Wait for several seconds after

turning on the ignition switch before

shifting to the “R” range. Then, the

warning message will be displayed.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

Otherwise, it may cause an acci-

dent or injury.

. The actual position may be differ-

ent from the indication of the help

lines.

. Differences may occur due to the

number of passengers or the

loaded cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

inclined against the road, the

indication is different from the

actual position.

NOTE

When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the

dynamic guidelines will disappear on the

center information display. To turn the

dynamic guidelines on and off, refer to the

following sections.

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P210 (dual 7.0-inch display models)

– “Settings icon (General settings)”

�P227 (11.6-inch display models)

Difference between screen im-

age and actual road

s07br0301

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading con-

ditions or road conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING

386

(389,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

When there is an upward slope at the

back:

S_703281-MW

3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

When there is a downward slope at the

back:

S_703282-MW

3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther than

the actual distance as in an upward slope.

Feature of distance marker

s07br0302

S_703283-W

3 ft (1 m) line

10 ft (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or another

object close behind, distance cannot be

correctly displayed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

387

(390,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

7-21. BSD/RCTA (If

Equipped)

s07bm

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner

radar sensors with Blind Spot Detection

and Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions of BSD/RCTA are the

systems that detect objects and vehicles

to the rear and draw attention to the driver

when changing a lane or when driving in

reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the vehi-

cle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver in changing lanes or reversing

safely by monitoring the rear and side

areas of the vehicle. However, you

cannot rely on this system alone in

assuring the safety during a lane

change or reversing. Overconfidence

in this system could result in an

accident and lead to serious injury or

death. Since the system operation has

various limitations, the flashing or

illumination of the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light may be delayed,

or the warning buzzer may be delayed

or inoperative, even if there is a

vehicle traveling in a neighboring lane

or approaching your vehicle from

either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas of

the vehicle.

SYSTEM FEATURES

s07bm01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following

functions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on

an adjacent lane or a vehicle ap-

proaching at high speed while driving

the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the

vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

following features.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by radio wave-related laws ap-

plicable in the U.S. and other FCC

compliant countries, including Canada.

When driving your vehicle in countries

other than the U.S. and Canada, you

must obtain certification for the country

where you are driving the vehicle. For

more information on certification in the

U.S. and other FCC compliant countries,

including Canada, refer to “Certification

for the BSD/RCTA” �P395.

Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

s07bm0101

S_703284-MW

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of the

presence of vehicles in its blind spot.

. If the system detects a vehicle in its

blind spot, it warns the driver by

illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light(s) on the outside mirror

(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illu-

minating, the system warns the driver

of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

STARTING AND OPERATING

388

(391,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Lane Change Assist (LCA):

S_703285-MW

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes, it warns the driver

of dangers by illuminating the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light(s) on

the outside mirror(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illu-

minating, the system warns the driver

of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

s07bm0103

S_703286-MW

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side

when driving in reverse. This feature

helps the driver check the rear and side

areas of the vehicle when moving back-

ward.

If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching from either side while moving

backward, it warns the driver of dangers

in the following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s)

flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the center infor-

mation display.

Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA:

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

S_703287-MW

The detection range of the radar

sensors

Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

Vehicle that may not be detected

Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehicle

(B). Always be sure to check the

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

389

(392,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

S_703288-MW

The detection range of the radar

sensors

Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle (C)

is passing in front of your vehicle. Always

be sure to check the surroundings with

your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

OPERATING CONDITIONS

s07bm10

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of

the following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned

off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above

7 mph (12 km/h) (except when rever-

sing).

. The select lever is in the “R” position

(RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ap-

pears.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator does not appear (except

when reversing).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA

warning indicator will appear.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

appears, exercise proper caution. For

details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning

Indicator” �P394.

. In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA

will temporarily stop operating (or may

stop operating) and the BSD/RCTA

OFF indicator will appear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no

objects around (such as in a

desert) for a prolonged period of

time

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increases exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in the summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extremely

low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle voltage exceeds

the battery voltage rating

The BSD/RCTA will resume operation

once these conditions are corrected,

and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA

OFF indicator appears for a pro-

longed period of time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING

390

(393,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. The detectability of the radar sensors

is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection

may be impaired and the system may

not operate properly under the follow-

ing conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres to

the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather conditions

such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such as

snow-covered roads and through

puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing vehicles and objects.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that the

radar may not reflect (vehicles with

lower body height such as a trailer

with no cargo and sports cars)

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they are

in the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or

beside your vehicle when rever-

sing) (The system determines the

presence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the

radar sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-

most the same speed as your

vehicle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles traveling at a significantly

lower speed that you are trying to

overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighbor-

ing lane.

BSD/RCTA APPROACH INDI-

CATOR LIGHT/WARNING BUZ-

ZER

s07bm03

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the

following item(s) will operate to alert the

driver:

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light (when there are vehicles in the

neighboring lanes).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light and warning buzzer (when a

vehicle is approaching from the left or

right side while your vehicle is rever-

sing)

BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light

s07bm0301

S_703175-W

It is mounted on each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light is illuminating,

if the turn signal lever is operated

toward the side in which this light

turned on

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

391

(394,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

dimming function:

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty seeing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

under the following conditions.

– When sunlight shines directly on it

– When the headlight beams from a

vehicle traveling behind shines

directly on it

. While the illumination brightness con-

trol dial is in the fully upward position,

even if the headlights are turned on,

the brightness of the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light will not be

reduced. For details about the illumi-

nation brightness control dial, refer to

“Illumination Brightness Control”

�P174.

BSD/RCTA approach warning

buzzer (only when reversing)

s07bm0302

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light to warn the driver of

dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231

(11.6-inch display models).

Safety tips regarding the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light/

warning buzzer

s07bm0303

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

and the warning buzzer may be

delayed or the system may fail to issue

these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the

neighboring lane from a lane next

to the neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and

downhill grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring

lane are driving on the far side of

each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced

vehicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersec-

tion)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neigh-

boring lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by touching “Rear Vehi-

cle Detection (BSD/RCTA)”

– Immediately after the select lever is

shifted to the “R” position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

and the warning buzzer may be

delayed or the system may fail to issue

these warnings under the following

conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

STARTING AND OPERATING

392

(395,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703176-W

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close

to solid objects on the road or road

side (such as guardrails, tunnels and

sidewalls).

. When turning at an intersection in

urban areas, or a multilane intersec-

tion, the BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light may flash.

. If a building or a wall exists in the

reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light may flash and

the warning buzzer may sound.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes

away from your vehicle.

– When your vehicle drives on the

near side of its lane from the

corresponding vehicle

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle

BSD/RCTA OFF INDICATOR

s07bm08

System temporary stops

s07bm0801

S_703289-W

BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is

used at extremely high or low tempera-

tures or when abnormal voltage exists.

Once these conditions are corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity

s07bm0802

S_703290-W

BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

due to reduced radar sensitivity

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

393

(396,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

This display appears when the detect-

ability of the radar sensors is reduced.

Once the condition is corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will

disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

BSD/RCTA WARNING INDICA-

TOR

s07bm04

S_703291-W

BSD/RCTA malfunction message

At first, this message will appear

Then this message will appear

BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

TO TURN ON/OFF THE BSD/

RCTA

s07bm09

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,

operate the center information display.

Refer to “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231 (11.6-inch display models).

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

S_703180-W

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned

OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

will illuminate.

NOTE

. In the following cases, turn off the

BSD/RCTA system. The system may

not operate properly due to blocked

radar waves.

– When towing a load

– When a bicycle carrier or other item

is fitted to the rear of the vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last

known status of the system is main-

tained. For example, if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position with the BSD/RCTA deacti-

vated, the BSD/RCTA remains deac-

tivated the next time the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

STARTING AND OPERATING

394

(397,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CERTIFICATION FOR THE BSD/

RCTA

s07bm06

The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries:

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

ZOM0993-W

Canada-spec. models:

ZOM0999-W

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

395

(398,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ZOM1000-W

HANDLING OF RADAR SEN-

SORS

s07bm07

S_703292-W

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of

the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

CAUTION

S_703182-W

To ensure correct operation of the

BSD/RCTA, observe the following

precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface

near the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other

items on the bumper surface near

the radar sensors. For details,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Do not modify the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the

radar sensors.

STARTING AND OPERATING

396

(399,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Do not expose the bumper near the

radar sensors to strong impacts. If

a sensor becomes misaligned, a

system malfunction may occur,

including the inability to detect

vehicles entering the detection

areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to

contact your SUBARU dealer for

inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area around

the radar sensors requires repair, paint-

work or replacement, contact your

SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-22. REVERSE AUTOMATIC

BRAKING (RAB) SYSTEM (If

Equipped)

s07bn

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a

system designed to help avoid collisions

or reduce collision damage when rever-

sing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is

detected in the reversing direction, the

system will notify the driver with a warning

sound and may activate the vehicle’s

brakes automatically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

is not a system intended to replace

the driver’s responsibility to check

their surroundings for vehicles or

obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Before reversing, be sure to

first depress the brake pedal and

visually check the surroundings.

. There are some cases in which the

vehicle cannot avoid collision, be-

cause the system operation has

limitations. The warning sound or

automatic braking may be delayed

or may not operate at all even

when an obstacle is present.

. Make sure to set the Automatic

Braking function to OFF when the

vehicle is on the free roller or on the

chassis dynamometer. Otherwise,

the vehicle may move and it may

cause an accident.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including children),

animals or other moving objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condition

or the surrounding environment,

the sonar sensor’s ability to detect

objects may become unstable.

. When an attachment part (trailer

hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) is installed on the rear of the

vehicle, turn off the Reverse Auto-

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

397

(400,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

matic Braking (RAB). If this func-

tion is on when an attachment or a

similar part is installed, it may result

in a system malfunction that

causes an accident resulting in

serious damage, injury or death.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system records and stores the following

data when automatic braking operates. It

does not record conversations, personal

information or other audio data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted by

SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehicle

research and development. SUBARU

and third parties contracted by SUBARU

will not disclose or provide the acquired

data to any other third party except under

the following conditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based on a

court order or other legally enforce-

able request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be iden-

tified is provided to a research institu-

tion for statistical processing or similar

purposes.

STARTING AND OPERATING

398

(401,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

REVERSE AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) SYSTEM OVERVIEW

s07bn01

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions

using 4 sonar sensors.

. Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the

driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.

. Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a

collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce

damage.

S_703293-MW

When reversing

When either strong automatic braking

or torque control is applied to prevent

collision (in this case, short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound)

When the vehicle is stopped by the

system (in this case, the continuous

beep will remain sounding)

Object (e.g., a wall)

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

399

(402,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Detecting range

s07bn0101

S_703294-W

Detecting range (width): Approximately

6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

Detecting range (length): Approxi-

mately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the

vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad

crossing and you are trying to escape

by reversing through the crossing

gate, the system may recognize the

crossing gate as an obstacle and

brake may activate. In this case,

remain calm and either continue to

depress the accelerator pedal or

cancel the system. To cancel the

system, refer to “Canceling the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) Sys-

tem Operation” �P407.

OPERATING CONDITIONS

s07bn02

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

S_703295-W

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator

RAB OFF indicator

RAB warning indicator

EyeSight warning indicator

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.

. The RAB warning indicator is off.

. The RAB OFF indicator is off.

. The select lever is in the “R” position.

. Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator is

off.

Sonar Audible Alarm function:

. Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph

(0 to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function:

. Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph

(1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system will

not operate. Promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator is

illuminated.

– The RAB warning indicator is illu-

minated.

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system

STARTING AND OPERATING

400

(403,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

cannot be operated.

– The

(EyeSight Temporary Stop

indicator: White) is illuminated, and

the messages corresponding to

the EyeSight temporary stop are

displayed on the combination me-

ter display (color LCD). For details,

refer to the Owner’s Manual sup-

plement for the EyeSight system.

– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-

nated.

. In the following cases, the functions

may not be able to properly work.

Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the sonar sensors or the

rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is modified.

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and attached.

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification.

– There is damage to the sonar

sensors or the rear bumper near

the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper

is deformed.

. On a steep hill, the system’s automatic

braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5

km/h). However, the system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be able

to avoid collisions in any situation.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an ex-

tremely slow speed, the driver’s op-

eration may be prioritized. In this case,

automatic braking will not operate.

. The system may not be able to detect

and apply the brake with the following

objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor.

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever

is set to the “R” position.

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed to

detect and apply brake.

– Pedestrians.

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles.

– Objects which absorbs sound

waves such as cloth or snow.

– Objects whose surface has a di-

agonal angle.

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks.

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above.

– Objects that are out of range of the

center of the vehicle in the hor-

izontal direction.

– Objects that are not perpendicular

to the ground.

– The surface of the object is uneven

or wavy.

. When reversing the vehicle, the func-

tions may not be able to work properly

or may cause a system malfunction if

the following conditions exist.

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby:

– Horn sound from another vehicle.

– Engine sound from other vehicles.

– Sound of an air brake.

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle.

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted near by.

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area

near the sonar sensor becomes

too hot or too cold to operate.

– The sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors are

exposed to heavy rain or a sig-

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

401

(404,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

nificant amount of water.

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as when

a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper near

the sonar sensor:

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna)

are attached.

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the

sonar sensors or the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor.

– The vehicle is significantly inclined.

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is misa-

ligned due to a collision or an

accident.

Surrounding environment:

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area.

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages.

– Wheel track or hole is present in

the ground of the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grating cover).

S_703186-MW

S_703187-MW

– The path of the reversing direction

is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

– When reversing downhill.

S_703188-MW

STARTING AND OPERATING

402

(405,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703189-MW

– A curb or step is present in the

reversing direction.

– Reversing in a garage with a low

ceiling or a tunnel.

– There is a patch of snow rearward.

– There is a puddle of water.

– There is an obstacle that is next to

an object.

– Going back along a wall.

– The area where the road starts

touching dirt and snow

– When reversing on an uneven

road.

. In circumstances such as the follow-

ing, it may not be possible to avoid a

collision even when the system oper-

ates normally.

– Roads are slippery.

– The tire air pressure is not correct.

– The tires have become worn.

– Tire chains are installed.

– Tires which are not the designated

size are installed.

– Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair kit.

– The suspension was modified.

– Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction.

– The brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

SONAR AUDIBLE ALARM

FUNCTION

s07bn03

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system is in operation, audible

warning beeps will sound to warn the

driver of a potential collision in 3 levels:

medium proximity, short proximity, clo-

sest proximity.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and

sound warning beeps after the object was

recognized by the Sonar Audible Alarm

function.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

403

(406,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity alert

(object detected)

43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm) Green No warning sound

Medium proximity alert

(approaching the object)

28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer to

the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity alert

(too close to the object)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

STARTING AND OPERATING

404

(407,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Obstacle detected and alert le-

vel

s07bn0301

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected

object will be shown on the center

information display and combination me-

ter display (color LCD).

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

S_703296-W

Long proximity alert (green)

Medium proximity alert (yellow)

Short proximity alert (orange)

Closest proximity alert (red)

The alert levels are indicated on the

center information display as shown in

the following.

Long proximity alert (object detected)

S_703297-W

Green: 43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm) or

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

S_703298-W

Yellow: 28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

S_703299-W

Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

S_703300-W

Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

405

(408,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNC-

TION OPERATION

s07bn08

Object close behind warning

s07bn0801

Automatic braking warning

S_703301-W

Warning message

If the system determine the risk of

collision with the object. Short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound and either strong automatic brak-

ing or torque control will be applied to

prevent collision.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

Depress brake pedal warning

S_703302-W

Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal

is depressed, a message will be dis-

played on the center information display

and the continuous beep will remain

sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function and

Automatic Braking function are different

in operation conditions. Therefore, there

are cases in which only one of these

functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immediately

after the system stops the vehicle by

automatic braking. Depending on the

conditions of the road surface and

tires, the vehicle may not remain

stopped, possibly leading to an acci-

dent.

After the vehicle is stopped by

the system

s07bn0802

S_703196-MW

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the

system will temporarily stop operating.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position.

STARTING AND OPERATING

406

(409,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. In the following cases, after the vehicle

has been stopped by the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system,

brake control is released and the

electronic parking brake operates. For

details about releasing the parking

brake, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake” �P363.

– When 2 minutes pass after the

vehicle is stopped

– When any door is opened

. The Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system may stop operating

temporarily in the following cases and

the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the

sonar sensors or the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor.

– Objects are too close to the rear

bumper when the select lever is set

to the “R” position.

– The system detects sounds of a

similar frequency to the RAB sonar.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode is selected.

CANCELING THE REVERSE

AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

SYSTEM OPERATION

s07bn04

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system can be temporarily canceled by

any of the following operations.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

brake pedal is depressed.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed

continuously (In this case, limited

acceleration will be canceled and the

vehicle will continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the object

is no longer detected.

REVERSE AUTOMATIC BRAK-

ING (RAB) SYSTEM ON/OFF

SETTING

s07bn05

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-

tem can be set by operating the center

information display.

S_703303-W

ON setting key of Automatic Braking

function

OFF setting key of Automatic Braking

function

ON setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch the ON setting key to turn the

setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch the OFF setting key to turn the

setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function or

the Sonar Audible Alarm function is

turned OFF, the following indicator(s) will

illuminate.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

407

(410,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703304-W

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator

RAB OFF indicator

The RAB OFF indicator or the Sonar

Audible Alarm OFF indicator will turn off

when the corresponding function is

turned ON.

NOTE

. When the settings cannot be changed,

the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed

out.

. The ON/OFF setting key may be

grayed out if the Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,

etc. In this case, turn the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position and then

turn it to the “ON” position again. If the

setting cannot be changed even after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position again, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. As soon as you turn off the ignition

switch, the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) ON/OFF setting is stored in

the system. Therefore, when you turn

the ignition switch from the “OFF”

state to the “ON” position, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) setting will

revert to the state that was set before

the ignition switch was turned off.

. When you turn the ignition switch off,

the Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF

settings will always reset, and the

system will not store the settings of the

function. Therefore, every time you

turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, the Sonar Audible Alarm will

turn on automatically.

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display.

. Warning volume

. Sonar Audible Alarm

For details, refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

RAB WARNING INDICATOR

s07bn07

S_703305-MW

RAB malfunction message

RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system malfunctions, the above indicator

illuminates on the combination meter.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

HANDLING OF THE SONAR

SENSORS

s07bn06

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the

rear bumper. To ensure the proper op-

eration of the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system, observe the following

precautions.

STARTING AND OPERATING

408

(411,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_703200-W

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the sonar sensor or the bumper

surface near the sonar sensors.

. Always keep the sonar sensor and the

rear bumper surface near the sonar

sensors clean.

. Do not modify rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the

sonar sensors.

. Do not apply high pressure water to

the sonar sensors with a high pressure

car-washing machine.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including in-

ability to detect objects in the rever-

sing direction. If any strong impact is

applied to the rear bumper, contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sen-

sors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, contact

your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-23. DRIVER MONITORING

SYSTEM (If Equipped)

s07bp

Driver Monitoring System is introduced as

DriverFocus in some countries.

The Driver Monitoring System monitors

possible cases when the driver is not

paying attention to the forward direction,

and also recognizes individual users.

This system warns the driver of inatten-

tive/drowsy driving, and can support safe

and comfortable driving by automatically

retrieving the following settings.

– Driver’s position

– Climate control setting

– Meter setting

– Center information display setting

– Car settings

When a user is registered, various set-

tings are automatically retrieved when the

user enters the vehicle.

S_703306-W

Camera

CAUTION

. Always use the utmost care in

driving

– Overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the

Driver Monitoring System

could easily lead to a serious

accident.

. This system cannot detect if the

driver is feeling drowsy or is

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

409

(412,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

concentrating on safe driving.

. It cannot judge if the driver is

awake or asleep, if their driving

abilities have diminished, or if they

are concentrating on safe driving.

. In some circumstances, the sys-

tem may not be able to correctly

detect the driver state.

NOTE

. The user recognition camera does not

save images, audio, or video.

. The Driver Monitoring System may not

operate correctly when sunlight is

shining into the vehicle in the following

ways.

– Sunlight is shining directly (or

through glass) onto the user re-

cognition camera.

– There are shadows on the driver’s

face caused by sunlight (or any

light with a strong infrared compo-

nent).

– There are large momentary fluc-

tuations in the strength of the sun-

light (or any light with a strong

infrared component) shining on the

face.

. Correct detection may not be possible

when a device that includes an infra-

red light source (such as a commer-

cially available Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem) is installed in the vehicle interior.

. The Driver Monitoring System may not

operate correctly at the following times

when the driver is wearing glasses or

sunglasses.

– The sunglasses do not allow the

easy passage of infrared light.

– The surrounding scenery is re-

flected strongly in the lenses of the

glasses or sunglasses.

– The eyes are hidden by the frame

of the glasses and the user recog-

nition camera cannot detect the

eyes.

– The light from an infrared light

source (LED) is reflected in the

lenses of the glasses or sun-

glasses.

– The driver is wearing an eyepatch.

– The driver is wearing a hat set

deeply over the eyes.

. Depending on the type of mask,

correct detection of inattentive/drowsy

driving may not be possible.

. Correct user recognition is not possi-

ble if the eyes, nose, or mouth is

covered with a mask, muffler, sun-

glasses, or other item.

. The Driver Monitoring System may not

operate correctly when the eyebrows,

eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden due to

item that is between the face and the

system.

. If a thick cover is attached to the

steering wheel, then depending on the

position set for the tilt/telescopic

steering wheel, the cover may block

the system’s view of the face, and the

system and the Driver Monitoring

System may not operate correctly.

. Do not attach any stickers to the user

recognition camera or the infrared

light source (LED). If the user recog-

nition camera or infrared light source

(LED) is covered by an obstruction, it

will not be possible to correctly monitor

the driver.

. If an accessory is hung from the inside

mirror, correct detection may not be

possible.

. Do not touch the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) directly with your fingers. If

there is dirt or a fingerprint on these

parts, it will not be possible to correctly

monitor the driver. If there is dirt or a

fingerprint on these parts, either wipe

them with a soft dry cloth, or wipe

gently with a damp cloth after first

firmly wringing the water out.

. If the surface of the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) becomes scratched, correct

detection may not be possible. Be

careful that hard objects do not con-

tact these parts.

STARTING AND OPERATING

410

(413,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. If there is condensation on the user

recognition camera or the infrared

light source (LED), correct detection

may not be possible. If there is

condensation on these parts, wipe it

away with a soft dry cloth.

. When registering a user for user

recognition, avoid closing your eyes

as much as possible.

. If the user recognition success rate is

low, it is possible that the user is not

correctly registered. Delete the regis-

tered data and perform registration

again.

. If a user frequently drives both with

glasses and contact lenses, it is

recommended that registration be

performed both when wearing glasses

and when wearing contact lenses.

. User recognition starts immediately

after entering the vehicle, however if

the user looks downward or at the

driver side mirror for a long time, the

user may not be recognized.

. When one person among twins or

another pair of persons with similar

facial features is registered, the other

person may be incorrectly recognized

as the registered user when entering

the vehicle.

. If the person in the passenger’s seat

leans into the driver’s seat, or in other

cases when there are two or more

faces near the driver’s seat, the

system may not operate correctly.

. There are cases when the system

concludes that the user’s eyes are

closed when the user is looking

downward during driving, such as

when checking instruments or the

navigation screen. In such cases, the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound or the system may otherwise

not operate correctly.

. If the eyes are narrowed when laugh-

ing or when there is a dazzling outside

light, the system may judge that the

eyes are closed and the drowsy

driving warning buzzer may sound or

the system may otherwise not operate

correctly.

. The drowsy driving or asleep warning

states are recognized from the length

of time and percentage of time that the

eyes are closed. The drowsy driving

warning buzzer will not sound simply

when the driver feels sleepy or yawns.

. Even when the driver does not feel

sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or

if he or she blinks frequently, the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound.

. The inattentive driving warning buzzer

may sound if the driver leans forward

or puts his or her head out of the

window while driving.

. The inattentive driving warning buzzer

will not sound when the vehicle is

stopped or traveling at slow speed

even if the driver is not looking ahead.

. The Driver Monitoring System collects

and stores data regarding drivers’

facial features. Facial recognition data

is stored locally and does not leave the

vehicle. It is not transmitted to or

stored by SUBARU or anyone else.

The Driver Monitoring System may be

disabled and any stored driver data

may be deleted by following the

instructions below. If the Driver Mon-

itoring System is disabled, it will be

unable to provide any of its safety or

convenience functions.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

411

(414,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System

setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition func-

tion*

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition func-

tion

Available Not available

OFF

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition func-

tion

Not available

Available function items

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition func-

tion*

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

Update Seat and Mir-

ror Position

Available Not available

Delete Driver Position Available Not available

OFF

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

Update Seat and Mir-

ror Position

Not available Not available

Delete Driver Position Not available

Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “

Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings. Refer to

“

Settings icon (Car settings)” �P231.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is

registered.

Available functions

The user is registered. The user is not registered.

User recognition function Available

Not available

STARTING AND OPERATING

412

(415,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

USER RECOGNITION FUNC-

TION

s07bp01

WARNING

Perform registration, retrieving, or

delete of the seat position and outside

mirror angle before beginning driving.

There is the risk of an accident if

registration, retrieving, or delete is

performed while driving.

When a user is registered, it is possible to

retrieve the following settings.

Driver position personalization

s07bp0101

Seat position and outside mirror an-

gle:

Retrieves the registered seat position and

outside mirror angle.

Reverse tilt angle:

Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle.

Meter personalization

s07bp0102

Combination meter display (color

LCD) basic screen:

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

Center information display per-

sonalization

s07bp0103

Center information display basic

screen:

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

Fuel consumption screen:

Displays the average fuel economy for

past driving by that user.

Climate control personalization

s07bp0104

Climate control settings:

Retrieves the preferred setting tempera-

ture, airflow mode selection, and other

settings which the user had selected at

the time when he/she last exited the

vehicle.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the vehicle

while the Max A/C mode is on and the

push engine switch is turned off, the

system stores the setting configured

before Max A/C mode was turned on.

Driver Monitoring System ON/

OFF status

s07bp0105

Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System

ON/OFF status which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

Car settings

s07bp0110

When the Driver Monitoring System

recognizes you as a driver, the system will

switch some of the car settings to those

that were in effect the last time you drove

the vehicle.

When “Request Setting Update” is acti-

vated, this function records the car set-

tings that were in effect when the engine

was last turned off. To set this function,

turn on the ignition switch and then follow

the update screen to update the following

car settings.

. Auto Start Stop

. Auto Vehicle Hold function

. SI-DRIVE

For details about how to turn “Request

Setting Update” on/off, refer to “Settings

icon (Car settings)” �P231.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

413

(416,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Changing the personalization settings

s07bp0106

Item Remarks

Driver’s position personalization

Seat position/outside mirror angle

Change the setting by using the

center information display custo-

mization function. Refer to “

Set-

tings icon (Car settings)”

�P231.

Reverse tilt-down outside mirror

angle

Car settings

Auto Start Stop

Auto Vehicle Hold function

SI-DRIVE

Meter personalization*

Combination meter display (color

LCD) basic screen

When the customization screen

linked with the synchronized user

function is selected and the setting

is changed, it is automatically

stored.

Center information display perso-

nalization*

Center information display basic

screen

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the conditions

from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the screen was selected and the

setting was changed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

414

(417,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

INATTENTIVE/DROWSY DRIV-

ING WARNING

s07bp02

While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem monitors possible cases of driver

inattention or drowsiness and warns the

driver.

When the inattentive/drowsy driving

warning activates, the buzzer sounds and

an interrupt display appears.

NOTE

. The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-

ing operates regardless of the status

of the user recognition function.

. The inattentive driving warning does

not activate when the turn signal is

operating or when the select lever is in

the “R” position.

. When the pre-collision brake system

OFF indicator is illuminated on the

combination meter display (color

LCD), the inattentive driving warning

activates at the same timing as usual

even when a vehicle ahead or ob-

stacle is detected. For details about

the EyeSight system, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

Inattentive driving warning

s07bp0201

S_703202-W

When the system monitors that the driver

may be inattentive, it warns the driver.

When the inattentive driving warning

activates, the buzzer sounds and an

interrupt display appears on the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD).

When the EyeSight system has detected

a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward

direction, the inattentive driving warning

may activate at earlier timing than usual.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

When Adaptive Cruise Control and the

Lane Centering function are active,

warning screens other than the inatten-

tive driving warning are displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

415

(418,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Drowsy driving warning

s07bp0202

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning

is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds

and an interrupt display appears.

Combination meter dis-

play (color LCD)

Center information dis-

play

Warning chime

Drowsy driving

ZOM0979-W ZOM0979-W

Beep, beep... (Continues

until the driver’s eyes

open.)

Very drowsy

Beep, beep, beep, beep,

beep (5 times)

Slightly drowsy

ZOM0980-W

— Beep

Not drowsy — —

—

NOTE

When Adaptive Cruise Control and the Lane Centering function are active, warning

screens other than the drowsy driving warning are displayed on the combination meter

display (color LCD). For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

STARTING AND OPERATING

416

(419,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

DRIVER MONITORING SYSTEM

INDICATOR/WARNING

s07bp03

S_703307-W

Driver Monitoring System operation

indicator light (green)

Driver Monitoring System OFF indica-

tor light

Driver Monitoring System temporary

stop indicator light

Driver Monitoring System warning light

(yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/

warning indicates the status of the Driver

Monitoring System on the combination

meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System OFF

indicator, Driver Monitoring System tem-

porary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring

System warning is illuminated, the Driver

Monitoring System function cannot be

used. In addition, the following items

cannot be selected.

. Register User

. Delete User

. Delete All Users

. Update Seat and Mirror Position

. Delete Driver Position

. Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

Driver Monitoring System op-

eration indicator light (green)

s07bp0301

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is operating.

Driver Monitoring System OFF

indicator light

s07bp0302

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is turned off. Only the

driver monitoring system will remain

activate even if the system is turned off.

Driver Monitoring System tem-

porary stop indicator light

s07bp0303

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily

stopped.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily in the following circum-

stances.

. When the temperature of the main unit

of the Driver Monitoring System is high

or low.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eye

movement.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eyebrows,

eyes, nose or mouth.

. When the camera and the infrared

light source (LED) are covered and the

Driver Monitoring System cannot

monitor the driver correctly.

Driver Monitoring System

warning light (yellow)

s07bp0304

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

USING THE DRIVER MONITOR-

ING SYSTEM

s07bp04

You can register users using the Center

Information Display. You can then use the

Driver Monitoring System.

When the Driver Monitoring System OFF

indicator, Driver Monitoring System tem-

porary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring

System warning is illuminated, the fol-

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

417

(420,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

lowing items cannot be selected.

– Register User

– Delete User

– Delete All Users

s07bp0403

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Register User”

6. Select the preferred user from the list.

S_307592-W

7. ? “Set”

S_307593-W

8. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

S_307594-W

When the screen changes, the registra-

tion of the facial scan is completed.

S_703308-W

Forward direction

Display direction

Face forward.

Do not lower your chin.

Face the display.

*: Display

STARTING AND OPERATING

418

(421,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. If user registration cannot be per-

formed, turn your face forward as

shown in the illustration, then turn to

the display.

. There are some cases where user

registration cannot be registered

properly. In those cases, refer to

“Driver Monitoring System” �P409.

. If “Unable to register. Try again.”

appears, repeat the procedure begin-

ning from step 5.

9. Enter the name.

S_307596-W

10.? “Next”

11. Select the preferred icon.

S_307597-W

12.? “Set”

NOTE

. An existing user can be overwritten by

selecting a registered number. When

a user is registered by overwriting, the

individual fuel economy data is reset.

. When “User Recognition” is set to

OFF, user registration cannot be se-

lected.

User recognition

s07bp0401

When a user is registered with the user

recognition function, the Driver Monitor-

ing System performs the following.

1. When the door is opened and the

push-button ignition switch is OFF, the

user recognition screen appears and

the Driver Monitoring System starts

user recognition.

S_703204-W

The user recognition screen may not

appear when the door is opened in

some cases, such as when only a

short time has passed after the push-

button ignition switch was turned OFF.

In such cases, user recognition starts

when the door is closed however the

user recognition screen does not

appear.

S_703205-W

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face

forward for a few moments.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

419

(422,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3. When user recognition is completed,

the Hello screen appears on the

combination meter display (color

LCD).

At this time, climate control settings,

combination meter display (color LCD)

basic screen, center information display

basic screen, and customization settings

all change based on the user information.

NOTE

. When a center information display

operation switch is pressed, the user

recognition screen is canceled, how-

ever user recognition continues.

. If user recognition fails, perform re-

cognition again following the instruc-

tions, refer to “Repeat Facial Scan”

�P420.

. User recognition is not performed

while driving.

. When the select lever is not in the “P”

position, the seat position will not

change even when user recognition is

completed.

. If the seat position or outside mirror

angle are in motion at the time when

user recognition is completed, then it

is not possible to retrieve the seat

position, outside mirror angle, or re-

verse tilt-down outside mirror angle.

. If any of the following operations is

performed while retrieving of the seat

position or outside mirror angle, re-

trieving of the seat position and out-

side mirror angle is canceled.

– The power seat adjustment switch

was operated.

– The outside mirror adjustment

switch was operated.

– The “SET” button was pressed.

– The “1” or “2” button was pressed.

– The select lever was moved to a

position other than “P” position.

Repeat Facial Scan

s07bp0404

S_703306-W

Camera

When there is an object blocking the

camera, user recognition may not be

possible and “User recognition stopped.”

may be displayed. Remove the obstacle

and follow the reference procedure to

perform user recognition again.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Repeat Facial Scan”

6. ? “OK”

S_307591-W

7. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

When the scan is completed, the

completion screen is displayed on the

center information display.

STARTING AND OPERATING

420

(423,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. User recognition may not be possible

when there is dirt or fingerprints on the

user recognition camera. To clean,

either wipe using a soft cloth or else

wipe gently using a moistened cloth

that has been thoroughly wrung out.

. When the synchronized user function

is turned OFF, manual repeat facial

scan is not possible.

DELETING A USER

s07bp05

Users can be registered in the Driver

Monitoring System, and registered users

can be deleted.

NOTE

User information can also be deleted by

resetting the center information display to

the factory default settings. When the

settings are reset to the factory default

settings, all user information is deleted.

The settings cannot be reset to the factory

default settings when the Driver Monitor-

ing System is OFF.

Delete User

s07bp0501

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete User”

6. Select the preferred user from the list.

S_307598-W

7. ? “Yes”

Delete All Users

s07bp0502

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete All Users”

6. ? “Yes”

DRIVER MONITORING SYSTEM

ON/OFF SETTINGS

s07bp07

NOTE

. When the Driver Monitoring System is

turned OFF after user recognition was

completed, the user recognition func-

tion stores the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem ON/OFF state.

. Even when the Driver Monitoring

System is set to OFF, the Driver

Monitoring System automatically

turns ON once the driver’s door is

opened and closed while the vehicle is

stopped. This only occurs when the

user recognition setting is ON. The

system then reverts automatically to

the OFF state.

. After the Driver Monitoring System

was turned OFF, if the Driver Mon-

itoring System is turned ON while the

driver’s door is open, user recognition

may not occur correctly.

To turn on/off the Driver Mon-

itoring System

s07bp0701

To turn the Driver Monitoring System on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231. When the Driver Mon-

itoring System is turned OFF, the Driver

Monitoring System OFF indicator on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

will illuminate.

– CONTINUED –

STARTING AND OPERATING

421

(424,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

Even when the Driver Monitoring System

is turned off, the user recognition does not

switch on or off automatically.

User recognition settings

s07bp0702

The Driver Monitoring System User re-

cognition function can be turned ON/OFF.

For the setting procedure, refer to “Set-

tings icon (Car settings)” �P231.

NOTE

. The user recognition function setting

cannot be changed for each individual

user.

. The default setting for the user re-

cognition function is ON.

. When the user recognition function is

turned OFF, the following items cannot

be selected.

– Repeat Facial Scan

– Register User

– Update Seat and Mirror Position

– Delete Driver Position

Automatically retract seat on

entry

s07bp0704

The automatically retract seat on entry

which automatically slides back the dri-

ver’s seat when the driver’s door is

unlocked and opened.

This function can be turned ON/OFF. For

the setting procedure, refer to “Settings

icon (Car settings)” �P231.

CAUTION

Sit in the seat after the power seat

movement backward has been com-

pleted. Not doing so could result in

injury.

NOTE

. If the seat position is not registered in

the access key fob memory, the

automatically retract seat on entry

function can be used.

. Even when the automatically retract

seat on entry setting is ON, the

automatically retract seat on entry

function automatically turns OFF

when the user recognition function is

OFF.

. Automatically retract seat on entry

cannot be selected when the Driver

Monitoring System OFF indicator,

Driver Monitoring System temporary

stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring

System warning is illuminated.

. This function will operate if the seat is

in front of the center of the seat sliding

mechanism.

HOW TO GET THE SOURCE

CODE THAT USES OPEN

SOURCE SOFTWARE

s07bp09

Free Open-Source Software Information

This product uses Free Open-Source

Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source

code of such FOSS can be found at the

following URL:

http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/

RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/

STARTING AND OPERATING

422

(425,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(426,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(427,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s08
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) ....................................................................................426
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ...................................................................426
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)..................................427
8-4. Catalytic Converter .....................................................................427
8-5. Periodic Inspections ...................................................................428
8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries .....................................................429
8-7. Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery from
Discharging .................................................................................429
8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles...................................................430
8-9. On-Road and Off-Road Driving..................................................431
Before Driving............................................................................. 432
During Driving ............................................................................ 432
After Driving ............................................................................... 433
8-10. Winter Driving .............................................................................434
Operation during Cold Weather ................................................... 434
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads................................................. 435
Corrosion Protection................................................................... 436
Snow Tires ................................................................................. 437
Tire Chains ................................................................................. 437
Rocking the Vehicle .................................................................... 438
8-11. Loading Your Vehicle..................................................................438
Vehicle Capacity Weight.............................................................. 439
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross
Axle Weight Rating) .................................................................. 439
Roof Rack................................................................................... 440
Roof Rail .................................................................................... 441
Roof Tent.................................................................................... 441
8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option) ......................................................443
Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch .............................. 444
If Not Towing a Trailer ................................................................. 445
8-13. Trailer Towing..............................................................................446
Warranties and Maintenance ....................................................... 446
Maximum Load Limits ................................................................. 446
Trailer Hitches (Dealer Option) .................................................... 448
When You Do Not Tow a Trailer ................................................... 449
Connecting a Trailer.................................................................... 449
Trailer Towing Tips...................................................................... 450
DRIVING TIPS
8

(428,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-1. NEW VEHICLE BREAK-

IN DRIVING – THE FIRST

1,000 MILES (1,600 km)

s08aa

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000

rpm except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either

fast or slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads are replaced

with new ones.

8-2. FUEL ECONOMY HINTS

s08ab

The following suggestions will help to

save your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decel-

eration. Always accelerate gently until

you reach the desired speed. Then try

to maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and

avoid racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire inflation

pressure label, which is located under

the door latch on the driver’s side. Low

pressure will increase tire wear and

fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage

or cargo.

. The indication of the ECO gauge

shows a reference for saving fuel. For

details, refer to “ECO gauge” �P199.

DRIVING TIPS

426

(429,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-3. ENGINE EXHAUST GAS

(Carbon Monoxide)

s08ac

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a long time while the engine

is running. If that is unavoidable,

then use the ventilation fan to force

fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves or

other obstructions to ensure that

the ventilation system always

works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possible.

If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all

windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas from

entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction of

the metals used in the manufacture of the

exhaust system, you may hear a crack-

ling sound coming from the exhaust

system for a short time after the engine

has been shut off. This sound is normal.

8-4. CATALYTIC CONVER-

TER

s08ad

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or

park the vehicle anywhere near

flammable materials (e.g. grass,

paper, rags or leaves), because the

catalytic converter operates at very

high temperatures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

S_801497-W

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic con-

verter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring,

backfiring or incomplete combustion),

have your vehicle checked and re-

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

427

(430,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

paired by an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield

of catalytic converter and the exhaust

system.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

8-5. PERIODIC INSPEC-

TIONS

s08ae

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

DRIVING TIPS

428

(431,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-6. DRIVING IN FOREIGN

COUNTRIES

s08af

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”

�P324.

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

8-7. FREQUENT DRIVING

PREVENTS VEHICLE BAT-

TERY FROM DISCHARGING

s08au

Vehicle batteries are a consumable item.

If the battery charge is not maintained

regularly, the battery will deteriorate and

may require replacement sooner than

expected. The battery is charged by

running the engine. It is recommended to

drive the car for a longer time occasion-

ally to prevent the vehicle battery from

becoming drained, especially if it is

regularly driven only a short time daily (e.

g. only 10 minutes) or if it is parked for 10

days or more. It may be possible to

recover the state of charge and maintain

the battery performance by driving for a

longer time (e.g. more than 30 minutes). If

you cannot drive enough, we recommend

to charge the battery as needed. If no

action is taken, the battery will become

discharged. This is a normal character-

istic of any battery.

DRIVING TIPS

429

(432,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-8. DRIVING TIPS FOR AWD

VEHICLES

s08ag

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a

serious accident.

. When replacing or installing tire(s),

all four tires must be the same for

the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey

the specification that is printed on

the tire inflation pressure label. The

tire inflation pressure label is

located on the driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechanical

damage could be caused to the

drivetrain of the car, and affect the

followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control, and it

can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored in

the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

S_801498-MW

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during accelera-

tion, and added engine braking force

during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive

vehicle. There is little difference in

DRIVING TIPS

430

(433,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

handling, however, during extremely

sharp turns or sudden braking.

Therefore, when driving down a slope

or turning corners, be sure to reduce

your speed and maintain an ample

distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on

the tire inflation pressure label, which

is located on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will neces-

sitate more frequent replacement of

the following items than that specified

in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Continuously variable transmis-

sion fluid

– Front differential gear oil

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehi-

cle. For detailed information, refer to

“Towing” �P466.

8-9. ON-ROAD AND OFF-

ROAD DRIVING

s08ah

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a

serious accident.

. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a

seatbelt. The driver and all pas-

sengers should fasten their seat-

belts before starting to drive in

order to minimize the chance of

serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns or quick

maneuvers unless absolutely un-

avoidable. Such actions are dan-

gerous, as you may lose control,

possibly resulting in a rollover

which could cause death or serious

injury.

. Whenever strong crosswinds are

present, slow down sufficiently to

maintain control of your vehicle.

Remember that your vehicle, with

its higher profile and center of

gravity, is more likely to be affected

by crosswinds than ordinary pas-

senger cars.

. Never attempt to drive through

pools and puddles, or roads

flooded with water. Water entering

the engine air intake or the exhaust

pipe or water splashing onto elec-

trical parts may damage your

vehicle and may cause it to stall. In

this case, contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately. Regardless of

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

431

(434,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

its depth, it can wash away the

ground from under your tires,

resulting in possible loss of traction

and even vehicle rollover.

CAUTION

. Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such

as rough roads or off roads will

necessitate more frequent repla-

cement of the following items than

that specified in the maintenance

schedule described in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating it

off-road and not using common

sense precautions such as those

listed here is not eligible for

warranty coverage.

. After driving on gravel roads or

rough roads, check the undercar-

riage of the vehicle body for any

damage, deformation, or paint

removal. If you notice any irregu-

larities, contact a SUBARU dealer

for an inspection as soon as

possible.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to

be used for wide applications including

off-road driving. However, please keep in

mind that your vehicle is neither a con-

ventional off-road vehicle nor an all-

terrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity

in relation to the tread width as compared

with ordinary passenger cars makes

vehicles of this type more likely to roll

over. In reality, utility vehicles have a

significantly higher rollover rate than

other types of vehicles. The high ground

clearance of this vehicle is a real advan-

tage, giving you a better view of the road

and allowing you to anticipate problems

earlier. However, remember that your

utility vehicle is not designed for high-

speed cornering comparable to ordinary

passenger cars and that your vehicle

could roll over if you make a sharp turn at

high speed.

If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain

common sense precautions such as

those in the following list should be taken.

BEFORE DRIVING

s08ah09

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a

shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and

cell phone or citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. Dur-

ing sudden stops or jolts, unsecured

cargo could be thrown around in the

vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile

heavy loads on the roof. Those loads

raise the vehicle’s center of gravity

and make it more prone to tip over.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this

manual.

DURING DRIVING

s08ah10

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous

areas or over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution

at all times. When driving off-road, you

will not have the benefit of marked

traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic

signs and the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. A vehicle

can much more easily tip over side-

ways than it can end over end. Avoid

driving straight up or down slopes that

DRIVING TIPS

432

(435,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers,

especially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk

the wheel and injure your hands.

Instead, drive with your fingers and

thumbs on the outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass

or fallen leaves, as they may burn

easily. The exhaust system is very hot

while the engine is running and right

after the engine stops. This could

create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under

especially dangerous situations:

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the

select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race

the engine. For the best possible

traction, avoid spinning the wheels

when trying to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction

by starting the vehicle with the trans-

mission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to

“Selection of Manual Mode” �P347.

AFTER DRIVING

s08ah11

. Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud or water. Do this by driving

slowly and stepping on the brake

pedal. Repeat that process several

times to dry out the brake discs and

brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that

there is no grass, bush, paper, rags,

stones, sand, etc. adhering to or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the underbody. If

the vehicle is used with these materi-

als trapped or adhering to the under-

body, a mechanical breakdown or fire

could occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after

off-road driving. Suspension compo-

nents are particularly prone to dirt

buildup, so they need to be washed

thoroughly.

DRIVING TIPS

433

(436,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-10. WINTER DRIVING

s08ai

OPERATION DURING COLD

WEATHER

s08ai01

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand,

flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold

temperatures reduce battery capacity.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid

with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the washer fluid

tank and washer nozzles by operating the

washer for a certain period of time.

Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid

remaining in the piping is too low for the

outside temperature, it may freeze and

block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer

fluid may freeze on the windshield

and obstruct your view, and the

fluid may freeze in the washer fluid

tank.

. Be careful foreign matter does not

contaminate the washer fluid when

filling the tank. Contamination

could cause malfunctions, such as

clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on vola-

tile organic compounds may re-

strict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used only

if they provide cold weather pro-

tection without damaging your ve-

hicle’s paint, wiper blades or

washer system.

Before driving your vehicle

s08ai0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls oper-

ate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

Parking in cold weather

s08ai0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle if you park the

vehicle in snow with the engine run-

DRIVING TIPS

434

(437,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ning.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake when

parking for long periods in cold

weather since it could freeze in that

position.

. When the vehicle is parked in snow

or when it snows, raise the wiper

blades off the glass to prevent

damage to them.

. Under either of the following con-

ditions, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause

poor braking action.

– When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads

heavily covered with snow

– When the vehicle has been left

parked during a snowstorm

Check for snow or ice buildup on

the suspension, disc brakes and

brake hoses underneath the vehi-

cle. If there is caked snow or ice,

remove it, being careful not to

damage the disc brakes and brake

hoses and ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the follow-

ing tips.

1. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

Refueling in cold weather

s08ai0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weath-

er.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

Opening rear gate (models with

power rear gate)

s08ai0104

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear gate,

check that there is no frost or snow

between the power rear gate and the

vehicle body. If you notice frost or

snow etc. on the power rear gate,

remove it. If you forcibly operate the

power rear gate with frost or snow, it

may cause a malfunction.

DRIVING ON SNOWY AND ICY

ROADS

s08ai02

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehicle

control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in

snowstorms. Snow will enter the en-

gine’s intake system and may hinder

the airflow, which could result in

engine shutdown or even breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration,

high-speed driving, and sharp turning

when driving on snowy or icy roads.

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

435

(438,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock,

possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information about braking on slippery

surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)” �P354 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control System” �P356.

Wiper operation when snowing

s08ai0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to

the windshield or rear window, perform

the following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the

airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth

until the wiper blade rubbers are

completely thawed. Refer to “Climate

Control” �P275.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer

to “Defogger and Deicer” �P254.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

use the rear window defogger. Refer

to “Defogger and Deicer” �P254.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow

starts to stick on the surface of the

windshield despite wiper operation, use

the defroster with the airflow selection in

“

” and the temperature set for max-

imum warmth. After the windshield gets

warmed enough to melt the frozen snow

on it, wash it away using the windshield

washer. Refer to “Windshield washer”

�P252.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

Refer to “Hazard Warning Flasher”

�P170.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and

freezing temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freez-

ing type wiper blades may not perform

as well as standard wiper blades. If

this happens, reduce the vehicle

speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freezing

type wiper blades is over, replace them

with standard wiper blades.

Lighting operation when snow-

ing

s08ai0202

Check that the headlights are clean

before driving. If snow, frost or ice are

attached to the headlights, remove it.

If the headlights are not clean, they will

not light the front normally. Also if the

indicators and brake lamps are not clean,

the vehicle will not be able to inform its

status to other drivers and it may result in

an accident.

CORROSION PROTECTION

s08ai03

Refer to “Corrosion Protection” �P482.

DRIVING TIPS

436

(439,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

SNOW TIRES

s08ai04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing winter

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey

the specification that is printed on

the tire inflation pressure label. The

tire inflation pressure label is

located on the driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechanical

damage could be caused to the

drivetrain of the car, and affect the

followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control, and it

can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of radial,

belted bias or bias tires since it may

cause dangerous handling char-

acteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of

tires designed specifically for winter driv-

ing conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

CAUTION

Do not use 235/50R19 winter or snow

tires on models with 19-inch wheels.

Doing so may result in damage

caused by contact between the tire

and the vehicle body. For winter or

snow tires, SUBARU recommends

using 225/55R18 tires in combination

with 18-inch genuine SUBARU

wheels.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

TIRE CHAINS

s08ai05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into account

tire size and road conditions. Follow the

device manufacturer’s instructions,

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

437

(440,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

especially regarding maximum vehicle

speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle, and

do not spin your wheels. Damage caused

to your vehicle by use of a traction device

is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you

use is an SAE class S device, and use it

on the front wheels only. Always use the

utmost care when driving with a traction

device. Overconfidence because you are

using a traction device could easily lead

to a serious accident.

ROCKING THE VEHICLE

s08ai06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the select

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st.

For information on holding the transmis-

sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

Manual Mode” �P347.

8-11. LOADING YOUR VEHI-

CLE

s08aj

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback, in the cargo

area. Doing so may result in serious

injury.

WARNING

S_103045-MW

. Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward

and injure passengers in the event

of a sudden stop or accident. Keep

luggage or cargo low, as close to

the floor as possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever you

can to prevent it from being thrown

around inside the vehicle during

sudden stops, sharp turns or in an

accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.

These loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more

prone to tip over.

. Secure long items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on your

vehicle can break, or it can change

DRIVING TIPS

438

(441,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

the way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control and

cause personal injury. Also, over-

loading can shorten the life of your

vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause serious

injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids or

any other dangerous items inside the

vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT

s08aj01

S_801500-W

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space.

S_801501-W

The maximum load you can carry in your

vehicle is shown on the tire inflation

pressure label attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

GVWR AND GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and Gross

Axle Weight Rating)

s08aj02

S_801512-W

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

439

(442,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle,

you should confirm that GVW and front

and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because

they may lower the GVWR and GAWR

limitations. Replacement tires with a

higher load range than the originals do

not increase the GVWR and GAWR

limitations.

ROOF RACK

s08aj09

CAUTION

S_801499-MW

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rail must be used together with

the roof rack. The roof rail must

never be used alone to carry cargo.

Otherwise, damage to the roof or

paint or a dangerous road hazard

due to loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof rack, make

sure that the total weight of the roof

rack, carrying attachments and

cargo does not exceed the max-

imum load limit. Overloading may

cause damage to the vehicle and

create a safety hazard.

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the roof rack to the roof. When

installing the roof rack on the roof, follow

the manufacturer’s instructions.

The maximum load limit of the cargo, roof

rack and carrying attachments must not

exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place the

heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the

roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.

Always properly secure all cargo.

Installing carrying attachments

on the roof rack

s08aj0901

When installing any carrying attachments

such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike

carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo

basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s

instructions of the load capacity and

make sure that the attachments are

securely installed. Use only attachments

designed specifically for the crossbars.

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

DRIVING TIPS

440

(443,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ROOF RAIL

s08aj04

S_801529-W

Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the crossbars to the roof rails

and installing an appropriate carrying

attachment. When installing crossbars

and a carrying attachment, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions. The roof rail

system is designed to carry loads (cargo,

crossbars and carrying attachment) of no

more than 176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to

exceed your vehicle’s GVWR and

GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attachment,

make sure that the total carrying

load of the cargo, crossbars and

carrying attachment does not ex-

ceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Overloading

may cause damage to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the crossbars and any appro-

priate carrying attachment that

may be needed. The roof rails must

never be used alone to carry cargo.

Otherwise, damage to the roof or

paint, or a dangerous road hazard

due to loss of cargo could result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

ROOF TENT

s08aj14

S_801504-W

Roof tents may be used under certain

conditions at your own risk.

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof can

adversely affect handling, braking,

and rollover resistance. The vehicle

must never be driven with a total roof

rail load in excess of 176 lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for stationary

vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg)) applies

only when the vehicle is parked

and the load is evenly distributed

left/right and front/rear and the roof

crossbars and roof tent are tightly

secured to the vehicle. If these

conditions are not met, the load

limit will be lower.

. The maximum load limit of the roof

crossbars must be obtained from

the manufacturer or retailer of the

roof rack. When driving the vehicle,

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

441

(444,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

the maximum roof rail load is 176

lbs (80 kg) or the crossbar load limit

(whichever is lower).

When driving the vehicle

s08aj1401

S_801530-W

Roof rails

Roof crossbars

Roof tent

+ < 176 lbs (80 kg)

The total load on the roof rails during

driving must not exceed the value speci-

fied here.

When the vehicle is parked on

level ground

s08aj1402

S_801531-W

Roof rails

Roof crossbars

Roof tent

Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails –

including the roof crossbars, roof tent,

and all occupants and contents in the roof

tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s

roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)),

evenly distributed, or the load limit of the

roof crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rails

+ + < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause

damage to the vehicle or racking system.

The vehicle must never be driven with

occupants in the roof tent. Before the

vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo

must be removed from the roof tent and

the roof rail load must be restored to

DRIVING TIPS

442

(445,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

within the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80

kg). Refer to the user manual that

accompanied the roof tent for important

safety information and instructions on the

proper installation and use of the tent.

8-12. TRAILER HITCH (Deal-

er Option)

s08ak

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer hitch.

Exceeding the maximum weight

could cause an accident resulting

in serious personal injuries. Per-

missible trailer weight changes

depending on the situation. For

possible recommendations and

limitations, refer to “Trailer Towing”

�P446.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the tow load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

. Be sure your trailer has safety

chains and that each chain will hold

the trailer’s maximum gross

weight. Towing trailers without

safety chains could create a traffic

safety hazard if the trailer sepa-

rates from the hitch due to coupling

damage or hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking pla-

cement before towing a trailer. If

the ball mount separates from the

receiver the trailer could become

loose and create a traffic safety

hazard.

. Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary by

state/region, all regulations agree

that specifications such as the

maximum gross trailer weight must

not exceed the lesser of the

following:

– Maximum gross trailer weight

– Maximum gross tongue weight

– GVWR

– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only com-

promise your safety, but will also

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

443

(446,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

negate your insurance coverage

and/or may violate the state road

and traffic acts and regulations.

. It is recommended to only use the

Genuine SUBARU Ball Mount de-

veloped for use with this trailer

hitch available at your SUBARU

dealership. Use the hitch only as a

weight carrying hitch. Do not use

with any type of weight distributing

hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of injury

to passengers in the case of an

accident if the SUBARU genuine

trailer hitch or a standard bumper

beam is not installed. One of them

must always be installed on the

vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not

possible to install the rear towing

hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

When towing a trailer with brakes

Maximum gross trailer

weight

Maximum gross tongue

weight

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

150 lbs (68 kg)

When towing a trailer without brakes

Maximum gross trailer

weight

Maximum gross tongue

weight

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

100 lbs (43 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

Towing” �P446.

CONNECTING A SUBARU

GENUINE TRAILER HITCH

s08ak01

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

receiver tube.

S_801532-W

Ball mount

Hitch pin

Safety pin

Hitch receiver tube

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole

located on the hitch receiver tube so

that the pin passes through the ball

mount.

3. Insert the safety pin through the hole

located on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not

come off the hitch receiver.

5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch

ball that is appropriate for the ball

mount and your trailer. The hitch ball

must be securely installed on the ball

mount.

DRIVING TIPS

444

(447,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_801533-W

Hitch ball installation point

Hooks for safety chains

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

S_801537-W

Hitch harness connector

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

electrical wire harness by individually

activating the brake, stop and turn

signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer electrical

wire harness before launching or retriev-

ing a watercraft.

IF NOT TOWING A TRAILER

s08ak02

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch electrical wire

harness to protect against possible

damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal

grease.

DRIVING TIPS

445

(448,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

8-13. TRAILER TOWING

s08al

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carry-

ing vehicle. Towing a trailer puts addi-

tional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension

and has an adverse effect on fuel

economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your

safety and satisfaction depend upon

proper use of correct equipment and

cautious operation of your vehicle.

Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer

to assist you in purchasing a hitch and

other necessary towing equipment ap-

propriate for your vehicle. Do not use

towing equipment other than genuine

SUBARU towing equipment. In addition,

be sure to follow the instructions for

proper installation and use provided by

the trailer or caravan’s manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for

your failure to follow the proper instruc-

tions. Regularly check that the hitch

mounting bolts and nuts are tightened

securely.

WARRANTIES AND MAINTE-

NANCE

s08al01

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused by

trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component

(engine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

s08al02

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following. Ex-

ceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

Total trailer weight

s08al0201

S_801510-W

DRIVING TIPS

446

(449,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight in the fol-

lowing table.

Conditions

Maximum total trailer

weight

When towing a trailer with-

out brakes.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with

brakes.

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

When towing a trailer on a

long uphill grade continu-

ously for over 5 miles (8

km) with an outside tem-

perature of 104°F (40°C) or

above.

750 lbs (340 kg)

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

and Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing (GVWR)

s08al0202

S_801511-W

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the

vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage,

trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any

other optional equipment installed on

your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW

changes depending on the situation.

Determine the GVW each time before

going on a trip by putting your vehicle and

trailer on a vehicle scale.

S_801512-W

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located at the bottom of driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR)

s08al0203

S_801513-W

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and

rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the ve-

hicle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing sta-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

447

(450,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

Tongue load

s08al0204

S_801514-W

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and

does not exceed the maximum value. For

details about the trailer tongue load, refer

to “Trailer hitch” “Trailer Hitch (Dealer

Option)” �P443.

S_801535-W

Jack

Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustra-

tion above. When weighing the tongue

load, be sure to position the towing

coupler at the height at which it would be

during actual towing, using a jack as

shown.

S_801536-W

Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as

evenly as possible on both the left and

right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more weight

in the back of trailer’s axle than in the

front, the load is taken off the rear axle

of the towing vehicle. This may cause

the rear wheels to skid, especially

during braking or when vehicle speed

is reduced during cornering, resulting

in over-steer, spin out and/or jack-

knifing.

TRAILER HITCHES (Dealer Op-

tion)

s08al03

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body of

your vehicle to install a commercial

trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous

exhaust gas, water or mud may enter

the passenger compartment through

DRIVING TIPS

448

(451,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous, or

even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the

frame or under-body of your vehicle

could cause deterioration of strength

of your vehicle and cause corrosion

around the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, or other

systems when installing a hitch or

other trailer towing equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU trailer hitch is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

WHEN YOU DO NOT TOW A

TRAILER

s08al14

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept dirt

and corrosion-free at the points of

contact. The surfaces only require

cleaning with a cloth. Grease or

other lubricants should never be

used.

. If the ball is not installed, the plastic

insert and/or bumper cover should

then be installed for protection and

to prevent it from getting dirty.

When the ball is not used, place the ball

cap and store securely.

CONNECTING A TRAILER

s08al04

Trailer brakes

s08al0401

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your trai-

ler’s hydraulic brake system to the

hydraulic brake system in your

vehicle. Direct connection would

cause the vehicle’s brake perfor-

mance to deteriorate and could

lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are

recommended, and must be installed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

Trailer safety chains

s08al0402

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due to

coupling damage or hitch ball da-

mage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

449

(452,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the

chains crossing each other under the

trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from

dropping onto the ground in the event the

trailer tongue should disconnect from the

hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

Outside mirrors

s08al0403

S_801517-W

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard outside mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If signifi-

cant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s

standard outside mirrors, use towing

mirrors that conform with Federal, state/

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

Trailer lights

s08al0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper con-

nection of trailer lights may damage

your vehicle’s electrical system and

cause a malfunction of your vehicle’s

lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer

lights are connected properly, please

consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for

proper operation of the turn signals and

the brake lights each time you connect a

trailer to your vehicle.

Tires

s08al0405

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tempor-

ary spare tire is used. The temporary

spare tire is not designed to sustain

the towing load. Use of the temporary

spare tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or less

stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”

�P535.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufac-

turer’s specifications. Also check federal,

state, province and/or other applicable

regulations.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in

your vehicle or trailer as a precaution

against getting a flat tire, be sure that the

spare tire is firmly secured.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

s08al05

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the BSD

(Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving

DRIVING TIPS

450

(453,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

support systems, when towing a

trailer, touch “Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (BSD/RCTA)” to deactivate the

system. The system may not op-

erate properly due to the blocked

radar waves. For details about how

to turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer

to “Settings icon (Car settings)”

�P231.

. For models equipped with the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, consult your SUBARU

dealer for additional information

about towing a trailer.

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly country

on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be differ-

ent when compared to normal

operation. For safety’s sake, you

should employ extra caution when

towing a trailer and you should

never drive at excessive speeds.

You should also keep the following

tips in mind:

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is needed

(e.g., when parking on a steep

slope while towing a trailer).

If your vehicle is equipped with SI-DRIVE,

and when towing a trailer on an uphill

slope, do not drive in the Intelligent (I)

mode. It is recommend that you drive in

the Sport (S) mode. However, it is

possible to tow a trailer in any mode of the

SI-DRIVE on a downhill slope.

Before starting out on a trip

s08al0501

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the

procedures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will also

negate your insurance coverage and/

or may violate the state road and traffic

acts and regulations.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow

the trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the

vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front

and down at the rear, check the total

trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and ton-

gue load again, then confirm that the

load and its distribution are accepta-

ble.

. Check that the tire rating and pres-

sures are correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

– The trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– The trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’s brake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that

the trailer’s turn signal lights flash

when the vehicle’s turn signal lever

is operated.

– The safety chains are connected

properly.

– All cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– The outside mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a

significant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to

learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer

combination before starting out on a

trip. In an area free of traffic, practice

turning, stopping and backing up.

Driving with a trailer

s08al0502

. You should allow for considerably

more stopping distance when towing a

trailer. Avoid sudden braking because

it may result in skidding or jackknifing

and loss of control.

– CONTINUED –

DRIVING TIPS

451

(454,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns

and rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

larger than normal turning radius

because the trailer wheels will be

closer than the vehicle wheels to the

inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the

trailer could hit your vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer,

causing sway. Crosswinds can be due

to weather conditions or the passing of

large trucks or buses. If swaying

occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel

and promptly begin decelerating your

vehicle at a gradual pace.

. When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of

the added weight and length caused

by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience.

Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and

grip the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand.

S_801518-W

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the

opposite direction to the way you want

to turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the

steering again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop

towing the trailer and have repairs

performed immediately by your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

DRIVING TIPS

452

(455,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Driving on grades

s08al0503

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if

necessary, use 1st gear) in order to

utilize the engine braking effect and

prevent overheating of your vehicle’s

brakes. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automati-

cally to protect the engine from over-

heating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather,

because the engine and transmission

are relatively prone to overheating,

pay attention to the following items.

– Engine coolant temperature gauge

– AT OIL TEMP warning light

. If any of the following conditions occur,

immediately turn off the air conditioner

and stop the vehicle in the nearest

safe location. Refer to “If You Park

Your Vehicle in an Emergency”

�P456 and “Engine Overheating”

�P465.

– Engine coolant temperature gauge

needle approaches the OVER-

HEAT zone. Refer to “Engine

Coolant Temperature Gauge”

�P173.

– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP

Warning Light” �P181.

. Do not use the accelerator pedal to

stay stationary on an uphill slope

instead of using the parking brake or

foot brake. That may cause the trans-

mission fluid to overheat.

Parking on a grade

s08al0504

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until

the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly re-

lease the regular brakes.

5. Shift into the “P” position and shut off

the engine.

DRIVING TIPS

453

(456,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(457,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s09
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ...............................456
9-2. Temporary Spare Tire .................................................................456
9-3. Maintenance Tools ......................................................................458
Tool Locations ............................................................................ 458
9-4. Flat Tires......................................................................................459
Changing a Flat Tire.................................................................... 459
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)...... 462
TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) ............................................... 462
9-5. Jump Starting..............................................................................463
How to Jump Start ...................................................................... 464
9-6. Engine Overheating ....................................................................465
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment ...................... 465
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment ................. 465
9-7. Towing .........................................................................................466
Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes..................................... 466
Using a Flat-Bed Truck................................................................ 469
Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ........................................ 470
9-8. If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ..............471
9-9. If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ........................471
Locking and Unlocking ............................................................... 471
Switching Power Status .............................................................. 472
Starting Engine ........................................................................... 472
9-10. If the Rear GATE Cannot Be Opened ........................................473
9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information Display ......................474
9-12. If the Moonroof (If Equipped) Does Not Close .........................475
9-13. If the Fuel Filler Lid Cannot Be Opened ...................................476
9-14. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident ................................477
To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident ................... 477
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved
in an Accident........................................................................... 477
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9

(458,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-1. IF YOU PARK YOUR VE-

HICLE IN AN EMERGENCY

s09aa

S_307531-W

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be

activated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pressing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pressing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher are

flashing, the corresponding turn signal

indicator will also flash.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

9-2. TEMPORARY SPARE

TIRE

s09ab

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used. The

temporary spare tire is not de-

signed to sustain the towing load.

Use of the temporary spare tire

when towing can result in failure of

the spare tire and/or less stability of

the vehicle and may lead to an

accident.

. For U.S.-spec. models, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

rim is replaced without the original

pressure sensor/transmitter being

transferred, the low tire pressure

warning light will illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one

minute. This indicates the tire

pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four

road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

CAUTION

. Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive train

of your vehicle.

. Always conform to the following

instructions when using the tem-

porary spare tire. Otherwise, a

seriously dangerous situation may

occur.

The temporary spare tire is stored under

the under-floor storage compartment.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

456

(459,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. For the correct pres-

sure, refer to “Temporary Spare Tires”

�P536.

When using the temporary spare tire,

note the following.

. Drive with caution when the temporary

spare tire is installed. Avoid hard

acceleration and braking, or fast cor-

nering, as control of the vehicle may

be lost.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the

temporary spare tire. Because of the

smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit

properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road

clearance is reduced.

S_901519-W

Tread wear indicator bar

Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be

used only on a rear wheel. If a front

wheel tire gets punctured, replace the

wheel with a rear wheel and install the

temporary spare tire in place of the

removed rear wheel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

457

(460,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-3. MAINTENANCE TOOLS

s09ah

Your vehicle is equipped with the follow-

ing maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

. LN2 battery mounting pad

. Tire bag (models with 19 inches tires)

TOOL LOCATIONS

s09ah15

S_901520-W

LN2 battery mounting pad

Tire bag (models with 19 inches tires)

S_901521-W

Jack handle

Wheel nut wrench

Screwdriver

Jack

Towing hook (eye bolt)

The maintenance tools are stored under

the under-floor storage compartment. For

the method to use the jack, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P459.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

458

(461,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-4. FLAT TIRES

s09ac

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

s09ac01

WARNING

. Use only the jack and the jack

handle provided with your vehicle.

The jack supplied with the vehicle

is designed only for changing a tire.

Never put any part of your body

under the vehicle while the vehicle

is being supported by the jack.

Doing so could result in serious

injury or death.

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface. The

jack can come out of the jacking

point or sink into the ground and

this can result in serious injury or

death.

. Before jacking up the vehicle, be

sure that there are no occupants or

cargo on board.

. Do not jack up the vehicle with an

object on or underneath the jack.

The jack can be unstable and this

can result in a severe accident.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or push

the vehicle supported with the jack.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point due to a jolt and this

can result in serious injury or death.

. All passengers must exit the vehi-

cle before you raise it with the jack.

Raising the vehicle with someone

inside of it could result in serious

injury or death.

. Do not start the vehicle while it is

supported by the jack. Doing so

could result in serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor

backing plate when removing and

installing the tire. A bent backing plate

may scrape against the disc rotor and

cause noise while the vehicle is in

motion.

NOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking

up the vehicle using a garage jack.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

select lever in the “P” position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and unload all occupants and luggage

from the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat

tire.

S_901428-MW

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to

“Maintenance Tools” �P458.

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

459

(462,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

NOTE

. Make sure that the jack is well

lubricated before using it.

. To take out the tools and spare tire,

store the cargo area cover to the

original position and open the under-

floor storage compartment. Refer to

“Maintenance Tools” �P458.

6. Take out the under-floor storage

compartment and turn the attaching

bolt counterclockwise, then take the

spare tire out.

S_901429-W

NOTE

Carefully read “Temporary Spare Tire”

�P456 and strictly follow the instructions.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the

wheel nut wrench but do not remove

the nuts.

S_901430-MW

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to

the flat tire.

S_901426-W

9. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the

jack head engages firmly into the jack-

up point.

S_901431-W

10.Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the

vehicle higher than necessary.

S_901432-W

11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

12.Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and

hub with a cloth.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

460

(463,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_901433-MW

13.Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts when the spare tire is

installed. This could cause the nuts to

become loose and lead to an accident.

14.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

15.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order

in the illustration.

S_901522-MW

NOTE

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires” �P535. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

16.Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Install with the support

holder facing upward and secure the

flat tire by firmly tightening the attach-

ing bolt.

S_901523-W

Support holder

NOTE

. If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try

turning the support holder upside

down.

S_901466-W

. For models with 19-inch tires, put the

flat tire in the tire bag stored in the

vehicle. Store the tire in the bag in the

cargo area. For the exact location of

the stored tire bag, refer to “Tool

Locations” �P458.

17.Store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

461

(464,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in the

proper place.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac02

S_703147-W

The tire pressure monitoring system

provides the driver with the warning

message indicated by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused by running

over a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, never

brake suddenly. Instead, perform

the following procedure. Otherwise

an accident involving serious ve-

hicle damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure to

the COLD tire pressure shown

on the tire inflation pressure

label on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If

you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P459.

. When a replacement tire is

mounted or a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure sen-

sor/transmitter being transferred,

the low tire pressure warning light

will illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute. This

indicates the TPMS is unable to

monitor all four road wheels. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible for tire and sensor

replacement and/or system reset-

ting.

TPMS SCREEN (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac05

S_307558-W

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P201.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

462

(465,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-5. JUMP STARTING

s09ad

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area with

water immediately. Get medical

help if the fluid has entered your

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swal-

lowed, immediately drink a large

amount of milk or water, and obtain

immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst or

explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal ob-

jects such as rings, bands or other

metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have loose

or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables in

suitable condition are available.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away from

the cooling fan, drive belt and any

other moving engine parts. Re-

moving rings, watches and ties is

advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are unsure

about the proper procedure for

jump starting, consult a competent

mechanic.

S_901524-W

Fuse

. Never connect the jumper cables

to a fuse near the terminal of the

vehicle battery. Doing so may

ignite gases generated by the

battery and result in an explosion,

which could damage the electronic

devices and the engine.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehi-

cle may be jump started by connecting

your battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

463

(466,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

HOW TO JUMP START

s09ad01

S_901525-W

Booster battery

Strut mounting nut

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the dis-

charged battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other

cable to the negative (−) terminal

of the booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the

cable to the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any

other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the

vehicle that has the discharged bat-

tery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

464

(467,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-6. ENGINE OVERHEATING

s09ae

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

fully cooled down. When the engine is

hot, the coolant is under pressure.

Removing the cap while the engine is

still hot could release a spray of boiling

hot coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine

speed or the vehicle speed may be

reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately.

IF STEAM IS COMING FROM

THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

s09ae01

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

IF NO STEAM IS COMING FROM

THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

s09ae02

NOTE

For details about how to check the cool-

ant level or how to add coolant, refer to

“Engine Coolant” �P499.

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”

�P493.

3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning.

If the fan is not turning, immediately

turn off the engine and contact your

authorized dealer for repair.

4. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays in the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

5. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”

mark.

6. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill

the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by press-

ing down and turning it.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

465

(468,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-7. TOWING

s09af

S_901438-MW

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the front

wheels raised off the ground while the

rear wheels are on the ground, or with

the rear wheels raised off the ground

while the front wheels are on the

ground. This will cause the vehicle to

spin away due to the operation or

deterioration of the center differential.

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-

mends it be done by your SUBARU

dealer or a commercial towing service.

TOWING HOOK AND TIE-

DOWN HOOKS/HOLES

s09af01

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency.

SUBARU recommends towing be done

by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-

cial towing service.

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing hook

and tie-down hooks/holes. Never

use suspension parts or other parts

of the body for towing or tie-down

purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hole clo-

sest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

Front towing hook

s09af0112

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-

head screwdriver into the cutout of the

cover and pry open the cover.

S_901439-W

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until the threads can no

longer be seen.

S_901440-W

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

466

(469,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_901441-W

After towing, remove the towing hook

from the vehicle and stow it in the under-

floor storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing hook

after towing. Leaving the towing

hook mounted on the vehicle could

interfere with proper operation of

the SRS airbag system in a frontal

collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bumper

and the towing hook, do not apply an

excessive load to the towing hook.

Rear towing hook

s09af0105

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-

head screwdriver into the cutout of the

cover and pry open the cover.

S_901442-W

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until its thread can no

longer be seen.

S_901443-W

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

467

(470,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle.

S_901441-W

After towing, remove the towing hook

from the vehicle and stow it in the under-

floor storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing hook

after towing. Leaving the towing

hook mounted on the vehicle could

interfere with proper operation of

the fuel pump shut off function

when the vehicle is struck from

behind.

CAUTION

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply an excessive load to the

towing hook.

. For models equipped with the

BSD/RCTA system, when towing

another vehicle, touch “Rear Vehi-

cle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” to de-

activate the system. The system

may not operate properly due to

the blocked radar waves. For de-

tails about how to turn on/off the

Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/

RCTA), refer to “Settings icon (Car

settings)” �P231.

Front tie-down hooks

s09af0106

S_901444-W

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Front tie-down hooks are for tying down

the vehicle. They are not for towing.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

468

(471,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Rear tie-down holes

s09af0107

S_901526-W

Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

the plugs. After using the rear tie-down

holes, return the plugs to their original

places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are used

to anchor the vehicle in any other

direction, cables may slip out of the

holes, possibly causing a dangerous

situation.

USING A FLAT-BED TRUCK

s09af02

S_901446-MW

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each

safety chain should be equally tigh-

tened and care must be taken not to

pull the chains so tightly that the

suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

Transport by flat-bed truck may cause

the headlights to become misaligned.

In such a case, have the headlight

alignment checked by a SUBARU

dealer after transporting the vehicle by

flat-bed truck.

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

469

(472,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TOWING WITH ALL WHEELS

ON THE GROUND

s09af03

S_901447-MW

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the

vehicle is being towed because the

steering wheel and the direction of

the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not function

when the engine is not running.

Because the engine is turned off, it

will take greater effort to operate

the brake pedal and steering

wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-bed

truck.

. Sometime damaged vehicles can-

not be towed because of their

damaged condition. In that case,

use a flat-bed truck for transporta-

tion.

. The traveling speed must be lim-

ited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h)

and the traveling distance to less

than 31 miles (50 km). For greater

speeds and distances, transport

your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Use a flat-bed truck if there are

long distance downgrades or steep

slopes. However, do not apply the

brake pedal for a long time be-

cause the engine braking will not

work while towing. Doing so could

overheat the brake.

. Drive carefully and do not make an

impact on the towing rope by

suddenly starting.

. Use a specific towing rope for

towing. If wire ropes and metal

chains are needed to be used for

towing, wrap the contact portion of

the bumper with cloth to protect it

from damage.

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is

being towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

470

(473,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-8. IF THE ELECTRONIC

PARKING BRAKE CANNOT

BE RELEASED

s09an

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the elec-

tronic parking brake.

9-9. IF ACCESS KEY FOB

DOES NOT OPERATE

PROPERLY

s09ap

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters away

from the area between the access key

fob and the push-button ignition

switch. They may interfere with the

communication between the access

key fob and the push-button ignition

switch.

The following functions may be inoper-

able because of strong radio signals in

the surrounding area or a low battery

condition of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking all the doors in-

cluding rear gate

. Switching the power status

. Starting the engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the

access key fob is discharged, replace it

with a new one. Refer to “Replacing

Battery of Access Key Fob” �P526.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

s09ap01

S_204470-MW

Release button

Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

471

(474,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure de-

scribed in “Locking and Unlocking from

the Outside” �P137.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

SWITCHING POWER STATUS

s09ap02

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

S_901449-W

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the status of the

push-button ignition switch changes to

either of the following.

. When the keyless access with

push-button start system is deacti-

vated: “ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated,

press the push-button ignition switch

with the brake pedal released. The

status of the push-button ignition

switch then changes to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even though

the above procedure was followed pre-

cisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

STARTING ENGINE

s09ap03

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

S_901450-W

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the push-button

ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position,

while depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though

the above procedure was followed pre-

cisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

472

(475,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-10. IF THE REAR GATE

CANNOT BE OPENED

s09ag

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by pressing the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Remove the access cover at

the bottom-center of the rear gate trim

using flat-head screwdriver.

S_901451-W

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate lock

release lever with your fingers be-

cause doing so may cause an injury.

Always use a flat-head screwdriver or

a similar tool.

2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to

the right position using a flat-head

screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the

rear gate will open.

Models without power rear gate

S_901502-W

Models with power rear gate

S_901452-W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

473

(476,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-11. MALFUNCTIONS OF

THE CENTER INFORMATION

DISPLAY

s09av

If the following screens are displayed,

temporary errors or malfunctions may

occur in the center information display.

If they are only temporary errors, the

following procedure may help to eliminate

them.

Shutting down the screen

S_901453-W

Freezing the screen

S_901454-W

Blacking out the screen

S_901455-W

Error A

S_901456-W

Error B

S_901457-W

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn the ignition switch once to the

“LOCK/OFF” position, then start the

engine.

3. If the center information display can-

not be recovered even though the

engine has been restarted, press and

hold the volume knob for more than 10

seconds. The center information dis-

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

474

(477,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

play will start up again.

S_901528-W

Volume knob

4. If the center information display is not

recovered by restarting it, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

9-12. IF THE MOONROOF (If

Equipped) DOES NOT

s09aj

If the moonroof does not close, have the

system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

475

(478,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-13. IF THE FUEL FILLER

LID CANNOT BE OPENED

s09aw

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to

a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be

opened from the cargo area.

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Remove the access cover at

the right-side of the cargo area trim

using a flat-head screwdriver.

S_703120-W

2. Remove the clip from the trim.

S_901529-W

Clip

3. Pull the clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.

S_703122-W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

476

(479,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

9-14. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS

INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT

s09ar

TO RESTART THE ENGINE

WHEN INVOLVED IN AN ACCI-

DENT

s09ar02

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before re-

starting the engine. If you find that fuel

has leaked on the ground, do not try to

restart the engine. The fuel system

has been damaged and is in need of

repair. Immediately contact the near-

est automotive service facility. Consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to

restart the engine after the system is

activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING/

UNLOCKING OPERATION

WHEN INVOLVED IN AN ACCI-

DENT

s09ar03

When the automatic door locking/un-

locking function is ON, all the doors will be

locked automatically while driving. For

further details, refer to “Automatic Door

Locking/Unlocking” �P139.

When the vehicle sustains a strong

impact which may trigger the airbags to

deploy, the door locks may be unlocked

automatically to enable emergency es-

cape. Generally, an impact sustained

from a rear end collision does not trigger

the airbags to deploy. However if the

impact is strong enough to deploy the

airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking

function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic

door locking/unlocking function will be

suspended and the doors will remain

unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings

first and carry out the following to retrieve

the automatic door locking/unlocking

function.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the impact,

the emergency unlocking may not func-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

477

(480,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may be a

malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. The doors unlock automatically

while driving.

. With all doors shut, the doors

unlock when pressing the lock side

of the power door locking switch.

. The automatic door locking/un-

locking function does not operate.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

478

(481,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s10

10-1. Exterior Care ...............................................................................480

Washing ..................................................................................... 480

Waxing and Polishing ................................................................. 481

Cleaning Alloy Wheels ................................................................ 481

10-2. Corrosion Protection ..................................................................482

Most Common Causes of Corrosion............................................ 482

To Help Prevent Corrosion .......................................................... 482

10-3. Cleaning the Interior ...................................................................483

Seat Fabric Material .................................................................... 483

Leather Seat Materials................................................................. 483

Synthetic Leather Upholstery ...................................................... 483

Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Combination

Meter, and Other Plastic Surface ............................................... 484

Center Information Display.......................................................... 484

APPEARANCE CARE

(482,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

10-1. EXTERIOR CARE

s10aa

WASHING

s10aa01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the

vehicle at a safe speed while lightly

pressing the brake pedal to heat up

the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction of

the power steering.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protruding

objects such as exhaust pipes and

exhaust finishers, be careful to

prevent injuries from contacting

sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if a

detergent with organic solvents is

used to wash the cover surface,

completely rinse off the detergent

with water. Otherwise, the cover

surface may be damaged.

. If the climate control system is

operating when you wash the

vehicle, do not set the air inlet

selection of the climate control to

outside air circulation mode. There

is a risk that water may enter the

vehicle through the air inlets.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in an

automatic car wash, make sure before-

hand that the car wash is of suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be

washed off by using a light detergent, as

required. If you use a light detergent,

make certain that it is a neutral detergent.

Do not use strong soap or chemical

detergents. All cleaning agents should be

promptly flushed from the surface and not

allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle

thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water.

Wipe the remaining water off with a

chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves

and use a hand brush when washing

down underbody, inner fenders and sus-

pension to effectively remove mud and

dirt off.

Washing the underbody

s10aa0101

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely

corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of

underbody components, such as the

exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and

suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and

inside of the fenders with lukewarm or

cold water at frequent intervals to reduce

the harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or

sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off

the underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

APPEARANCE CARE

480

(483,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing suspen-

sion components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

Using a warm water washer

s10aa0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle

and the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers

are of the high temperature, high

pressure type, and they can damage

or deform the resin parts such as

mouldings, or cause water to leak into

the vehicle.

WAXING AND POLISHING

s10aa02

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome

trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss

of wax on a painted surface leads to loss

of the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has

diminished to the point where the luster or

tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A No.

2000 grain compound is recommended.

Never use a coarse-grained compound.

Coarser grained compounds have a

smaller grain-size number and could

damage the paint. After polishing with a

compound, coat with wax to restore the

original luster. Frequent polishing with a

compound or an incorrect polishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is applied

to the cover surface, completely wipe

off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the

cover surface may be damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

CLEANING ALLOY WHEELS

s10aa04

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean

of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is

left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a

neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse

thoroughly with water. Do not clean

the wheels with a stiff brush or expose

them to a high-speed washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possi-

ble when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or

other agents.

APPEARANCE CARE

481

(484,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

10-2. CORROSION PROTEC-

TION

s10ab

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used

on most parts of the vehicle to help

maintain fine appearance, strength, and

reliable operation.

MOST COMMON CAUSES OF

CORROSION

s10ab01

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust

control chemicals, or used in coastal

areas where there is more salt in the

air, or in areas where there is con-

siderable industrial pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range

just above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

. High temperatures will cause corro-

sion to parts of the vehicle which

cannot dry quickly due to lack of

proper ventilation.

TO HELP PREVENT CORRO-

SION

s10ab02

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. Roads that have been salted to pre-

vent them from freezing in winter

. Mud, sand, or gravel

. Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components,

such as the exhaust system, fuel and

brake lines, brake cables, suspension,

steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If

any of them are found to be rusted, they

should be given an appropriate rust

prevention treatment or should be re-

placed. Contact your SUBARU dealer to

perform this kind of maintenance and

treatment if you need assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor

mats because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and

other corrosive materials are used, the

door hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and

hood latch should be inspected and

lubricated periodically.

APPEARANCE CARE

482

(485,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

10-3. CLEANING THE IN-

TERIOR

s10ac

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the

climate control panel, audio equipment,

instrument panel, center console, combi-

nation meter panel, and switches. (Do not

use organic solvents.)

SEAT FABRIC MATERIAL

s10ac01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to

its instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to dete-

riorate.

LEATHER SEAT MATERIALS

s10ac02

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on

the surface can cause leather to become

brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain

its resiliency, leather should be cleaned

monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.

Some types of clothing textiles may

transfer color to the leather.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-

cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap, taking care not to

soak the leather or allow water to pene-

trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle

circular motion while cleaning the leather

- do not rub or apply extreme pressure.

Wipe the leather again with another

clean, slightly damp cloth to remove soap

residue and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt

spots may be treated with a commercial

leather spray.

CAUTION

Never use alcohol, cleaning solvents,

leather oils, varnishes or polishes on

your leather as it will dry out the leather

finish.

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat

section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,

which is characteristic of genuine leather.

SYNTHETIC LEATHER UP-

HOLSTERY

s10ac03

The synthetic leather material used on

the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild

soap or detergent and water, after first

vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt.

Allow the soap to soak in for a few

minutes and wipe off with a clean, damp

cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners

suitable for synthetic leather materials

may be used when necessary. Much like

genuine leather, some types of fabric

used in clothing may transfer color to

synthetic leather. If you do not clean

transferred color from synthetic leather

for an extended period of time, it may be

difficult to remove the color, so be sure to

clean any such stains from synthetic

– CONTINUED –

APPEARANCE CARE

483

(486,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

leather promptly.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

Doing so could damage the surface

and cause the color to deteriorate.

INSTRUMENT PANEL, CON-

SOLE PANEL, SWITCHES,

COMBINATION METER, AND

OTHER PLASTIC SURFACE

s10ac04

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the

instrument panel, center console, combi-

nation meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or gasoline, or

strong cleaning agents that contain

those solvents. Doing so could

damage the surface and cause the

color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-conditioner or any

switches. If silicone adheres to

these parts, it may cause damage

to electrical components.

CENTER INFORMATION DIS-

PLAY

s10ac11

To clean the center information display,

wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft

cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely

dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened

with neutral detergent then carefully wipe

off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the display(s). Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the display(s) with a

hard cloth. Doing so could scratch

the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, gasoline, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches on the

display(s).

APPEARANCE CARE

484

(487,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(488,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(489,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
s11
11-1. Maintenance Schedule ...............................................................489
11-2. Maintenance Precautions ...........................................................489
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment ........... 490
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment ............ 491
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While
the Engine Is Running............................................................... 491
11-3. Maintenance Tips........................................................................492
When Replacing Parts................................................................. 492
Removing and Reinstalling Clips................................................. 492
11-4. Engine Hood................................................................................493
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview .................................................495
11-6. Engine Oil ....................................................................................496
Engine Oil Consumption ............................................................. 496
Checking the Oil Level ................................................................ 496
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter .................................................... 497
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ............................................ 497
Synthetic Oil ............................................................................... 498
11-7. Cooling System...........................................................................498
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ........................................... 499
Engine Coolant ........................................................................... 499
11-8. Air Cleaner Element....................................................................500
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element .............................................. 500
11-9. Spark Plugs .................................................................................502
Recommended Spark Plugs ........................................................ 502
11-10. Drive Belt .....................................................................................502
11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid ...............................503
11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil .......503
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ............................................ 503
11-13. Brake Fluid ..................................................................................504
Checking the Fluid Level............................................................. 504
Recommended Brake Fluid ......................................................... 504
11-14. Brake Pedal .................................................................................505
11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad.........................................................505
Breaking-In of New Brake Pads ................................................... 505
11-16. Tires and Wheels ........................................................................506
Types of Tires ............................................................................. 506
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)...... 507
Tire Inspection............................................................................ 508
Tire Pressures and Wear ............................................................. 509
Wheel Balance ............................................................................ 510
Wear Indicators........................................................................... 511
Rotational Direction of Tires........................................................ 511
Tire Rotation............................................................................... 512
Tire Replacement ........................................................................ 512
Wheel Replacement .................................................................... 513
11-17. Alloy Wheels ...............................................................................514
11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid ...........................................................514
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
11

(490,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades....................................................516
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly .............................................. 516
Window Wiper Blade Rubber....................................................... 517
Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly........................................... 518
Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber............................................... 518
11-20. Battery .........................................................................................519
11-21. Fuses ...........................................................................................521
11-22. Installation of Accessories.........................................................522
11-23. Replacing Bulbs..........................................................................523
Headlights .................................................................................. 523
Front Turn Signal Light (If Equipped)........................................... 523
Rear Combination Lights............................................................. 523
Other Bulbs ................................................................................ 525
Adjusting Headlight Aim ............................................................. 525
11-24. Replacing Battery .......................................................................526
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob.......................................... 526
Replacing Battery of Transmitter ................................................. 527
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

(491,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-1. MAINTENANCE SCHE-

DULE

s11aa

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required

to be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance sche-

dule, read the separate “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

11-2. MAINTENANCE PRE-

CAUTIONS

s11ab

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize your-

self with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty cover-

age.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be performed

on a single two-wheel dynam-

ometer or similar apparatus. At-

tempting to do so will result in

transmission damage and in un-

controlled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries

to persons nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehicle.

Remember that some of the ma-

terials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent to

do so. Serious personal injury may

result to persons not experienced

in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

489

(492,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the vehi-

cle.

. Never keep the engine running in a

poorly ventilated area, such as a

garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open flames

around the fuel or battery. This will

cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only by

your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids in

your eyes. If something does get in

your eyes, thoroughly wash them

out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of the

SRS airbag system or seatbelt

pretensioner system, or attempt to

take its connectors apart, as that

may activate the system or it can

render it inoperative. NEVER use a

circuit tester for these wiring. If your

SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-

sioner needs service, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

. Check the inside of the engine

compartment to see if there are any

cloths and tools left. If they are left

inside, they may be a cause of

malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing systems

and strongly advises against performing

these services on a SUBARU vehicle.

Non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems use chemicals and/or solvents

which have not been tested or approved

by SUBARU. SUBARU warranties do not

cover any part of the vehicle which is

damaged by adding or applying chemi-

cals and/or solvents other than those

approved or recommended by SUBARU.

BEFORE CHECKING OR SER-

VICING IN THE ENGINE COM-

PARTMENT

s11ab01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake to prevent the

vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan may

operate suddenly even when the

engine is stopped. If your body or

clothes come into contact with a

rotating fan, that could result in

serious injury. To avoid risk of

injury, perform the following pre-

cautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key fob out from the

vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing on

a vehicle equipped with a remote

engine start system temporarily

place that system in the service

mode to prevent it from unexpect-

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

490

(493,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

edly starting the engine.

WHEN CHECKING OR SERVI-

CING IN THE ENGINE COM-

PARTMENT

s11ab03

CAUTION

S_B02345-W

. Do not contact the belt cover while

checking the components in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause your hand to slip off the

belt cover and result in an unex-

pected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil filter

becomes very hot when the engine

is running and remains hot for

some time after the engine has

stopped.

WHEN CHECKING OR SERVI-

CING IN THE ENGINE COM-

PARTMENT WHILE THE EN-

GINE IS RUNNING

s11ab02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

S_B02470-W

Safety stand

For any maintenance and inspection

performed on AWD models which re-

quires a running engine and wheels

turning, jack up all four wheels or use free

rollers to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Never race the engine or brake suddenly.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

491

(494,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-3. MAINTENANCE TIPS

s11bi

WHEN REPLACING PARTS

s11bi04

For information about replacement parts

for maintenance, contact any authorized

SUBARU dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

REMOVING AND REINSTAL-

LING CLIPS

s11bi01

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

element or specific bulbs.

Removing clips

s11bi0101

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

Type A:

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

S_B02347-MW

2. Remove the clips with a flat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

Type B:

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as

shown in the illustration.

S_B02349-MW

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

Type C:

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

S_B02350-MW

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

492

(495,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Reinstalling clips

s11bi0102

S_B02351-MW

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of

the clip into the hole.

11-4. ENGINE HOOD

s11ac

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to the

engine hood. If the engine hood

becomes too heavy, the stay may

not be able to support holding it

open.

. Check that the end of the hood

prop is inserted into the slot. If it is

not inserted properly, the hood may

drop and cause injury.

NOTE

If the base of the hood prop is jammed,

put the hood prop back in position without

applying excessive force.

Opening the engine hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their origi-

nal position.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

493

(496,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

S_B02355-MW

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

S_B02356-W

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Hold the grip for handling the hood

prop.

S_B02471-W

Grip

Closing the engine hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood

and return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood to a height of ap-

proximately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm)

above its closed position and then let it

drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is properly

locked before you start driving. If it is

not, it might fly open while the vehicle

is moving and block your view, which

may cause an accident and serious

bodily injury.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

494

(497,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-5. ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW

s11ad

S_B02472-W

Brake fluid reservoir (page 504)

Main fuse box (page 521)

Battery (page 519)

Washer fluid tank (page 514)

Engine oil filler cap (page 496)

Engine coolant reservoir (page 499)

Radiator cap (page 499)

Engine oil filter (page 497)

Engine oil level gauge (page 496)

Air cleaner case (page 500)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

495

(498,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-6. ENGINE OIL

s11ae

CAUTION

. If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,

you may be injured accidentally

straining yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the re-

commended grade and viscosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

s11ae07

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance

intervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods

of time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of

time)

. When towing a trailer

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under

severe thermal conditions

. When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil

more frequently. Different drivers in the

same car may experience different re-

sults. If your oil consumption rate is

greater than expected, contact your

authorized SUBARU dealer who may

perform a test under controlled condi-

tions.

CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL

s11ae01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil

level just after stopping the engine,

wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before

checking the level.

CAUTION

If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right and

left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you

may be injured accidentally straining

yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

S_B02473-W

Oil level gauge

Oil filler cap

Oil filter

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

496

(499,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

S_B02474-MW

Full level

Low level

Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of

the level gauge. The engine oil level

must be judged by the lowest of the

two levels. If the oil level is below the

low level mark, add oil so that the full

level is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil filler

cap. Doing so may result in a burn,

a pinched finger, or may cause

some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the re-

commended grade and viscosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do

not add any additional oil above the

full level when the engine is cold.

. After adding or changing the engine

oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a

level surface, then start the engine

after a lapse of 1 minute or more.

Confirm that the warning light has

turned off after the engine has started.

Refer to “Engine Low Oil Level Warn-

ing Light” �P180.

CHANGING THE OIL AND OIL

FILTER

s11ae02

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in

extremely cold weather.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil

filter. Fully trained mechanics are on

standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize

the special tools, spare parts and

recommended oil for this work, and

also, used oils are properly disposed

of.

. If performing oil replacement yourself,

observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

RECOMMENDED GRADE AND

VISCOSITY

s11ae03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

497

(500,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Refer to “Engine Oil” �P533.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However, in

hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the engine.

SYNTHETIC OIL

s11ae05

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using

synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

Oil” �P533. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recommended

engine oil for optimum engine perfor-

mance. Conventional oil may be used if

synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-7. COOLING SYSTEM

s11af

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and

has cooled down completely. Since

the coolant is under pressure, you

may suffer serious burns from a

spray of boiling hot coolant when

the cap is removed.

. Be careful of the rotating cooling

fan when the engine hood is open.

When the engine temperature is

high, the cooling fan in the engine

compartment may operate when

the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, even if the engine is

stopped. Touching the cooling fan

while it is rotating may result in

injury.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

that does not require the first

change for 11 years/137,500 miles

(11 years/220,000 km). Do not mix

this coolant with any other brand or

type of coolant during this period.

Mixing with a different coolant will

reduce the life of the coolant. When

necessary to top up the coolant for

any reason, use only SUBARU

SUPER COOLANT.

If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is

diluted with another brand or type,

the maintenance interval is shor-

tened to that of the mixing coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

498

(501,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

COOLING FAN, HOSE AND

CONNECTIONS

s11af03

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

S_B02475-W

Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not

operate even when the engine coolant

temperature gauge exceeds the normal

operating range, the cooling fan circuit

may be defective. Refer to “Engine

Coolant Temperature Gauge” �P173.

Check the fuse and replace it if neces-

sary. Refer to “Fuses” �P521. If the fuse

is not blown, have the cooling system

checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is

necessary between vehicle service visits,

it is recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer to check for leaks,

damage, or looseness.

ENGINE COOLANT

s11af02

S_B02476-W

“FULL” level mark

“LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

Checking the coolant level

s11af0201

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is

cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to

the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve

tank is empty, remove the radiator cap

and refill coolant up to just below the

filler neck as shown in the following

illustration.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, check the radiator cap for

debris and the gasket rubber for

damage.

S_B02477-W

Fill up to this level.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

499

(502,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_B02364-MW

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine cool-

ant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If engine coolant gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

4. Reinstall the cap and check that the

rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

Changing the coolant

s11af0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

11-8. AIR CLEANER ELE-

MENT

s11ag

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the air

cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters intake

air but also stops flames if the engine

backfires. If the air cleaner element is

not installed when the engine back-

fires, you could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used, there

is the possibility of causing a negative

effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the air cleaner ele-

ment is perforated or removed, engine

wear will be excessive and engine life

shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

REPLACING THE AIR CLEA-

NER ELEMENT

s11ag01

Replace the air cleaner element accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Under extremely dusty conditions, re-

place it more frequently. It is recom-

mended that you always use genuine

SUBARU parts.

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

500

(503,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_B02478-W

Clips

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

S_B02366-W

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner

case (both front and rear) with a damp

cloth and install a new air cleaner

element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the projections on the air clea-

ner case (rear) into the slits on the air

cleaner case (front).

S_B02367-W

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that the

surface with “UPR” printed on it faces

upward.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

501

(504,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-9. SPARK PLUGS

s11ah

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

RECOMMENDED SPARK

PLUGS

s11ah01

Refer to “Electrical System” �P535.

11-10. DRIVE BELT

s11ai

It is unnecessary to check the deflection

of the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement

of the drive belt should be done according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for repla-

cement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

502

(505,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-11. CONTINUOUSLY

VARIABLE TRANSMISSION

FLUID

s11ay

There is no fluid level gauge. It is

unnecessary to check the continuously

variable transmission fluid level. How-

ever, if necessary, consult your SUBARU

dealer for inspection.

11-12. FRONT DIFFEREN-

TIAL GEAR OIL AND REAR

DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

s11bl

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

RECOMMENDED GRADE AND

VISCOSITY

s11bl01

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Front Differential and Rear Differential

Gear Oil” �P534.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other than

the specified oil may cause a decline

in vehicle performance.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

503

(506,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-13. BRAKE FLUID

s11ao

CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL

s11ao01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately

flush them thoroughly with clean

water. For safety, when performing

this work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air. Any absorbed moisture can

cause a dangerous loss of braking

performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If you

suspect a problem, have the ve-

hicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake fluid

may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the

reservoir monthly on the even surface.

S_B02479-W

“MAX” level line

“MIN” level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from

the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid

level is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to

“MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed

container.

RECOMMENDED BRAKE

FLUID

s11ao02

Refer to “Fluids” �P535.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT

3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they

are the same brand.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

504

(507,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-14. BRAKE PEDAL

s11ar

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

11-15. REPLACEMENT OF

BRAKE PAD

s11at

CAUTION

. If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

. It is recommended that you dis-

connect the vehicle battery before

replacing the brake pad. However,

it is dangerous to disconnect the

vehicle battery. Have your

SUBARU dealer replace the brake

pad.

S_B02369-MW

The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

BREAKING-IN OF NEW BRAKE

PADS

s11at01

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

505

(508,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Brake pad

s11at0101

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times.

11-16. TIRES AND WHEELS

s11av

TYPES OF TIRES

s11av01

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle are all season tires.

All season tires

s11av0101

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, hand-

ling and braking performance in year-

round driving including snowy and icy

road conditions. However, all season tires

do not offer as much traction performance

as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose

snow or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow)

on the tire sidewall.

Summer tires

s11av0102

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

Winter (snow) tires

s11av0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However,

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on

roads other than snow-covered and icy

roads.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

506

(509,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s11av02

The tire pressure monitoring system

provides the driver with a warning mes-

sage by sending a signal from a sensor

that is installed in each wheel when tire

pressure is severely low. The tire pres-

sure monitoring system will activate only

when the vehicle is driven. Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pres-

sure warning light to illuminate. To avoid

this problem when adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, inflate the

tires to pressures higher than those

shown on the tire inflation pressure label.

Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi

(6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for every differ-

ence of 10°F (5.6°C) between the tem-

perature in the garage and the tempera-

ture outside. By way of example, the

following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various

outside temperatures when the tempera-

ture in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).

Example:

Tire size: 225/60R17 99H, 225/55R18

98V

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

30°F (−1°C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

10°F (−12°C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

−10°F (−23°C) 41 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method de-

scribed above. Then, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and

check to see that the low tire pressure

warning light goes off a few minutes later.

If the low tire pressure warning light does

not go off, the tire pressure monitoring

system may not be functioning normally.

In this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected as soon as

possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to go off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned on or the light

illuminates steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute, you should

have your Tire Pressure Monitoring

System checked at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

507

(510,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

3) Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the

COLD tire pressure shown on the

tire inflation pressure label on the

door pillar on the driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may have significant damage and a

fast leak that causes the tire to lose air

rapidly. If you have a flat tire, refer to

“Flat Tires” �P459.

When a replacement tire is mounted

or a wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the TPMS

is unable to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible for tire and sensor

replacement and/or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

TPMS valve self-registration

s11av0201

When the wheels are replaced (such as

when installing snow tires) or when a new

TPMS valve is mounted on a new

installed wheel, you will need to perform

TPMS valve self-registration. Refer to the

following procedure to perform TPMS

valve self-registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves

on the vehicle.

2. Adjust the tire pressure to the speci-

fied value. For information about the

specified value of the tire pressure,

refer to “Tires” �P535.

3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40

km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until

the low tire pressure warning light

turns off.

NOTE

. When installing TPMS valves, use

only genuine SUBARU parts.

. Registration of TPMS valves can also

be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult

your SUBARU dealer.

TIRE INSPECTION

s11av03

Check on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same

time, check the tires for abnormal

wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires

strike curbs or are subjected to

harsh treatment as when the

vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the

naked eye. This type of damage

does not become evident until

time has passed. Try not to drive

over curbs, potholes or on other

rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s

speed down to a walking pace

or less, and approach the curbs

as squarely as possible. Also,

make sure the tires are not

pressed against the curb when

you park the vehicle.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

508

(511,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. If you feel unusual vibration

while driving or find it difficult to

steer the vehicle in a straight

line, one of the tires and/or

wheels may be damaged. Drive

slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the

vehicle inspected.

TIRE PRESSURES AND WEAR

s11av04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-

sures helps to maximize the tires’

service lives and is essential for

good running performance. Check

and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month

and before any long journey.

Tire inflation pressure label

S_B02370-MW

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the values shown on the tire

inflation pressure label. The tire

inflation pressure label is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Driving even a short distance

warms up the tires and increases

the tire pressures. Also, the tire

pressures are affected by the out-

side temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors be-

fore driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful

not to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire in-

creases by approximately 4.3

psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

) when

the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours or

has been driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will

result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract

from controllability and ride com-

fort, and they cause the tires to

wear abnormally.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

509

(512,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Correctly inflated tires (tread

worn evenly)

S_B02371-MW

Roadholding is good, and steering

is responsive. Rolling resistance is

low, so fuel consumption is also

lower.

. Under inflated tires (tread worn

at shoulders)

S_B02372-MW

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel

consumption is also higher.

. Over inflated tires (tread worn in

center)

S_B02373-MW

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road sur-

face bumps and dips, possibly

resulting in vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly become

hot. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread se-

paration, and destruction of the

tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an

accident.

WHEEL BALANCE

s11av05

Each wheel was correctly ba-

lanced when your vehicle was new,

but the wheels will become unba-

lanced as the tires become worn

during use. Wheel imbalance

causes the steering wheel to vi-

brate slightly at certain vehicle

speeds and detracts from the

vehicle’s straight-line stability. It

can also cause steering and sus-

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

510

(513,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

pension system problems and ab-

normal tire wear. If you suspect

that the wheels are not correctly

balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire

repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment

causes the tires to wear on one

side and reduces the vehicle’s

running stability. Contact your

SUBARU dealer if you notice

abnormal tire wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is de-

signed to hold each wheel at a

certain alignment (relative to the

other wheels and to the road) for

optimum straight-line stability and

cornering performance.

WEAR INDICATORS

s11av06

S_B02480-MW

New tread

Worn tread

Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible

when the depth of the tread

grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6

mm). A tire must be replaced when

the tread wear indicator appears

as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-

cator becomes visible, the tire is

worn beyond the acceptable

limit and must be replaced im-

mediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at high speeds

in wet weather can cause the

vehicle to hydroplane. The re-

sulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread

regularly and replace the tires

before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

ROTATIONAL DIRECTION OF

TIRES

s11av11

Example of rotational direction

marked on the sidewall:

S_B02481-MW

Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

511

(514,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels

are fitted.

TIRE ROTATION

s11av07

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-

unidirectional tires:

S_B02482-MW

Front

Vehicles equipped with unidi-

rectional tires:

S_B02483-MW

Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to

wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each

time they are rotated. For the tire

rotation schedule, refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the

wheel nuts are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km), check the wheel

nuts again and retighten any nut

that has become loose.

TIRE REPLACEMENT

s11av08

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standard equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire inflation pressure label.

For more details about tire inflation

pressure, refer to “Tires” �P535.

Using tires of a non-specified size de-

tracts from controllability, ride comfort,

braking performance, speedometer ac-

curacy and odometer accuracy. It also

creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances

and inappropriately changes the vehicle’s

ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern),

construction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard

equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing tire(s),

all four tires must be the same for

the following items.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

512

(515,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey

the specification that is printed on

the tire inflation pressure label. The

tire inflation pressure label is

located on the driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechanical

damage could be caused to the

drivetrain of the car, and affect the

followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control, and it

can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously reduce

controllability, resulting in an acci-

dent.

WHEEL REPLACEMENT

s11av09

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are speci-

fied for your vehicle. Wheels not

meeting specifications could interfere

with brake caliper operation and may

cause the tires to rub against the

wheel well housing during turns. The

resulting loss of vehicle control could

lead to an accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed and

replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat tire, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

513

(516,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-17. ALLOY WHEELS

s11bm

Alloy wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat, always check the tight-

ness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU

parts designed for alloy wheels.

. When stacking and storing removed

tires, place shock-absorbing material

between the tires to protect the wheels

from becoming scratched.

11-18. WINDSHIELD

WASHER FLUID

s11ax

S_B02378-W

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will appear.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as

follows.

S_B02484-W

“FULL” mark

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

514

(517,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark

on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield

washer fluid.

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid

with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the washer fluid

tank and washer nozzles by operating the

washer for a certain period of time.

Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid

remaining in the piping is too low for the

outside temperature, it may freeze and

block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer

fluid may freeze on the windshield

and obstruct your view, and the

fluid may freeze in the washer fluid

tank.

. Be careful foreign matter does not

contaminate the washer fluid when

filling the tank. Contamination

could cause malfunctions, such as

clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on vola-

tile organic compounds may re-

strict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used only

if they provide cold weather pro-

tection without damaging your ve-

hicle’s paint, wiper blades or

washer system.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

515

(518,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-19. REPLACEMENT OF

WIPER BLADES

s11az

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results

in jerky wiper operation and streaking on

the glass. If you cannot remove the

streaks after operating the windshield

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

and rear window using a sponge or soft

cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-

abrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use

detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use

only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral

detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when

you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe

the rubber of the blade strongly, the black

coating component will peel off, which will

cause the wiper to judder. Also, after

wiping it off, check that the rubber has not

come loose. After cleaning the window

glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to

rinse them with clean water. Rinse the

window until the water does not form

beads on the glass. This indicates that the

glass is clean.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as paint

thinner or benzine. This will cause

deterioration of the wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the pas-

senger-side wiper arm, first raise

the driver-side wiper arm. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper arm

to its original position. Otherwise,

the passenger-side wiper assem-

bly and driver-side wiper assembly

will touch each other, possibly

resulting in scratches.

. When returning the raised wipers

to the original positions, return the

wipers slowly on the windshield by

hand. Returning the wipers from

the detached positions by the

spring operation might change the

shape of the wiper arm or scratch

the windshield.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not return

the wiper arms to the original

positions. Otherwise, the wind-

shield surface may be scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE

ASSEMBLY

s11az01

NOTE

Do not lower the wiper arm while the

wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

First raise the driver’s side wiper arm

and then raise the front passenger’s

side wiper arm.

CAUTION

S_B02380-MW

Hold the wiper arm when replacing the

wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade,

may result in blade deformation.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

516

(519,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release

the lock, and then pull out the wiper

blade assembly.

S_B02485-W

Lock knob

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the lock

knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm

connection part and then slide it in the

opposite direction of removal to install.

After installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, check that the connection part

is locked completely.

S_B02382-W

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

WINDOW WIPER BLADE RUB-

BER

s11az05

Replace the wiper blade rubber accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber from the

right side in the order of

, and

until the slit on the wiper blade can be

seen position.

S_B02486-W

Slit

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

S_B02384-W

3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber into

the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade

rubber into the wrong slit.

S_B02385-W

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

517

(520,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

ASSEMBLY

s11az03

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

S_B02386-W

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

S_B02387-W

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

RUBBER

s11az04

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

S_B02388-W

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

S_B02389-W

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the

metal spines from the old blade rubber

and install them in the new blade

rubber.

S_B02487-W

Metal spines

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

518

(521,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_B02391-W

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic sup-

port ends. If the rubber is not retained

properly, the wiper may scratch the

rear window glass.

S_B02392-W

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in

place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

11-20. BATTERY

s11ba

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection or

shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over a

battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swal-

lowed, immediately drink a large

amount of milk or water, and seek

medical attention immediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact with

any other metallic portion of the

vehicle because a short circuit will

result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-venti-

lated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead and

lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

519

(522,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

harm. Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer. Wash

hands after handling.

Q-85 Battery

S_B02488-W

Cap

Upper level

Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water. Refer to

“Electrical System” �P535.

For “SUBARU STARLINK Safety and

Security” without navigation system:

When the vehicle battery is discharged or

replaced, certain internal settings can be

restored only by pairing the vehicle to a

smartphone via Bluetooth, or by visiting a

SUBARU dealer. Until those internal

settings are restored, certain conveni-

ence features, including the “Service

Appointment Scheduler,” may be una-

vailable.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because it

will shorten battery life.

NOTE

To avoid battery drain, do not use electric

power (e.g., lights, wipers, climate con-

trol, seat heaters, etc.) for longer than

necessary when the engine is off. If using

the radio, room lights or other electrical

equipment with the engine off, even if the

ignition switch is in the “ACC” position, the

battery will drain.

NOTE

S_B02489-W

LN2 battery mounting pad

When installing an LN2 type battery, use

a special battery mounting pad on board

the vehicle. If the correct battery mount-

ing pad is not used, the battery terminals

will not be in the proper installation

position. For information about where to

store the battery mounting pad, refer to

“Tool Locations” �P458.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

520

(523,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-21. FUSES

s11bb

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having a

higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and used circuit are de-

scribed on behind each fuse box cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

S_B02394-MW

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

S_B02490-W

Spare fuses

Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed

in the engine compartment. Also, the

spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in

the fuse box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.

S_B02491-W

Good

Blown

If any lights, accessories or other elec-

trical controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all elec-

trical accessories.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

S_B02397-W

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the

same rating.

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

521

(524,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a pro-

blem. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for repairs.

11-22. INSTALLATION OF

ACCESSORIES

s11bd

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle. We recommend that you

install only genuine SUBARU acces-

sories on your vehicle.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

522

(525,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-23. REPLACING BULBS

s11be

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is

the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb

of the specified wattage. Using a bulb

of different wattage could result in a

fire. For the specified wattage of each

bulb, refer to “Bulb Chart” �P537. For

replacement, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Do not touch the glass portion of the

light bulb with bare hands. When

holding the glass portion is unavoid-

able, hold it with a clean dry cloth to

avoid getting moisture and grease on

the bulb. If there are any fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface, wipe them

away with a soft cloth moistened with

alcohol. Also, if the bulb is scratched

or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

HEADLIGHTS

s11be18

S_B02398-W

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

We recommend that you have your

vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT (If

Equipped)

s11be03

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb and remove the bulb

from the headlight assembly by turn-

ing it counterclockwise.

S_B02492-W

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and

replace the bulb with a new one.

REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS

s11be05

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clips of the covers.

S_B02399-W

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

523

(526,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Remove the side cover.

S_B02400-W

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

S_B02401-W

4. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward to remove it from the

vehicle.

S_B02402-W

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

S_B02403-W

6. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning

it counterclockwise.

S_B02493-W

Rear turn signal light

7. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

8. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

9. Reconnect the electrical connector.

10.Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged

part of the combination light assembly

securely to each holder of the vehicle

side.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

524

(527,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

S_B02405-W

11. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

12.Reinstall the side cover.

OTHER BULBS

s11be29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We

recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

ADJUSTING HEADLIGHT AIM

s11be57

S_B02494-W

Adjustment screw A

Adjustment screw B

Before checking the headlight

aiming

s11be5701

1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of

gasoline and the area around the

headlight is not deformed.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Sit in the driver’s seat.

4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

Headlight aim adjustment

s11be5702

S_B02495-W

Adjustment direction mark

1. Turn the screw A clockwise or coun-

terclockwise to adjust it.

Remember the direction of the rotation

and number of rotations.

S_B02496-W

Adjustment direction mark

2. Turn screw B the same number of

turns and in the same direction as step

NOTE

. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-

justed, contact your SUBARU dealer.

. To inspect of the headlight aim posi-

tion, consult a SUBARU dealer.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

525

(528,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

11-24. REPLACING BAT-

TERY

s11bk

The access key fob/transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable.

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable.

. The transmitter does not operate

properly when used within the stan-

dard distance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmitter

when replacing battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the access

key fob/transmitter when replacing

the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any removed

parts; children could swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion if

the battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of the battery.

. Batteries shall not be exposed to

excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according to

the local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be

careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

should be replaced by a SUBARU

dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key fob/transmitter

functions properly.

REPLACING BATTERY OF AC-

CESS KEY FOB

s11bk01

Button battery: CR2032 or equivalent

CAUTION

. When removing or fitting the ac-

cess key fob cover, make sure that

the plastic part does not come off or

become misaligned.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

1. Take out the emergency key.

S_204470-MW

Release button

Emergency key

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

526

(529,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with

vinyl tape or a cloth, and insert it in the

gap to remove the cover.

S_B02411-MW

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

S_B02412-MW

4. Insert a new battery with its positive

(+) side facing upward as shown in the

figure.

S_B02413-MW

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

S_B02414-MW

REPLACING BATTERY OF

TRANSMITTER

s11bk02

Button battery: CR2025 or equivalent

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery, remove

any static electricity.

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

S_B02415-W

– CONTINUED –

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

527

(530,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

S_B02416-MW

3. Open the transmitter case by releas-

ing the hooks.

S_B02417-W

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR2025 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery

with the negative (−) side facing up.

S_B02498-W

Negative (−) side facing up

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button six

times to synchronize the unit.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

528

(531,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(532,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(533,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s12

12-1. Specifications..............................................................................532

Dimensions................................................................................. 532

Engine ........................................................................................ 532

Fuel ............................................................................................ 532

Engine Oil................................................................................... 533

Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil ........................... 534

Fluids ......................................................................................... 535

Engine Coolant ........................................................................... 535

Electrical System ........................................................................ 535

Tires ........................................................................................... 535

Temporary Spare Tires ................................................................ 536

Brake Disc .................................................................................. 536

12-2. Bulb Chart ...................................................................................537

Safety Precautions...................................................................... 537

Bulb Chart .................................................................................. 538

12-3. Vehicle Identification ..................................................................540

12-4. Function Settings........................................................................541

Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information

Display ..................................................................................... 541

Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center

Information Display................................................................... 541

Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer.......... 541

SPECIFICATIONS

(534,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

12-1. SPECIFICATIONS

s12aa

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

DIMENSIONS

s12aa01

in (mm)

Overall length 183.3 (4,655)

Overall width 72.0 (1,830)

Overall height 68.1 (1,730)

Wheel base 105.1 (2,670)

Tread

Front

Models with 17 inches tires or 18 inches

tires

61.6 (1,565)

Models with 19 inches tires 61.8 (1,570)

Rear

Models with 17 inches tires or 18 inches

tires

61.8 (1,570)

Models with 19 inches tires 62.0 (1,575)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*: Measured with vehicle empty

ENGINE

s12aa02

Engine model FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)

Compression ratio 12.0

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

FUEL

s12aa08

Fuel requirement Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

Fuel tank capacity

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “

Fuel” �P324.

SPECIFICATIONS

532

(535,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

ENGINE OIL

s12aa12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil”

�P496.

NOTE

Have the procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter performed by a properly-

trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your

SUBARU dealer.

Approved engine oil

s12aa1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the

next page.

Alternative engine oil

s12aa1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for

replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.

. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will

enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy.

However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the

engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable

temperatures.

. When adding oil, you may use different brands together as long as they are the

same ILSAC and API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by

SUBARU.

– CONTINUED –

SPECIFICATIONS

533

(536,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Oil grade

ZOM0981-W

ZOM0982-W

ZOM0983-W

ILSAC (International Lubri-

cant Specification Advisory

Committee) GF-6B, which

can be identified with the

ILSAC certification mark

(Shield mark)

ILSAC (International Lubri-

cant Specification Advisory

Committee) GF-6A, which

can be identified with the

ILSAC certification mark

(Starburst mark)

API (American Petroleum

Institute) classification SP

with the words “RE-

SOURCE CONSERVING”

SAE viscosity No.

and applicable

temperature

0W-16 synthetic oil is the required oil for optimum engine performance and protection.

Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

ZOM0984-W

*: If 0W-16 synthetic oil is not available, 0W-20 conventional oil may be used if

replenishment is needed but should be changed to 0W-16 synthetic oil at the next oil

change.

Engine oil capacity

. Adding the oil from L to F level: 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)

. Changing the oil and oil filter: 4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)

. Changing the oil: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL AND REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

s12aa13

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

Oil capacity*

1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P503

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly

depending on the temperature and other factors. Check the oil level after refilling the gearbox with oil.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.

SPECIFICATIONS

534

(537,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

FLUIDS

s12aa10

Fluid Continuously variable transmission fluid Brake fluid

Fluid type*

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

Fluid capacity*

11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt) —

Remarks*

“Continuously Variable Transmission

Fluid” �P503

“Brake Fluid” �P504

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly

depending on the temperature and other factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

ENGINE COOLANT

s12aa11

Coolant capacity 8.7 US qt (8.2 liters, 7.2 Imp qt)

Coolant type

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly

depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to

“

Cooling System” �P498.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

s12aa03

Battery type Q-85

Alternator 12 V-130 A

Spark plugs

DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)

TIRES

s12aa05

Tire size 225/60R17 99H 225/55R18 98V 235/50R19 99V

Wheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J 19 6 7 1/2 J

Pressure

Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening tor-

que

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut

wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest

automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “

Changing a

Flat Tire” �P459.

– CONTINUED –

SPECIFICATIONS

535

(538,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRES

s12aa15

Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17 T155/80 D17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

BRAKE DISC

s12aa18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for

measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.

SPECIFICATIONS

536

(539,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

12-2. BULB CHART

s12ac

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s12ac03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a

risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb

of the specified wattage. Using a bulb

of different wattage could result in a

fire.

– CONTINUED –

SPECIFICATIONS

537

(540,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

BULB CHART

s12ac04

S_C00634-W

NOTE

Light sources indicated by a number are light bulbs, and light sources indicated by a

letter are LEDs. For LED replacement, consult your SUBARU dealer.

SPECIFICATIONS

538

(541,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Wattage Bulb No.

Vanity mirror lights 12 V-2 W —

Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W

Door step lights 12 V-5 W W5W

Front turn signal lights (if equipped) 12 V-21 W WY21W

Map lights — —

Dome light — —

Side turn signal lights (if equipped) — —

License plate lights — —

High-mounted stop light — —

Tail lights — —

Stop lights — —

Rear side marker lights — —

Backup light — —

Front fog lights (if equipped) — —

Front position lights — —

Front side marker light — —

Low and high beam headlights — —

Daytime running light — —

Front turn signal lights (if equipped) — —

Accessory lamp (if equipped) — —

Rear gate light — —

Cargo area light — —

SPECIFICATIONS

539

(542,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

12-3. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

s12ad

S_C00635-W

Vehicle identification number (under

the floor carpet of the right-hand front

seat)

Emission control label

Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle

placard)

Certification label

Vehicle identification number

Model number label

Fuel label

Air conditioner label

SPECIFICATIONS

540

(543,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

12-4. FUNCTION SETTINGS

s12ag

FUNCTION SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS ON THE CENTER

INFORMATION DISPLAY

s12ag01

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to

meet your personal requirements. Refer to “Center Information Display (CID) Features”

�P205.

INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS EXCLUDING CEN-

TER INFORMATION DISPLAY

s12ag02

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system

Operation/Non-op-

eration

Operation 144

Remote keyless en-

try system

Audible signal

Operation/Non-op-

eration

Operation

134

FUNCTION SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS PERFORMED BY A

DEALER

s12ag03

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Alarm system

Monitoring start delay time (after

closing doors)

0 seconds/30

seconds

30 seconds

Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area

light illumination

ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access with

push-button

Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 6

Remote keyless entry

system

Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 6

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention

Operation/Non-

operation

Operation

Auto dimmer cancel

Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/

Mid/Hi/Max

Mid

High beam assist func-

tion

High beam assist function

Operation/Non-

operation

Operation

Reverse gear inter-

locked rear wiper

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper

operation

Operation/Non-

operation

U.S.-spec. models: Non-

operation

Other models: Operation

Automatic rain sensing

windshield*

Automatic adjusting mode of wiper

timing

Rain-sensing

mode/vehicle

speed interlock-

ing mode

Rain-sensing mode wi-

per

Power rear gate open

function*

Power rear gate opening by access

key fob

Non-operation/

Pressing twice/

Pressing and

holding

Pressing and holding

– CONTINUED –

SPECIFICATIONS

541

(544,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Hands-Free Power

Rear Gate

Setting the door to lock when the

rear gate closes

Operation/Non-

operation

Non-operation

Setting the time delay for closing the

door after performing a kicking mo-

tion

0 seconds/1 sec-

ond/2 seconds/3

seconds

2 seconds

*1: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

*2: If equipped

SPECIFICATIONS

542

(545,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s13

13-1. For U.S.A. ....................................................................................544

13-2. Tire Information...........................................................................544

Tire Labeling............................................................................... 544

Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................... 547

Glossary of Tire Terminology ...................................................... 548

Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices ............................. 553

Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ....................................... 553

Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Capacities .... 556

Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on Handling

and Stopping and on Tires ........................................................ 556

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit.................................... 557

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ..................................558

TREADWEAR .............................................................................. 558

TRACTION AA, A, B, C ................................................................ 558

TEMPERATURE A, B, C ............................................................... 558

13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA) ................................................559

13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report

a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................560

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(546,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

13-1. FOR U.S.A.

s13aa

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

13-2. TIRE INFORMATION

s13ab

TIRE LABELING

s13ab01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

Tire size

s13ab0101

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a

breakdown of its individual ele-

ments.

P Metric

s13ab0104

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

ZOM0243

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as

passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

544

(547,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(5) Rim diameter in inches

Load and Speed Rating De-

scriptions

s13ab0105

The load and speed rating de-

scriptions will appear following the

size designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indi-

cates the tire’s speed rating.

Example:

ZOM0239

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum

load a tire can carry at the

speed indicated by its speed

symbol, at maximum inflation

pressure.

For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs

(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs

(580 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a

load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabeti-

cal system describing a tire’s

capability to travel at estab-

lished and predetermined

speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if the

tires are worn out, damaged,

repaired, retreaded, or

otherwise altered from their

original condition. If tires are

repaired, retreaded, or

otherwise altered, they may

not be suitable for original

equipment tire designed

loads and speeds.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

s13ab0102

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

545

(548,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Type A

ZOM0793

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(3) Tire Size Code

(4) Tire Type Code

(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to repre-

sent the first full week of the

calendar year; the second two

figures represent the year. For

example, 0101 means the 1st

week of 2001.

*: The DOTsymbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

Type B

ZOM0925

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Plant Code

(3) Manufacturer’s Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to repre-

sent the first full week of the

calendar year; the second two

figures represent the year. For

example, 0101 means the 1st

week of 2001.

*: The DOTsymbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

Other markings

s13ab0103

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

s13ab0106

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “350 kPa (51

PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Maximum load rating

s13ab0107

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg

(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated tire

on any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be loaded up to

the tire’s rated load.

Construction type

s13ab0108

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

Construction

s13ab0109

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

546

(549,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

s13ab0110

For details, refer to “Uniform Tire

Quality Grading Standards” �P558.

RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLA-

TION PRESSURE

s13ab02

Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure

s13ab0201

For the recommended cold tire

inflation pressure for your vehicle’s

tires, refer to “

Tires” �P535.

Vehicle placard

s13ab0202

S_801501-W

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

S_D01240-W

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading in-

formation.

Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

s13ab0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

s13ab0204

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are af-

fected by the outside temperature.

It is best to check tire pressure

outdoors before driving the vehi-

cle. When a tire becomes warm,

the air inside it expands, causing

the tire pressure to increase. Be

careful not to mistakenly release

air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

547

(550,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMI-

NOLOGY

s13ab03

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may

be replaced) of automatic trans-

mission, power steering, power

brakes, power windows, power

seats, radio, and heater, to the

extent that these items are avail-

able as factory-installed equip-

ment (whether installed or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to

fit the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substan-

tially less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside

surface of a tubeless tire that

contains the inflating medium

within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white let-

tering or bears manufac-

turer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same

molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

548

(551,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that

must always face outward

when mounting on a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a ve-

hicle as specified in the third

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or

less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of

rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel

or other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

549

(552,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production op-

tions weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg)

in excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or ac-

cessory weight, including heavy

duty brakes, ride levelers, roof

rack, heavy duty battery, and spe-

cial trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufac-

turer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding

standard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s

designation for a rim by style or

code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or

protective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber com-

pound from the cord material in the

sidewall.

. Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index

equal to or greater than 110,

compared to the ASTM E1136-93

Standard Reference Test Tire,

when using the snow traction test

as described in ASTM F-1805-00,

Standard Test Method for Single

Wheel Driving Traction in a

Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-

Covered Surfaces, and that is

marked with an Alpine Symbol “

”

on at least one sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

550

(553,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating ca-

pacity.

. Vehicle maximum load on the

tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in ac-

cordance with Table 1 that is

appended to the end of this sec-

tion) and dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

551

(554,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

552

(555,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

TIRE CARE – MAINTENANCE

AND SAFETY PRACTICES

s13ab04

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious da-

mage, nails, and stones. At the

same time, check the tires for

abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become

visible. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the

tire is worn beyond the accep-

table limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at even low

speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

Possible resulting loss of vehi-

cle control can lead to an acci-

dent.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 6,000 miles (10,000

km). For details about tire rota-

tion, refer to “

Tire Rotation”

�P512

. Replace any damaged

or unevenly worn tire at the time

of rotation. After tire rotation,

adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are

correctly tightened. For infor-

mation about the tightening tor-

que and tightening sequence for

the wheel nuts, refer to “

Flat

Tires” �P459.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT – HOW

TO DETERMINE

s13ab05

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by

available cargo space. The load

limit of your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment

such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or

bike carrier, etc., and the tongue

load of a trailer. Therefore cargo

capacity can be calculated by the

following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

s13ab0501

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

553

(556,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

Example 1A

S_D01241-W

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or 800

lbs”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

ZOM0032

2. Calculate the available load

capacity by subtracting the to-

tal weight from the vehicle

capacity weight of 800 lbs (363

kg).

ZOM0042

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

Example 1B

S_D01242-W

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

ZOM0043

2. Calculate the available load

capacity.

ZOM0044

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs

(37 kg), so the cargo weight

must be reduced by 81 lbs (37

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

554

(557,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

kg) or more.

Example 2A

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed

nor intended to be used for

trailer towing. Therefore, never

tow a trailer with your vehicle.

S_D01243-W

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or 800

lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

ZOM0045

2. Calculate the available load

capacity.

ZOM0046

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

Example 2B

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed

nor intended to be used for

trailer towing. Therefore, never

tow a trailer with your vehicle.

S_D01244-W

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weigh-

ing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the

– CONTINUED –

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

555

(558,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

ZOM0041

2. Calculate the available load

capacity.

ZOM0048

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs

(10 kg), so the cargo weight

must be reduced by 22 lbs (10

kg) or more.

DETERMINING COMPATIBIL-

ITY OF TIRE AND VEHICLE

LOAD CAPACITIES

s13ab06

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the

maximum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Origi-

nal equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and

each axle’s GAWR are shown on

the vehicle certification label af-

fixed to the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not

only the maximum load rating of

tires but also loaded capacities of

the vehicle’s suspension, axles

and other parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

ADVERSE SAFETY CONSE-

QUENCES OF OVERLOADING

ON HANDLING AND STOPPING

AND ON TIRES

s13ab07

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehi-

cle and tire as shown in the

following. This could lead to an

accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

556

(559,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles

and other parts of the body

could break or experience ac-

celerated wear that will shorten

vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

STEPS FOR DETERMINING

CORRECT LOAD LIMIT

s13ab08

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and

there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg)

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650

lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

557

(560,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

13-3. UNIFORM TIRE QUAL-

ITY GRADING STANDARDS

s13ac

This information indicates the re-

lative performance of passenger

car tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and max-

imum section width. For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on pas-

senger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tem-

porary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

TREADWEAR

s13ac02

The treadwear grade is a com-

parative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under

controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual condi-

tions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices and dif-

ferences in road characteristics

and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B, C

s13ac03

The traction grades, from highest

to lowest, are AA, A, B and C.

Those grades represent the tire’s

ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled condi-

tions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B, C

s13ac04

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing

the tire’s resistance to the genera-

tion of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a speci-

fied indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature can

lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

558

(561,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, un-

derinflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in com-

bination, can cause heat buildup

and possible tire failure.

13-4. REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS (USA)

s13ah

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your deal-

er, or Subaru of America, Inc. To

contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave-

nue, SE, West Building, Washing-

ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from http://www.safe-

rcar.gov.

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

559

(562,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

13-5. HOW TO CONTACT

TRANSPORT CANADA IN

ORDER TO REPORT A

SAFETY CONCERN RELAT-

ING TO THE VEHICLE

(Canada)

s13cf

S_D01245-W

CONSUMER INFORMATION AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

560

(563,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s14

INDEX

(564,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
There is an illustrated index in this Owner’s Manual. If you have difficulty finding
your target items in the index, try to use the illustrated index.
Illustrated index ......................................................................................... 19
A
Abbreviation ................................................................................................ 8
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................................................... 354
Warning light ....................................................................................... 182
Access key fob ........................................................................................ 117
Warning indicator................................................................................. 189
Accessories ............................................................................................ 522
Accessory power outlet ............................................................................ 305
Air cleaner element .................................................................................. 500
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control...................................................................... 282
Manual climate control.......................................................................... 284
Air filtration system .................................................................................. 290
Airflow mode ........................................................................................... 284
Alarm system .......................................................................................... 142
All-Wheel Drive warning light..................................................................... 186
Alloy wheel ............................................................................................. 514
Cleaning ............................................................................................. 481
Antenna
Roof antenna ...................................................................................... 294
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................................................... 354
Arming the system ................................................................................... 142
Armrest .................................................................................................... 51
Ashtray................................................................................................... 313
Assist grip............................................................................................... 314
AT OIL TEMP warning light ....................................................................... 181
Audio
Antenna.............................................................................................. 294
Set..................................................................................................... 294
Auto dimmer cancel function ..................................................................... 174
Auto Start Stop system............................................................................. 372
Indicator light....................................................................................... 194
No Activity Detected indicator light......................................................... 194
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 194
Warning light ....................................................................................... 194
Auto Vehicle Hold function
ON indicator light ................................................................................. 186
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ................................................................... 256
Automatic headlight beam leveler
Warning light ....................................................................................... 193
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor
(ALR/ELR) ............................................................................................. 55
INDEX
562

(565,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
B
Battery ................................................................................................... 519
Drainage reduction functions ................................................................. 141
Jump starting ...................................................................................... 463
Replacement (access key fob) .............................................................. 526
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........................................ 341
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ........................................... 135
Replacement (transmitter)..................................................................... 527
Vehicle battery..................................................................................... 519
Booster cushion......................................................................................... 76
Booster seat.............................................................................................. 76
Bottle holder............................................................................................ 305
Brake
Assist ................................................................................................. 353
Disc ................................................................................................... 536
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ................................................. 354
Fluid............................................................................................ 504, 535
Pad .................................................................................................... 506
Parking............................................................................................... 363
Pedal ................................................................................................. 505
System ............................................................................................... 352
Tips.................................................................................................... 352
Brake system .......................................................................................... 352
Warning light ....................................................................................... 183
Braking................................................................................................... 352
Tips.................................................................................................... 352
Breaking-in of new brake pads .................................................................. 505
BSD/RCTA.............................................................................................. 388
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer.................................................. 391
OFF indicator ............................................................................... 195, 393
Warning indicator.......................................................................... 195, 394
Warning volume................................................................................... 392
Bulb
Chart.................................................................................................. 537
Replacing ........................................................................................... 523
C
Camera
Front view camera ............................................................................... 376
Rear view camera................................................................................ 383
Smart Rearview Mirror camera .............................................................. 268
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................................................. 317
Light................................................................................................... 299
Tie-down hooks ................................................................................... 319
Catalytic converter ................................................................................... 427
Center console ........................................................................................ 303
INDEX
563
14

(566,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Center information display (CID) ................................................................ 205
11.6-inch display models....................................................................... 219
Dual 7.0-inch display models................................................................. 207
Changing
Coolant............................................................................................... 500
Flat tire............................................................................................... 459
Oil and oil filter .................................................................................... 497
Charge warning light ................................................................................ 180
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light ............................. 179
Checking
Coolant level ....................................................................................... 499
Fluid level (brake fluid) ......................................................................... 504
Fluid level (washer fluid) ....................................................................... 514
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................................................. 496
Child restraint systems ............................................................................... 68
Installation of a booster cushion .............................................................. 76
Installation of a booster seat ................................................................... 76
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................................................... 73
Lower and top tether anchorages ............................................................ 78
Child safety............................................................................................... 10
Locks ................................................................................................. 145
Chime
Key reminder....................................................................................... 167
Light................................................................................................... 238
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 176
Cleaning
Alloy wheels........................................................................................ 481
Center information display .................................................................... 484
Interior................................................................................................ 483
Ventilation grille ................................................................................... 289
Climate control system ............................................................................. 277
Automatic ........................................................................................... 282
Manual ............................................................................................... 284
Clock...................................................................................................... 235
Daylight saving time ............................................................................. 237
Time zone........................................................................................... 237
Combination meter display (color LCD) ...................................................... 197
Compass ......................................................................................... 255, 256
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................................................... 343
Fluid............................................................................................ 503, 535
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP).......................................... 181
Coolant............................................................................................ 499, 535
Changing ............................................................................................ 500
Temperature gauge .............................................................................. 173
Cooling system........................................................................................ 498
Corrosion protection................................................................................. 482
Cup holder .............................................................................................. 304
Front passenger’s ................................................................................ 304
Rear passenger’s ................................................................................ 304
INDEX
564

(567,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
D
Daytime running light system .................................................................... 245
Defogger ................................................................................................ 254
Defrosting ............................................................................................... 288
Deicer .................................................................................................... 254
Differential gear oil............................................................................ 503, 534
Dimensions ............................................................................................. 532
Disarming the alarm system...................................................................... 143
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ..................................................... 354
Dome light .............................................................................................. 298
Door
Locks ................................................................................................. 137
Open indicator light .............................................................................. 186
Double trip meter ..................................................................................... 171
Drainage reduction functions ..................................................................... 170
Drive belts .............................................................................................. 502
Driver Monitoring System.......................................................................... 409
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 196
Operation indicator light........................................................................ 196
Temporary stop indicator light................................................................ 196
Warning light ....................................................................................... 196
DriverFocus ............................................................................................ 409
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................................................. 186
AWD models ....................................................................................... 430
Drinking ................................................................................................ 11
Drugs ................................................................................................... 11
Foreign countries ................................................................................. 429
Off road .............................................................................................. 431
Pets ..................................................................................................... 12
Snowy and icy roads............................................................................ 435
Tips...................................................................................... 349, 426, 430
Tired or sleepy ...................................................................................... 12
Winter ................................................................................................ 434
E
Electrical system...................................................................................... 535
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........................................ 355
Warning.............................................................................................. 184
Electronic parking brake ........................................................................... 363
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ...................................... 366
Indicator light....................................................................................... 184
Warning....................................................................................... 184, 366
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................................................ 55
Engine.................................................................................................... 532
Compartment overview......................................................................... 495
Coolant........................................................................................ 499, 535
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....................................................... 10, 427
Hood .................................................................................................. 493
INDEX
565
14

(568,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Hood open warning light ....................................................................... 186
Low oil level warning light ..................................................................... 180
Oil............................................................................................... 496, 533
Overheating ........................................................................................ 465
Starting & stopping ....................................................................... 330, 332
Event data recorder ................................................................................... 16
Exterior care ........................................................................................... 480
F
Flat tires ................................................................................................. 459
Floor mat ................................................................................................ 315
Fluid
Brake ................................................................................................. 504
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)............................................... 503
Fluid level ........................................................................................... 535
Fog light ................................................................................................. 248
Indicator light....................................................................................... 194
Switch ................................................................................................ 248
Front
Differential gear oil........................................................................ 503, 534
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .................................. 179
Seatbelt pretensioners............................................................................ 64
Turn signal light ................................................................................... 523
Front fog light.......................................................................................... 248
Indicator light....................................................................................... 194
Switch ................................................................................................ 248
Front seat heater ....................................................................................... 52
Front seats................................................................................................ 37
Forward and backward adjustment .......................................................... 39
Head restraint adjustment ....................................................................... 44
Manual seat .......................................................................................... 39
Power seat............................................................................................ 40
Reclining .............................................................................................. 39
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ...................................................... 39
Fuel ....................................................................................................... 324
Consumption indicator .......................................................................... 201
Economy hints..................................................................................... 426
Filler lid and cap .................................................................................. 325
Gauge ................................................................................................ 172
Requirements............................................................................... 324, 532
Function settings ..................................................................................... 541
Fuses ..................................................................................................... 521
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ............................................................ 439
Glove box ............................................................................................... 302
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................................................ 439
INDEX
566

(569,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
H
Hands-Free Power Rear Gate function....................................................... 153
Hands-Free Power Rear Gate off switch..................................................... 154
Hazard warning flasher...................................................................... 170, 456
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................................................. 44
Rear seat.............................................................................................. 49
Headlight
Aim adjustment.................................................................................... 525
Beam leveler ....................................................................................... 247
Bulb replacement................................................................................. 523
Bulb wattage ....................................................................................... 537
Control switch ..................................................................................... 238
Flasher ............................................................................................... 242
Indicator light....................................................................................... 194
OFF delay function .............................................................................. 240
Warning light ................................................................................ 193, 523
Welcome lighting function ..................................................................... 240
High Beam Assist
Function ............................................................................................. 242
Indicator light....................................................................................... 193
High/low beam change (dimmer) ............................................................... 241
Hill descent control .................................................................................. 360
Indicator light....................................................................................... 195
HomeLink
®
....................................................................................... 256, 264
Hook
Cargo tie-down .................................................................................... 319
Shopping bag...................................................................................... 316
Towing and tie-down ............................................................................ 466
Horn....................................................................................................... 273
Hose and connections .............................................................................. 499
I
Icy road surface warning indicator.............................................................. 195
Ignition switch ......................................................................................... 166
Light................................................................................................... 167
Illumination brightness control ................................................................... 174
Immobilizer ............................................................................................. 131
Indicator light (security indicator light)..................................................... 192
Indicator light
Auto Start Stop.................................................................................... 194
Auto Start Stop OFF ............................................................................ 194
Auto Vehicle Hold ON .......................................................................... 186
BSD/RCTA OFF ........................................................................... 195, 393
BSD/RCTA warning....................................................................... 195, 394
Door open........................................................................................... 186
Driver Monitoring System OFF .............................................................. 196
Driver Monitoring System operation ....................................................... 196
Driver Monitoring System temporary stop ........................................ 196, 417
INDEX
567
14

(570,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Electronic parking brake ....................................................................... 184
Front fog light...................................................................................... 194
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .......................... 179
Headlight ............................................................................................ 194
High beam .......................................................................................... 193
High beam assist .......................................................................... 193, 242
Hill descent control .............................................................................. 195
Immobilizer ......................................................................................... 192
Malfunction ......................................................................................... 179
RAB OFF............................................................................................ 196
Security .............................................................................................. 192
Select lever/Gear position ..................................................................... 193
SI-DRIVE............................................................................................ 192
Sonar audible alarm OFF ..................................................................... 196
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ...................................................... 193
Turn signal.......................................................................................... 193
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF.............................................................. 188
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ....................................................... 188
X-MODE............................................................................................. 195
Inside mirror.............................................................................. 255, 256, 264
Interior lights ........................................................................................... 298
J
Jack-up point........................................................................................... 459
Jump starting .......................................................................................... 463
K
Key ........................................................................................................ 117
Number plate ...................................................................................... 117
Reminder chime .................................................................................. 167
Replacement....................................................................................... 132
Keyless access entry function ................................................................... 120
Keyless access with push-button start system............................................. 117
Disabling keyless access functions ........................................................ 127
Locking and unlocking doors ................................................................. 120
Warning chimes and warning indicator ................................................... 189
When access key fob does not operate properly ..................................... 471
Keyless entry system ............................................................................... 133
L
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................................................. 66
Leather seat materials .............................................................................. 483
Light
Backup ............................................................................................... 538
Cargo area .................................................................................. 299, 538
Control switch ..................................................................................... 238
Daytime running ........................................................................... 245, 538
Dome ................................................................................................. 298
INDEX
568

(571,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Front fog...................................................................................... 248, 538
Front turn..................................................................................... 523, 538
Ignition switch ..................................................................................... 167
Map ............................................................................................ 298, 538
Rear combination................................................................................. 523
Rear gate .................................................................................... 299, 538
Stop ................................................................................................... 538
Tail..................................................................................................... 538
Turn signal............................................................................ 248, 523, 538
Vanity mirror................................................................................. 301, 538
Loading your vehicle ................................................................................ 438
Low tire pressure warning light .................................................................. 181
Lower and top tether anchorage .................................................................. 78
M
Maintenance
Precautions......................................................................................... 489
Schedule ............................................................................................ 489
Seatbelt ................................................................................................ 61
Tips.................................................................................................... 492
Tools .................................................................................................. 458
Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) ........................... 179
Manual
Mode (continuously variable transmission) .............................................. 347
Seat ..................................................................................................... 39
Map light ................................................................................................ 298
Maximum load limits................................................................................. 446
Meters and gauges .................................................................................. 171
Mirror defogger........................................................................................ 254
Mirrors.................................................................................................... 255
Moonroof ......................................................................................... 159, 475
N
New vehicle break-in driving ..................................................................... 426
O
Odometer ............................................................................................... 171
Off road driving........................................................................................ 431
Oil filter................................................................................................... 497
Oil level
Differential gear ................................................................................... 503
Engine................................................................................................ 496
Warning light ....................................................................................... 180
Oil pressure warning light ......................................................................... 180
On-road and off-road driving ....................................................................... 13
Outside
Mirror defogger.................................................................................... 254
Mirrors................................................................................................ 269
INDEX
569
14

(572,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Overhead console.................................................................................... 302
Overheating engine.................................................................................. 465
P
Parking
Brake ................................................................................................. 363
Tips.................................................................................................... 366
Passenger seatbelt reminder..................................................................... 176
Periodic inspections ................................................................................. 428
Petrol fuel ............................................................................................... 324
PIN Code Access .................................................................................... 123
Power
Outlets ............................................................................................... 305
Outside mirrors.................................................................................... 269
Rear gate ........................................................................................... 150
Rear gate button.................................................................................. 151
Seat ..................................................................................................... 40
Steering.............................................................................................. 351
Steering warning light........................................................................... 187
Precautions against vehicle modification................................................ 67, 111
Preparing to drive .................................................................................... 329
Push-button
Ignition switch ..................................................................................... 168
Starting and stopping engine................................................................. 332
R
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
OFF indicator ...................................................................................... 196
ON/OFF setting ................................................................................... 407
Warning indicator.......................................................................... 196, 408
RCTA ..................................................................................................... 389
Rear
Combination lights ............................................................................... 523
Differential gear oil........................................................................ 503, 534
Gate............................................................................................ 148, 473
Gate light............................................................................................ 299
Turn signal light ................................................................................... 523
Rear seat.................................................................................................. 46
Armrest ................................................................................................ 51
Folding down......................................................................................... 47
Head restraint adjustment ....................................................................... 49
Heater .................................................................................................. 53
Reclining .............................................................................................. 49
Rear Seat Reminder .................................................................................. 67
Rear view camera.................................................................................... 383
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................................................ 254
Wiper and washer switch ...................................................................... 252
INDEX
570

(573,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Wiper blade rubber .............................................................................. 518
Wiper blades ....................................................................................... 518
Recommended
Brake fluid .......................................................................................... 535
Continuously variable transmission fluid ................................................. 535
Differential gear oil............................................................................... 534
Engine oil ........................................................................................... 533
Spark plugs......................................................................................... 535
Refueling ................................................................................................ 325
Remote engine start system...................................................................... 335
Remote keyless entry system.................................................................... 133
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................................................ 505
Wiper blades ....................................................................................... 516
Replacing
Access key fob battery ......................................................................... 526
Air cleaner element .............................................................................. 500
Battery (remote keyless entry system).................................................... 135
Battery of access key fob ..................................................................... 526
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ...................................... 135
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................................................ 527
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................... 523
Front turn signal light ........................................................................... 523
Headlight ............................................................................................ 523
Rear combination light.......................................................................... 523
Rear turn signal light ............................................................................ 523
Reverse Automatic Braking system............................................................ 397
Rocking the vehicle.................................................................................. 438
Roof rack................................................................................................ 440
Roof rails ................................................................................................ 441
Roof tent ................................................................................................ 441
S
Safety
Precautions when driving.......................................................................... 9
Symbol ................................................................................................... 7
Warnings ................................................................................................ 7
Seat
Fabric................................................................................................. 483
Front .................................................................................................... 37
Front seat ventilation.............................................................................. 53
Heater .................................................................................................. 52
Height adjustment.................................................................................. 39
Manual seat .......................................................................................... 39
Power................................................................................................... 40
Rear..................................................................................................... 46
Seatbelt ................................................................................................ 9, 54
Extender............................................................................................... 62
Fastening.............................................................................................. 55
INDEX
571
14

(574,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Maintenance ......................................................................................... 61
Pretensioners ........................................................................................ 64
Safety tips............................................................................................. 54
Warning light and chime ....................................................................... 176
Security
Alarm system ...................................................................................... 142
Immobilizer ......................................................................................... 131
Indicator light....................................................................................... 192
Select lever
Position indicator ................................................................................. 193
Shift lock function ................................................................................ 346
Shopping bag hook .................................................................................. 316
Shoulder pretensioners............................................................................... 65
SI-DRIVE................................................................................................ 350
Indicator light....................................................................................... 192
Smart Rearview Mirror.............................................................................. 264
Snow tires........................................................................................ 437, 506
Snowy and icy roads................................................................................ 435
Sounding a panic alarm............................................................................ 135
Spark plugs...................................................................................... 502, 535
Specifications .......................................................................................... 532
Speedometer........................................................................................... 171
SRS
Curtain airbag ..................................................................................... 102
Frontal airbag........................................................................................ 91
Side airbag ......................................................................................... 102
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................................. 9, 82
SRS airbag system
Monitors ............................................................................................. 109
Servicing ............................................................................................ 110
Warning light ....................................................................................... 178
Starting & stopping engine ................................................................. 330, 332
State emission testing (U.S. only) .............................................................. 328
Steering lock .................................................................................... 331, 334
Steering Responsive Headlight.................................................................. 246
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 193
Warning light ....................................................................................... 193
Steering wheel
Heated Steering Wheel system ............................................................. 272
Lock............................................................................................ 331, 334
Power................................................................................................. 351
Tilt/telescopic ...................................................................................... 271
Warning light ....................................................................................... 187
Stop light ......................................................................................... 523, 538
Storage compartment ............................................................................... 302
Sun visors............................................................................................... 300
Sunshade ............................................................................................... 161
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............................................... 82
Synthetic leather upholstery ...................................................................... 483
INDEX
572

(575,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
T
Tachometer ............................................................................................. 171
Temperature gauge .................................................................................. 173
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ...................................................................................... 181
Temporary spare tire ................................................................................ 456
Tether (child restraint system) ..................................................................... 78
Tie-down hooks ....................................................................................... 466
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel..................................................................... 271
Tire
Chains................................................................................................ 437
Information.......................................................................................... 544
Inspection ........................................................................................... 508
Pressures and wear ............................................................................. 509
Replacement....................................................................................... 512
Rotation.............................................................................................. 512
Size and pressure................................................................................ 535
Types ................................................................................................. 506
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...................................... 362, 462, 507
Screen ............................................................................................... 363
Warning light ....................................................................................... 181
Tires and wheels ..................................................................................... 506
Tools ...................................................................................................... 458
Top tether anchorages................................................................................ 78
Towing.................................................................................................... 466
All wheels on the ground ...................................................................... 470
Flat-bed truck ...................................................................................... 469
Hooks................................................................................................. 466
Weight................................................................................................ 446
Trailer
Connecting ......................................................................................... 444
Hitch ........................................................................................... 443, 448
Towing................................................................................................ 446
Towing tips.......................................................................................... 450
Trip meter ............................................................................................... 171
Turn signal
Indicator lights ..................................................................................... 193
Lever.................................................................................................. 248
U
Under-floor storage compartment............................................................... 319
USB power supply ................................................................................... 306
V
Valet mode.............................................................................................. 144
Vanity mirror............................................................................................ 301
Vehicle
Capacity weight ................................................................................... 439
INDEX
573
14

(576,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Identification........................................................................................ 540
Symbols ................................................................................................. 9
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ............................................................................... 188
Operation indicator light........................................................................ 188
System ............................................................................................... 356
Warning light ....................................................................................... 187
Ventilator ................................................................................................ 276
W
Warning and indicator lights ...................................................................... 175
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system......................................... 189
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 176
Warning indicator
Icy road surface................................................................................... 195
RAB ............................................................................................ 196, 408
Warning light
ABS ................................................................................................... 182
Access key ......................................................................................... 189
All-Wheel Drive.................................................................................... 186
AT OIL TEMP ...................................................................................... 181
Auto Start Stop.................................................................................... 194
Automatic headlight beam leveler .......................................................... 193
Brake system ...................................................................................... 183
Charge ............................................................................................... 180
CHECK ENGINE ................................................................................. 179
Driver Monitoring System...................................................................... 196
Engine hood open ............................................................................... 186
Engine low oil level .............................................................................. 180
Icy road surface................................................................................... 195
Keyless access with push-button start system......................................... 189
LED headlight ..................................................................................... 193
Low fuel.............................................................................................. 186
Low tire pressure ................................................................................. 181
Oil pressure ........................................................................................ 180
Power steering .................................................................................... 187
Seatbelt .............................................................................................. 176
SRS airbag system .............................................................................. 178
Vehicle Dynamics Control ..................................................................... 187
Windshield washer fluid ........................................................................ 186
Warranties .................................................................................................. 6
Warranties and maintenance..................................................................... 446
Washing ................................................................................................. 480
Waxing and polishing ............................................................................... 481
Wear indicators ....................................................................................... 511
Welcome lighting function ......................................................................... 240
Wheel
Alloy................................................................................................... 514
INDEX
574

(577,1)
北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27
Balance .............................................................................................. 510
Nut tightening torque............................................................................ 535
Replacement....................................................................................... 513
Windows................................................................................................. 145
Windshield
Washer fluid........................................................................................ 514
Wiper and washer switches .................................................................. 251
Wiper blades ....................................................................................... 516
Wiper deicer........................................................................................ 254
Winter
Driving................................................................................................ 434
Tires............................................................................................ 437, 506
Wiper and washer.................................................................................... 249
Wiper deicer............................................................................................ 254
X
X-MODE................................................................................................. 359
Indicator light....................................................................................... 195
INDEX
575
14

(532,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(531,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(532,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(531,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(532,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(531,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(579,1)

北米Model "A8370BE-A" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 27

s99

GAS STATION REFERENCE

s99aa

FUEL

s99aa01

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

FUEL OCTANE RATING

s99aa02

AKI

s99aa0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers

and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

RON

s99aa0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

LIMIT OF ETHANOL CONTENT

s99aa09

No more than 15%

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

s99aa03

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

ENGINE OIL

s99aa04

Use only the following oils.

. ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6B, which

can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Shield mark)

. or ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6A, which

can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

. or API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with the words “RESOURCE

CONSERVING”

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil” �P533.

ENGINE OIL CAPACITY

s99aa05

4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the

engine oil is changed with an oil filter. Check the oil level using an oil level gauge after

refilling the engine with oil. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to

“Engine Oil” �P496.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE

s99aa06

Refer to “Tires” �P535.

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Subaru 2025 Forester Base

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2025 FORESTER BASE Questions and Answers

Related Products

‎MPN1BBTD004-00 Orion Motor Tech Pressure Bleeder, 2.5L Brake Pressure Bleeder with 50.7mm Adapter, 2.6qt Manual Power Brake Bleeder with 500mL Brake Bleeder Bottle Compatible with Ford Subaru Nissan Infinity

CBL0201 True Mods H6054 H4 LED Headlight Wiring Harness [Negative Switched Conversion] [Fused] Universal H4 Head Light Relay Harness Kit for 9003 H6024 5x7 7x6 4x6 Subaru Toyota Jeep Sealed Beam Headlamp

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited